Você está na página 1de 572

JAN-701B/901B

ECDIS

INSTRUCTION
MANUAL

For further information,contact:

Not use the asbestos

URL http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420
e-mail : tmsc@jrc.co.jp
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile : +31-20-658-0755
e-mail : service@jrceurope.com
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile : +1-206-654-7030
e-mail : marineservice@jrcamerica.com
CODE No.7ZPNA4056D 01ETM ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified
DEC. 2012 Edition 6 JRC Printed in Japan
Cautions for High Voltage
High voltages, ranging from several hundreds to tens of thousands of volts, are used in
electronic apparatus, such as radio and radar instruments. These voltages are totally
harmless in most operations. However, touching a component inside the unit is very
dangerous. (Any person other than authorized service engineers should not service,
inspect, or adjust the unit.)
High voltages on the order of tens of thousand volts are most likely to cause instant
deaths from electrical shocks. At times, even voltages on the order of several hundred volts
could lead to electrocution. To defend against electrical shock hazards, don't put your hand
into the inside of apparatus. When you put in a hand unavoidably in case of urgent, it is
strongly suggested to turn off the power switch and allow the capacitors, etc. to discharge
with a wire having its one end positively grounded to remove residual charges. Before you
put your hand into the inside of apparatus, make sure that internal parts are no longer
charged. Extra protection is ensured by wearing dry cotton gloves at this time. Another
important precaution to observe is to keep one hand in your pocket at a time, instead of
using both hands at the same time.
It is also important to select a secure footing to work on, as the secondary effects of
electrical shock hazards can be more serious. In the event of electrical shocks, disinfect the
burnt site completely and obtain medical care immediately.

Precautions for Rescue of Victim of


Electric Shock
When a victim of electric shock is found, turn off the power source and ground the circuit
immediately. If this is impossible, move the victim away from the unit as quick as possible
without touching him or her with bare hands. He or she can safely be moved if an insulating
material such as dry wood plate or cloth is used.
Breathing may stop if current flows through the respiration center of brain due to electric
shock. If the electric shock is not large, breathing can be restored by artificial respiration. A
victim of electric shock looks pale and his or her pulse may become very weak or stop,
resulting in unconsciousness and rigidity at worst. It is necessary to perform first aid
immediately.
Method of First-Aid Treatment

Precautions for First-Aid Treatments


Whenever a person is struck by an electrical shock, give the patient artificial respiration
immediately on the spot, unless it is absolutely necessary to move the patient for safety's
sake. Once started, artificial respiration should be continued rhythmically.

(1) Refrain from touching the patient carelessly as a result of the accident; the first-aider
could suffer from electrical shocks by himself or herself.

(2) Turn off the power calmly and certainly, and move the patient apart from the cable
gently.

(3) Call or send for a physician or ambulance immediately, or ask someone to call doctor.

(4) Lay the patient on the back, loosening the necktie, clothes, belts and so on.

(5) (a) Feel the patient's pulse.


(b) Check the heartbeat by bringing your ear close to the patient's heart.
(c) Check for respiration by bringing your face or the back of your hand to the patient's
face.
(d) Check the size of patient's pupils.

(6) Opening the patient's mouth, remove artificial teeth, cigarettes, chewing gum, etc. if
any. With the patient's mouth open, stretch the tongue and insert a towel or the like into
the mouth to prevent the tongue from being withdrawn into the throat. (If the patient
clenches the teeth so tight that the mouth won't open, use a screwdriver or the like to
force the mouth open and then insert a towel or the like into the mouth.)

(7) Wipe off the mouth to prevent foaming mucus and saliva from accumulating.
Treatment to Give When the Patient Has a
Pulse Beating but Has Ceased to Breathe
Performing mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration - Fig. 1
(1) Bend the patient's face backward until it is directed to look back. (A pillow may be
placed under the neck.)
(2) Pull up the lower jaw to open up the airway. (to spread the airway)
(3) Pinching the patient's nose, breathe deeply and blow your breath into the patient's
mouth strongly, with care to close it completely. Then, move your mouth away and
take a deep breath, and blow into his or her mouth. Repeat blowing at 10 to 15 times
a minute (always with the patient's nostrils closed).
(4) Continue artificial respiration until natural respiration is restored.
(5) If the patient's mouth won't open easily, insert a pipe, such as one made of rubber or
vinyl, into either nostril. Then, take a deep breath and blow into the nostril through
the pipe, with the other nostril and the mouth completely closed.
(6) The patient may stand up abruptly upon recovering consciousness. Keep the patient
lying calmly, giving him or her coffee, tea or any other hot drink (but not alcoholic
drink) to keep him or her warm.

Meouth-to-mouth artificial respiration with the patient's head lifted


(1) Lift the back part of the patient's
head. Support the forehead with one
of your hand and the neck with the
other hand..
Many patients will have their airways
opened by lifting their head in this
way to ease mouth-to-mouth artificial
respiration.

(2) Closing the patient's mouth with your


mouth, press your cheek against the
patient's nose.
Alternatively, hold the patient's nose
with your finger to prevent air leak
.

(3) Blowing air into the patient's lungs.


Blow air into the patient's lungs until
chest is seen to rise. The first 10
breaths must be blown as fast as
possible.

Fig.1 Mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration


Treatment to Give When the Patient Has No
Pulse Beating and Has Ceased to Breathe
Performing cardiac massage - Fig. 2
If the patient has no pulse beating, with the pupils open and no heartbeat being heard,
the patient has a cardiac arrest and requires immediate artificial respiration. Continue
this until a medical specialist arrives, and follow his or her directions after that.

(1) Putting one hand on about the lower one third of the patient's ribs and the other hand
over the back of the first, with your elbow fully stretched (with bended elbow, you
cant press to the extent the patients ribs are depressed), apply your body weight to
the hands to press the patient's body until it is depressed about 2 cm (Repeat this
about 50 times a minute). (Cardiac massage.)
(2) If only one first-aider is available, perform a cardiac massage about 15 times and
then give mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration 2 times. Repeat this sequence. If two
first-aiders are available, while one person performs a cardiac massage 15 times,
and the other should give mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration 2 times. Repeat this
sequence (combined cardiac massage and mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration
method).
(3) Check the patient's pupils and feel the pulse from time to time. When the pupils are
restored to normal and the pulse begins to beat regularly, stop treating and keep the
patient calm while giving him or her coffee, tea or any other hot drink to keep him or
her warm while watching him or her carefully.

Fig.2 Cardiac massage


PREFACE

Thank you for purchasing the JRC JAN-701B/901B ECDIS/Conning Display.


This equipment consists of ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information
System) and Conning Display.
This ECDIS meets the performance standards of the IMO (International Maritime
Organization) and the IHO (International Hydro graphic Organization), and serves to
improve safety, reduce fuel combustion, reduce voyage time and automate voyages.

For the best operation and performance results, read this manual thoroughly
before use.
Keep this manual in a convenient place for future reference.
Make use of this manual when experiencing operation difficulties.
This LCD uses 1,310,000 (JAN-701B)/1,920,000 (JAN-901B) or more TFTs
(Thin Film Transistor).
If some pixels on the screen are not clear, the color is different, or the screen is
brighter than usual, it is not because of defect, instead it is because of inherent
characteristic of the TFT display technology.
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice at any time.

v
Before Operation

Pictorial Indication
Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and are
shown on this equipment so that you can operate them safely and
correctly and prevent any danger to you and / or to other persons
and any damage to your property during operation. Such
indications and their meanings are as follows.
Please understand them before you read this manual:

This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be in


danger of being killed or seriously injured if this indication is
neglected and this equipment is not operated correctly.

This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be


injured or any property damage is supposed to occur if this
indication is neglected and this equipment is not operated
correctly.

Examples of pictorial indication


The mark represents CAUTION (including DANGER and WARNING).
Detailed content of CAUTION (Electric Shock in the example on the
Electric left.) is shown in the mark.

The mark represents prohibition.


Detailed content of the prohibited action (Disassembling Prohibited in
Disassembling the example on the left) is shown in the mark.

The mark represents instruction.


Detailed content of the instruction (Disconnect the power plug in the
example on the left) is shown in the mark.

Warning label
There is a warning label on the top cover of the equipment.
Do not try to remove, break or modify the label.

vi
Precautions Upon Equipment Operation

Never remove the cover of this equipment.


Touching the high-voltage section inside will cause an electric shock.

Do not attempt to disassemble or tamper with this equipment.


Otherwise, a fire, an electric shock, or a malfunction may occur.

Do not place a glass or cup containing water, etc., or a small metal object on
this equipment.
If water or such object gets inside, a fire, an electric shock, or a malfunction
may occur.

In case water or a metal object gets inside the equipment, turn off the power
immediately, unplug the power supply cable from an electric outlet, and contact
our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire, an
electric shock or a malfunction.

In case you find smoke, strange smell or unusual heat coming from the
equipment, turn off the power immediately, unplug the power supply cable from
an electric outlet, and contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office
to request servicing.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire or
an electric shock.

Do not use the offset function during navigation.


If the equipment is used with the offset value entered as the own ship position,
the position of your ship displayed on the screen is shifted from the real one,
and accidents may result.
When the offset values are entered, the background color of the position panel
on the display panel is colored in sky blue, and the message Position Shift is
displayed in the message display area. Check these indications, and cancel the
offset function if necessary.

vii
If the LCD module breaks and the liquid inside spills out to stick to your skin,
wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15 minutes. If you
find any skin problem afterwards, consult a doctor immediately. If the liquid gets
in your eye, wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15
minutes, and then, consult a doctor as soon as possible.

Before starting automatic sailing, be sure to check the safety of the route and
crossing safety contour.
Otherwise, accidents may result.

If the own ship has arrived at the boundary of a WPT during automatic sailing,
be sure to check the safety and perform turning manually (press the [TURN]
key ).
Otherwise, the ship keeps the course with the leg bearing, and accidents may
result.

Input the parameter accurately according to the specification of the ship.


Otherwise, accidents may result.

After changing the setting, execute to exit Navigation & Planning.

Otherwise, accidents may result because ECDIS is not affected by the set
parameter.

Before disposing of used lithium batteries, insulate them by applying tapes on


their and terminals.
Otherwise, they may short-circuit to generate heat, explode or cause a fire.

Before reading and writing of the file by using the USB storage, confirm that
there is not a computer virus in the USB storage.
Otherwise they may affect other equipments and may cause a malfunction.

Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment.


Checking or repair by an unqualified person may cause a fire or an electric
shock.
Contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.

viii
Do not use or leave the equipment under direct sunlight or in the temperatures
above 55C for a long time.
Otherwise, a fire or a malfunction may occur.

Do not block the ventilation opening of the equipment.


Otherwise, heat may accumulate inside to cause a fire or a malfunction.

This equipment is intended for use as an aid to navigation only.


If no backup measures are taken, such as using another EDIS unit for
confirmation, be sure to use official marine charts together with this
equipment to make any navigational decision.
This equipment is not designed to assess the positional information
automatically for navigation.
The positional information should always be checked by the user against
such information from other sources.
Otherwise, accidents may result.

Do not touch the equipment with hands or gloves wet with water.
Otherwise, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur.

Do not turn off the power during index creation by Chart Portfolio.
Otherwise, a malfunction may occur.

Do not leave the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive after use.
Also, do not leave the CDDVD in the DVD drive.
Malfunctions of the drives may result.

Do not place any object on the operation panel.


Avoid placing anything extremely hot, in particular, as this may deform the
panel.
Do not apply any undue shock on the operation panel, trackball and dials.
Otherwise, a malfunction may result.

ix
Do not turn on the power of the equipment with a floppy disk inserted in the
floppy disk drive.
The equipment will not start normally.

If checking of the equipment is unavoidably necessary, be sure to turn off the


power before starting checking.
Otherwise, a fire or a malfunction may occur.

If a fan alarm or CPU temperature rise alarm has occurred, immediately turn off
the power.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire or a
malfunction.
After turning off the power, contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local
office to request servicing.

Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84).Use of


routes edited with any other geodetic systems may cause accidents.

During sailing, be sure to check own ships position and bearing as often as
necessary, regardless of whether the automatic sailing is in operation or not.
Otherwise, accidents may result.

Do not turn off the power during Backup / Restore.


Otherwise, a malfunction may occur.

x
Do not leave the USB Storage in the USB port after use.
Malfunctions may result.

In the case of turning on the power under the condition of low temperature, do
pre-heat less than 30 minutes.
The equipment will not start normally.

Recover the system with [Recovery Boot CD] after reading an explanation well,
and having understood the function of [Recovery Boot CD] enough.
Dont continue the recovery as leave disk structure abnormal. Otherwise a
malfunction may occur.
This equipment is the system which is totally different from ECDIS
JAN701B/901B. Dont recover the system by a tool except attached [Recovery
Boot CD]. Otherwise a trouble and a malfunction may occur.

Use the Recovery Boot CD which is attached each device.

When using the Recovery Boot CD which is attached other device, it might
cause the trouble and the breakdown of the equipment.

The judgement of formal or informal about chart is depend on the


Administration organization of the flag state. About the offically of the chart,
please contact the Administration organization.

xi
Equipment Appearance

Stand-alone type (JAN-701B)

xii
Stand-alone type (JAN-901B)

xiii
Glossary
AIS : Automatic Identification System

ARCS : Admiralty Raster Chart Service. A raster chart published by UKHO.

ARPA : Automatic RADAR Plotting Aid. Collision prevention radar.

AUTO SAIL : The system automatically navigates to keep the scheduled route. Same as
automatic sailing.

Base CD : Chart CD containing a complete chart data.

Cell Permit : A file containing an encryption key for S-63 chart. Supplied by UKHO,
PRIMAR STAVANGER, and Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of
Japan Coast Guard.

Chart Portfolio : Software to manage the charts. Imports and updates the charts.

C-MAP Ed.3 : C-MAP Edition 3. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.

C-MAP : Nautical chart in a digital format by C-MAP Norway.

CTS : Course to steer. Heading command.

COG : Course Over the Ground

Data Server : Organization providing S-63 chart.

Display : Screen displayed on the LCD.

DIST : Distance

DR : Dead Reckoning

EBL : Electronic Bearing Lines

ECDIS : Electronic Chart Display and Information System

ENC : Electronic Navigation Chart. Meaning S-57 and S-63.

ETA : Estimated Time of Arrival

ETD : Estimated Time of Departure

F.ETA : Final ETA. Estimated time of arrival to the final waypoint.

xiv
GC : Great Circle

HDG : Ships heading

Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department:


Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard.
Publisher of ENC.

Import (for Chart Portfolio) : A procedure of enabling the chart supplied by Base CD to be displayed on
ECDIS.

Leg : Line between two consecutive waypoints

LMT : Local Mean Time

LON : Longitude

Primary : Main positioning sensor.

PRIMAR STAVANGER : A Norwegian company supplying charts. Publisher of encrypted charts, S-63.

Range : An area of the chart displayed on the screen. Represented by one half of the
length of the chart display screen.

RL : Rhumb Line

Rubber band : Border that indicates the selected range.

S-57 : IHO transfer standard for digital hydrographic data.

S-63 : IHO Data Protection Scheme

SA Certificate file : An electronic file certifying the supplier of S-63 chart. Required for import/
update of S-63 chart.

Scale : The display scale.

SENC : System Electronic Navigational Chart

Ship-avoiding operation : To operate the ship in order to avoid obstacles during automatic navigation,
regardless of the scheduled route.

SOG : Speed Over the Ground

Spot depth : Numeric representation of depth.

TCS : Track Control Systems

UKHO : United Kingdom Hydrographic Office

xv
Update (for Chart Portfolio) : A procedure of reflecting the update data supplied by Update CD on the
imported chart.

Update CD : Chart CD containing the chart data updated from Base CD. Base CD data has
been imported.

USER CODE : A user-specific code assigned by JRC. Required in using ARCS and S-63
charts.

UTC : Universal Time, Coordinated

VRM : Variable Range Markers

WOL : Wheel Over Line

WOP : Wheel Over Point

WPT : Waypoint

WPT-WPT : The division of the leg specified by two waypoints. Displays data between two
consecutive waypoints.

XTD : Cross Track Distance

XTL : Cross Track Limit

xvi
Contents
PREFACE ................................................................................................................................................... v
Before Operation ............................................................................................................................. vi
Precautions Upon Equipment Operation ....................................................................................... vii
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... xiv
1 Overview ...............................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Function.................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Features ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3 Components............................................................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.4 Construction ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.5 System Configuration........................................................................................................................................................1-12
2 Names and Functions ...........................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Function of Operation Panel and LCD brilliance control ...................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Function of the Screen (ECDIS)..................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.1 Display Panel ............................................................................................................2-7
2.2.1.1 Own Ship Information .....................................................................................2-8
2.2.1.2 The Other Ship Displaying Status .................................................................2-10
2.2.1.3 Auto Sailing Status ........................................................................................2-12
2.2.1.4 The setting of the route .................................................................................2-12
2.2.1.5 The other information on the own ship..........................................................2-13
2.2.1.6 CHART Information for S-57/C-MAP ............................................................2-15
2.2.1.7 CHART Information for ARCS.......................................................................2-16
2.2.1.8 Tools Panel....................................................................................................2-17
2.2.1.9 Brilliance Setting Panel .................................................................................2-18
2.2.2 Menu Title Bar .........................................................................................................2-19
3 Basic Operation of ECDIS ....................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Menu Operation ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.1 How to Select the Menu ............................................................................................3-3
3.1.1.1 How to Use the Trackball ................................................................................3-3
3.1.1.2 How to Select the Menu..................................................................................3-5
3.1.1.3 How to Use the context Menu.........................................................................3-8
3.1.2 Various Panels ........................................................................................................3-10
3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters.........................................................................3-12
3.1.3.1 Use of the PS/2 Keyboard ............................................................................3-12
3.1.3.2 Use of the Software Keyboard ......................................................................3-13
3.1.3.3 Numerical Input .............................................................................................3-14
3.1.3.4 Character Input .............................................................................................3-16
3.2 General Flowchart ..............................................................................................................................................................3-17
3.2.1 General Flowchart ...................................................................................................3-17
3.2.2 Flowchart for Sailing................................................................................................3-18
3.3 Power ON/OFF and Preparation..................................................................................................................................3-20
3.3.1 Power ON ([POWER]).............................................................................................3-20
3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu .....................................................................................3-21
3.3.3 Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS Only).................................................3-22
3.3.4 Power OFF Operation .............................................................................................3-24
3.3.5 Adjusting the Brightness and Sound Volume ..........................................................3-24
3.3.6 Changing the Display Color ([DAY/NIGHT])............................................................3-28
3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK]) ............................................................3-30
3.3.8 Displaying the Radar Image ([RADAR])..................................................................3-37
3.3.9 The AIS/TT target Display .......................................................................................3-40
3.3.9.1 AIS/TT display ON/OFF ................................................................................3-40
3.3.9.2 Opening the AIS/TT list .................................................................................3-41
3.3.9.3 Target Track ..................................................................................................3-46
3.3.9.4 File operation ................................................................................................3-49
3.3.9.5 Display Received Message...........................................................................3-50
3.3.9.6 AIS sentence .................................................................................................3-50
3.3.9.7 Activating and Deactivating AIS Targets .......................................................3-50
3.3.9.8 Panel Display of AIS/TT Target .....................................................................3-52
3.3.10 MOB (Man OverBoard) .........................................................................................3-53
3.3.11 Using the DVD Drive and Floppy Disk Drive and DVD .........................................3-55
3.4 Shifting the Chart ...............................................................................................................................................................3-56
3.4.1 Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button ..............................................................3-56
3.4.2 Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor.................................................................3-57
3.4.3 Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor..................................................................3-58
3.4.4 Shifting the Chart with the [Port List].............................................................................3-58
3.4.5 Displaying the Chart by Entering the Position ............................................................3-59
3.5 Zooming In/Out the Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only)................................................................................................3-60
3.5.1 Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band (S-57/C-MAP Only) ...................................3-60
3.5.2 Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only) .......................................................................3-61
3.5.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only) ...............................................................3-62
3.5.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only).................................................................3-63
3.6 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)...........................................................................................3-64
3.7 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode ..................................................................................................................................3-66
3.7.1 Selecting Motion Mode............................................................................................3-69
3.7.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode............................................................................................3-69
3.7.3 Setting Chart Fix Mode............................................................................................3-70
3.8 My Port List..........................................................................................................................................................................3-71
3.8.1 Adding to My Port List .............................................................................................3-71
3.8.2 Deleting My Port List ...............................................................................................3-72
3.9 Selecting a S-57 Chart (S-57 Only)...........................................................................................................................3-73
3.10 ARCS Chart Display Options (ARCS Only)........................................................................................................3-74
3.10.1 Selecting Larger/Smaller Chart (ARCS Only)...........................................................3-74
3.10.2 Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only) .......................................................3-75
3.10.3 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only)...................................................................3-76
3.10.4 Changing Active Panels (ARCS Only) ..................................................................3-77
3.10.5 Loading a Low Resolution Chart (ARCS Only) ......................................................3-78
3.10.6 To Select the High Resolution Chart (ARCS Only)....................................................3-78
3.10.7 Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only) ...........................................................3-79
3.10.8 Displaying Temporary and Preliminary Notice (ARCS Only) .....................................3-80
3.10.9 Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only) ..............................................................................3-81
3.11 Displaying Chart in Various Ways (Multi View/Wide Range View)................................................................3-85
3.11.1 Multi View Screen..................................................................................................3-86
3.11.2 Selecting an Area ..................................................................................................3-87
3.11.3 Wide Range View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only) .....................................................3-88
3.12 Selecting Route and To WPT ......................................................................................................................................3-89
3.12.1 Selecting Route and To WPT Using the Display Panel.........................................3-89
3.12.2 Distance Measurement .........................................................................................3-91
3.12.3 Use XTD Alarm......................................................................................................3-94
3.13 Displaying a User Map ....................................................................................................................................................3-95
3.14 Reading Out Information on the Object ..................................................................................................................3-96
3.15 Displaying the AIO ...........................................................................................................................................................3-99
3.16 Operating EBL/VRM .................................................................................................................................................... 3-101
3.16.1 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Operation Panel ................................................3-101
3.16.2 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Context Menu....................................................3-106
3.16.2.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step Option..................................................................3-106
3.16.2.2 Dropped EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 (EBL2/VRM2) ....................................3-108
3.16.2.3 Dropped EBL/VRM EBL1 (EBL2) ..........................................................3-109
3.16.2.4 Dropped EBL/VRM VRM1 (VRM2) ........................................................3-109
3.16.2.5 Dropped EBL/VRM Move Origin1 (Move Origin2) .................................3-110
3.16.2.6 CCRP EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 (EBL2/VRM2)........................................3-110
3.16.2.7 CCRP EBL/VRM EBL1 (EBL2) .............................................................. 3-111
3.16.2.8 CCRP EBL/VRM VRM1 (VRM2)............................................................ 3-111
3.16.3 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Display panel.....................................................3-112
3.16.3.1 Drawing and deletion EBL by the Display panel .......................................3-113
3.16.3.2 Drawing and deletion VRM by the Display panel......................................3-113
3.16.3.3 Changing the base point of EBL/VRM ......................................................3-114
3.16.4 Marker Setting .....................................................................................................3-115
3.17 Running Fix ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-116
3.18 Monitoring Dragging Anchor...................................................................................................................................... 3-117
3.19 User-Marking/Highlighting ......................................................................................................................................... 3-119
3.19.1 Marking the Event Mark ......................................................................................3-119
3.19.2 Marking the Information Mark .............................................................................3-121
3.19.3 Marking the Tidal Stream Mark ...........................................................................3-122
3.19.4 Highlight ..............................................................................................................3-123
3.20 EBL Maneuver ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-125
3.21 Cross Bearing ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-127
3.22 Inputting Clearing Lines .............................................................................................................................................. 3-129
3.23 LOP(Line Of Position) ................................................................................................................................................. 3-130
3.24 Acquisition Zone ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-138
3.25 Multi Window.................................................................................................................................................................... 3-140
3.25.1 Using the Analog Meter.......................................................................................3-140
3.25.2 Other Multi Window display.................................................................................3-141
3.26 Cursor Auto Mode......................................................................................................................................................... 3-143
3.27 Logbook............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-145
3.27.1 Displaying the Logbook.......................................................................................3-145
3.27.2 Logbook Setting ..................................................................................................3-152
3.28 Own Ships Setting...................................................................................................................................................... 3-154
3.28.1 Own Ship Symbol................................................................................................3-155
3.28.2 Vector Display at POSN1 ....................................................................................3-156
3.28.3 Danger Detection Vector and Sector ...............................................................3-157
3.28.4 Track and Time Label Display .............................................................................3-159
3.28.5 Heading Line and Beam Line..............................................................................3-160
3.29 Chart Setting................................................................................................................................................................... 3-161
3.29.1 Chart Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS .......................................................................3-161
3.29.1.1 Setting the "View Common" tab ................................................................3-162
3.29.1.2 Setting the "View1" tab..............................................................................3-172
3.29.1.3 Setting the "View2" tab..............................................................................3-179
3.29.2 Other Chart Setting .............................................................................................3-180
3.29.3 Save Chart Setting ..............................................................................................3-181
3.29.4 Chart Setting List.................................................................................................3-182
3.30 Chart Abbreviations ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-183
3.31 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart...................................................................................................................... 3-184
3.32 Graphical Index............................................................................................................................................................... 3-186
3.33 Date-dependant View.................................................................................................................................................. 3-188
3.34 Setting Radar Options................................................................................................................................................. 3-189
3.34.1 Setting of RADAR................................................................................................3-189
3.35 AIS/TT Setting............................................................................................................................................................... 3-190
3.35.1 AIS/Target Track Setting......................................................................................3-190
3.35.2 Association Setting ..............................................................................................3-195
3.36 Shifting Own Ship Position ........................................................................................................................................ 3-196
3.36.1 Shifting Using the Cursor ....................................................................................3-198
3.36.2 Shifting by Entering the Position .........................................................................3-199
3.36.3 Shifting by Entering the Offset Value...................................................................3-199
3.36.4 Canceling the Ship Offset....................................................................................3-199
3.37 Printing Display (Only when Connected to a Printer)............................................................................................ 3-200
3.38 Saving the Screen......................................................................................................................................................... 3-201
3.39 Displaying the Startup Menu (Exit the navigation & Planning).................................................................... 3-201
4 Route Planning......................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Route Planning....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1 Setting the Route Options .........................................................................................4-4
4.1.2 Route Planning Using the Table Editor .....................................................................4-8
4.1.2.1 Table Editing Mode..........................................................................................4-8
4.1.2.2 Table Editing Menu and Button Functions (Table Editor) ...............................................4-9
4.1.2.3 Operation Flowchart for Table Editor ............................................................4-14
4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor) .......................................................4-16
4.1.2.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Table Editor) .................................................4-28
4.1.2.6 Importing Route Files....................................................................................4-29
4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files....................................................................................4-30
4.1.3 Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor ...............................................................4-32
4.1.3.1 Graphic Editing Mode ...................................................................................4-32
4.1.3.2 Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic Editor) ..............................................4-33
4.1.3.3 Operation Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing) ...................................................4-37
4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing)..................................................4-39
4.1.3.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor).....................................................4-51
4.1.3.6 Importing Route Files....................................................................................4-52
4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files....................................................................................4-53
4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials...............................................4-54
4.2 Creating an Alternate Route ..........................................................................................................................................4-57
4.2.1 Operation Flowchart ................................................................................................4-57
4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route.........................................................................................4-58
5 Chart Editing .........................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Chart Edit Mode .................................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 Menus and Button Functions........................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1 Chart Editing Menu....................................................................................................5-4
5.2.2 Button Functions .......................................................................................................5-8
5.3 User Map Editor Operation ............................................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.3.1 Flow of User Map Edit ...............................................................................................5-9
5.3.2 Operation when Editing User Map ..........................................................................5-11
5.3.2.1 Creating a New User Map.............................................................................5-11
5.3.2.2 Editing a User Map .......................................................................................5-14
5.3.2.3 Merging User Maps.......................................................................................5-16
5.3.2.4 Importing User Maps.....................................................................................5-17
5.3.2.5 User Map Setting ..........................................................................................5-18
5.4 Manual Update Operation................................................................................................................................................5-19
5.4.1 Flow of Manual Update ...........................................................................................5-19
5.4.2 Operation when Manually Updating Objects...........................................................5-20
5.4.2.1 Manual Update Setting .................................................................................5-23
5.5 Entering Objects .................................................................................................................................................................5-24
5.5.1 Selecting Object Types............................................................................................5-26
5.5.2 Entering Objects......................................................................................................5-27
5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual Update Operation)...................................5-40
6 Automatic Sailing...................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Automatic Sailing System ................................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.1.1 Change of Course (Turning) of Normal Route ..........................................................6-2
6.1.2 Change of Course (Turning) of TCS Route...............................................................6-3
6.1.3 Route Monitoring and System Alarm.........................................................................6-4
6.2 Setting the Automatic Sailing .......................................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3 Automatic Sailing Operation............................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.3.1 Selecting the Route and the WPT.............................................................................6-8
6.3.2 Start Automatic Sailing of Normal Route ...................................................................6-9
6.3.3 Start Automatic Sailing of TCS Route .....................................................................6-10
6.3.4 Terminating the Automatic Sailing ...........................................................................6-11
6.3.5 Disconnect Automatic Sailing..................................................................................6-12
7 Tools and Setting/ Serviceman Menu ...................................................................................................7-1
7.1 File Manager............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.2 System Information.............................................................................................................................................................. 7-5
7.3 Operating Time ...................................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.4 Color Test (ARCS Only) .................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.5 Sensor 7-8
7.5.1 Primary Position and Secondary Position .................................................................7-8
7.5.2 Bearing Setting..........................................................................................................7-9
7.5.3 Speed Setting ..........................................................................................................7-10
7.5.4 Date Data Source Setting........................................................................................7-10
7.5.5 Time Zone Data Source Setting ..............................................................................7-11
7.6 Color and Brilliance Setting............................................................................................................................................7-12
7.7 Setting the User Key.........................................................................................................................................................7-13
7.8 Setting Date/Time .............................................................................................................................................................7-14
7.9 Clear Voyage Distance .....................................................................................................................................................7-15
7.10 Setting the Alarm Options............................................................................................................................................7-16
7.11 Radar Process Setting ...................................................................................................................................................7-18
7.12 Language..............................................................................................................................................................................7-18
7.13 Code Input...........................................................................................................................................................................7-19
7.14 Analog Correct Value .....................................................................................................................................................7-20
7.15 Own ships Parameter Setting ...................................................................................................................................7-21
7.15.1 Ships Parameter...................................................................................................7-21
7.15.2 CCRP Setting ........................................................................................................7-22
7.16 Line Monitor........................................................................................................................................................................7-23
7.17 Adjust Radar Bearing, Range and Antenna Height..............................................................................................7-24
7.18 Installation Information...................................................................................................................................................7-26
7.19 TCS Maintenance.............................................................................................................................................................7-27
7.20 Radar Initial Setup............................................................................................................................................................7-28
7.21 Data Backup/Restore.....................................................................................................................................................7-29
7.21.1 How to backup the data.........................................................................................7-30
7.21.2 How to restore the data .........................................................................................7-31
8 Playback................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 Entering/Exiting the Playback ......................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Playing Back the Logging Data........................................................................................................................................ 8-6
9 Reference..............................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Alarm Function....................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2 Chart-Related Alarm Information................................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart .............................................................................9-7
9.2.2 Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart ...................................................................9-9
9.2.3 Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart .....................................................................9-10
9.3 Abbreviation for Geodetic System...............................................................................................................................9-16
9.4 List of standard terms, units and abbreviations.....................................................................................................9-17
9.5 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS can Import/Export ........................................................................................9-22
9.5.1 File Types ................................................................................................................9-22
9.5.2 File Names ..............................................................................................................9-22
9.5.3 CSV File Data Structure ..........................................................................................9-22
9.5.3.1 Route Files ....................................................................................................9-23
9.5.3.2 User Chart Files ............................................................................................9-28
9.5.3.3 Logbook File..................................................................................................9-39
9.6 Display Symbols ..................................................................................................................................................................9-43
9.7 Set value list when starting ECDIS .............................................................................................................................9-66
10 Maintenance and Inspection .............................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Confirming Alarm ..............................................................................................................................................................10-3
10.2 Daily Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................................10-4
10.2.1 Color Pattern (S-57) ..............................................................................................10-5
10.2.2 Gray Scale.............................................................................................................10-6
10.3 Replacing Consumables .................................................................................................................................................10-6
10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input .....................................................................................................10-7
10.5 User Maintenance Menu................................................................................................................................................10-8
10.5.1 Displaying/Hiding the User Maintenance Menu ....................................................10-8
10.5.2 Disk Information ..................................................................................................10-10
10.5.2.1 Drive Information.......................................................................................10-10
10.5.2.2 File Information .........................................................................................10-11
10.5.3 Setting HDD organization....................................................................................10-12
10.5.4 Hardware Key Information ..................................................................................10-13
10.5.5 CD Cleaner..........................................................................................................10-14
10.6 Recovery by Image File............................................................................................................................................... 10-15
10.6.1 Recovery by Image file in case of old processing unit (NCM-860) .....................10-17
10.6.2 Recovery by Image file in case of new processing unit (NCM-860A).................10-19
10.7 Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................................................................. 10-21
11 Operation of Multi Window ................................................................................................................11-1
11.1 Operation of Multi Window............................................................................................................................................11-2
11.1.1 Selecting Multi Window .........................................................................................11-2
11.2 Configuration for Each Graph......................................................................................................................................11-4
11.2.1 Course BarTab...............................................................................................11-5
11.2.2 ClimateTab.....................................................................................................11-5
11.2.3 Ship (Voyage)Tab ..........................................................................................11-6
11.2.4 Ship(Docking)Tab ..........................................................................................11-6
11.2.5 Current/WindTab............................................................................................11-7
11.2.6 Depth GraphTab ............................................................................................11-7
11.2.7 Engine GraphTab...........................................................................................11-8
11.2.8 Gyro/RudderTab ............................................................................................11-8
11.2.9 DraftTab .........................................................................................................11-9
11.2.10 CurrentTab...................................................................................................11-9
11.2.11 Menu ControlTab .......................................................................................11-10
12 Display and View of Multi Window ....................................................................................................12-1
12.1 Display of Each Information .........................................................................................................................................12-2
12.1.1 Display of Navigation Information .........................................................................12-2
12.1.1.1 Rearranging Blocks.....................................................................................12-3
12.1.1.2 Changing Block Size...................................................................................12-3
12.2 View of Each Information ..............................................................................................................................................12-4
12.2.1 View of Navigation Information .............................................................................12-4
13 After-Sales Service............................................................................................................................13-1
13.1 Maintenance Service.......................................................................................................................................................13-2
13.2 Retention Period of Repair Parts ..............................................................................................................................13-2
13.3 When Asking for Service ...............................................................................................................................................13-2
13.4 Checks and Inspection ...................................................................................................................................................13-2
14 Disposal ............................................................................................................................................14-1
14.1 Disposal of the Product.................................................................................................................................................14-2
14.2 Disposal of Used Batteries...........................................................................................................................................14-2
14.3 Disposal of LCD Module ................................................................................................................................................14-2
15 Specifications ....................................................................................................................................15-1
15.1 Bridge Display Terminal .................................................................................................................................................15-2
Index ...........................................................................................................................................................1
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR JAN-701B/901B SERIES ECDIS SOFTWARE......................4
Repair Request Form..................................................................................................................................7
1
Overview

1-1
1.1 Function
This equipment is navigation system with ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information System)
functions conforming to the ECDIS Performance Standards adopted in IMO Resolution MSC.232(82),
and also meets IMO Resolutions MSC.191(79) and A694(17). Consequently, this equipment can become
the core of an integrated navigation system (INS) or integrated bridge system (IBS) that supports
one-man bridge operation.
Safe sailing
Energy-saved sailing

ECDIS functions:
ECDIS
Compliance with the ECDIS defined by the IHO/IMO
The customers are recommended to monitor information about updated ECDIS software
version visiting to JRC website
(http://www.jrc.co.jp/eng/product/marine/application/ecdis_version.html).
Availability of S-57 (supporting S-63) format, C-MAP Ed.3, and ARCS as chart databases
Own ships track display and planned-route display on the electronic chart
Automatic checking of the safety contours and dangerous areas of the own ship (not available for
ARCS)
TT target display and AIS target display on the electronic chart
Superimpose display of radar echo on the electronic chart (when ECDIS is used with the optional
radar overlay kit)
True/Relative motion display
North-up/Course-up display
Display of route information such as latitude/longitude at destinations, bearings/distances up to
waypoints, and planned arrival time
Availability of two EBLs/VRMs
Writing of memos with alphabetic characters into the electronic chart
Display of information such as the date/time, current position, heading, and ships speed
Display symbols used to present chart information are presented in accordance with S-52 and its
appendices.
Display specifications
Size: 19-inch color LCD (JAN-701B)
23.1-inch color LCD (JAN-901B)
Selection of colors (conforming to the IMO/IHO) suitable for the daytime, nighttime, dawn, and
dusk Display of the symbols and colors recommended by the IHO.

Navigation Planning
Editing of route information
Addition, deletion, and modification of waypoints on the electronic chart
Calculation of the distance between waypoints, bearings, and planned arrival time
Up to 512 waypoints per route
Checking on the crossing of the safety contours and dangerous areas on created routes

Automatic sailing functions


Route tracking
Course change
1 Overview 1-2
Alarm functions
Safety depth crossing alarm
Dangerous areas crossing alarm
Waypoint arrival alarm ECDIS

XTD alarm

Logging functions
Logging of navigation information onto the hard disk
Own ships playback using logged data

1-3 1 Overview
1.2 Features
This ECDIS has the following features:

ECDIS functions:
Displays vector charts such as S-57 and C-MAP, and raster charts such as ARCS
Safe navigation ensured by the crossing alarm function for safety contours and dangerous areas
and the guard ring function (not available for ARCS)
Optimized displays of navigation warnings, weather warnings, and emergency messages from the
connected Navtex receiver
Ease of operation supported by high-speed drawing and high-speed processing
Ease of user chart creation
Multi view function to display two charts at a time (not available for C-MAP Ed.3 and ARCS)
Wide range view in addition to single or multi view
Route planning in two ways, using table editor or graphic editor
Creation of alternative route during voyage
Automatic sailing by connecting with autopilot
Playback function to check the voyage
S-57 update portfolio

1 Overview 1-4
1.3 Components
A list of components and optional accessories is shown below. ECDIS

Components

Name Model Quantity Comment


Display Unit
(JAN-701B) NCD-2095 1 Main Unit
(JAN-901B) NCD-2096
(JAN-701B) NWZ-173-E
Monitor Unit 1 Included in the main unit
(JAN-901B) NWZ-170-E
Operation Unit NCE-5163-E
Processing (JAN-701B) NCD-1444 1 Included in the main unit
Unit (JAN-901B) NCD-1445 1 Included in the main unit
Instruction Manual (Japanese) 7ZPNA4055D 1
Instruction Manual (English) 7ZPNA4056D 1
AOB Additional Kit MPXP34119 1 Option
SRB Additional Kit MPXP34118 1 Option
Radar Overlay Kit MPXP34117 1 Option
Optional Mini Keyboard Kit MPXP33223A 1
Canvas cover (JAN-701B) 1
(JAN-901B) MPOL30345A 1
Lightproof hood Option
(JAN-701B) MPOL30350 1
CD Cleaner 1
Accessory 7ZZNA0426B Packing in 1box
FD Cleaner 1

1-5 1 Overview
1.4 Construction
The outline drawing of the unit is shown below.

Mass: Approx. 125 kg Cable Inlet

Warning label

NCD-2095 Bridge Display Terminal (JAN-701B) (UNIT: mm)

1 Overview 1-6
ECDIS

Mass: Approx. 150kg Cable Inlet

Warning label

NCD-2096 Bridge Display Terminal (JAN-901B) (UNIT: mm)

1-7 1 Overview
1 Overview
1-8
MASS:APPROX. 85kg

Flash-mount type
NCD-1444-T Processing Unit (UNIT: mm)
MASS:APPROX. 13.3kg

1-9
Flash-mount type
NWZ-173-ET 19 LCD Unit (UNIT: mm)

1 Overview
ECDIS
1 Overview
MASS:APPROX. 25kg

1-10
Flash-mount type
NWZ-170-ET 23.1 LCD UNIT (UNIT: mm)
ECDIS

MASS:APPROX. 3.5kg NCE-5163-E Operation Panel

1-11 1 Overview
1.5 System Configuration
The following diagram shows an example system configuration connected with this equipment.
When ECDIS mode is used, it displays navigation data received from the sensor.

/ CONNING

1 Overview 1-12
2
Names
and
Functions

2-1
This equipment can be operated both from the Operation panel and the display.

2.1 Function of Operation Panel


and LCD brilliance control
(1) Function of operation panel
Fig. 2.1 and Fig. 2.2 show the operation panel. Table 2.1 describes the name and function of each
part on the operation panel.


1

3


4
5
6
7
8
25

9
10


23
24
26
27

11
14
15
16


17
18
19

12


13
20
21
22

Fig. 2.1 Operation Panel

2 Names and Functions 2-2


Table 2.1 Names and Functions
No. Name Function
1 POWER Turns the power on.
2 PWR FAIL Indicates the AC power supply error.
(See 10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input.)
3 PWR ACK Stops the alarm at occurrence of PWR FAIL.
ECDIS
(See 10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input.)
4 VIDEO*1 Adjusts the brightness of radar echoes.
*1
5 RAIN Suppresses rain/snow clutter.
*1
6 SEA Suppresses sea clutter.
*1
7 GAIN Adjusts receiver gain.
8 RANGE Range up.
Range down.
*2
9 TURN Starts turning.
10 ALARM ACK Press to acknowledge an alarm.
11 ROUTE PLAN Starts/ends route the route planning function (table editor).
12 DAY/NIGHT Changes the display color of the screen to suit the lighting conditions of the bridge.
13 PANEL Dims the operation panel in five steps.
*1
14 RADAR Turns ON/OFF the radar echo display on the chart.
15 AUTO SAIL*2 Starts/Stops auto sail.
16 MENU Display Menu title bar.
17 AIS/TT Selects AIS/TT display.
18 HOME Returns the own ships position into the display.
19 MOB MOB (Man-Over-Board) panel opens.
When hold down for more than three seconds, MOB panel is closed.
20 USER One of the following user-registered functions is executed:
21 OPTION 1 (See 7.7 Setting the User Key.)
22 OPTION 2 - Starting the route graphic editor
- Starting the chart editor
- Displaying the chart option setting screen
- Displaying the own ships option setting screen
- Adding to the port name list
- Displaying the port name list
- Changing the ARCSs active panel
- Loading ARCSs low resolution
- Displaying the logbook
- Printing the screen contents
- Saving Screen
- Saving chart option setting
- Displaying chart option setting list
- Changing S-57/C-MAP chart display BASE temporarily
- PreSet Multi Window
23 EBL1/EBL2 Turns the EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) ON/OFF, and operates the
EBL.
24 VRM1/VRM2 Turns the VRM (Variable Range Marker) ON/OFF, and operates the
VRM.

2-3 2 Names and Functions


Table 2.1 Names and FunctionsContinued
No. Name Function
25 TRACK BALL The trackball is used to move the cursor on the screen for position
designation, selection of buttons on the display panel, menu
designation, etc.
26 LEFT BUTTON Used for selecting a button, menus and options on the screen.
Pressing the left button is written as left-click in this book.
27 RIGHT BUTTON Used for confirming alarms.
Pressing the right button is written as right-click in this book.
*1: Effective only when optional radar overlay kit is installed.
*2: Effective only when the equipment is linked to auto pilot.

(2) LCD brilliance control


The screens brightness can be adjusted by using the brilliance control on the display panel.
By keeping the brilliance control pressed, the screens brightness will be adjusted to an optimal
condition automatically.

JAN-701B

Brilliance control

JAN-901B

Brilliance control

Note:
For JAN-901B, pressing the brilliance control will automatically adjust the screens brightness to an
optimal condition.
When the adjustment is completed, AUTO ADJUSTMENT COMPLETE will appear on the display.
Press the brilliance control again to erase the indication.

This equipment can be operated both from the Operation panel and the display.

2 Names and Functions 2-4


2.2 Function of the Screen (ECDIS)
The functions of the display of the ECDIS unit are described here.

The screen consists of three areas, the chart display area, TCS bar and display panel (information
display area). The menu title bar appears when this equipment enters the menu mode. ECDIS

Menu title bar

North arrow mark


Chart Display area

TCS bar Display panel

Chart Display Area:


The chart display area displays the electronic chart stored on hard disk. (S-57, C-MAP and/or ARCS
charts)
On the chart, the following will be displayed according to your settings:
Your ships symbol and vector at the primary position
Your ships symbol and vector at the secondary position
Head line
Primary position track and time label
Secondary position track
EBL/VRM markers
RADAR echo
Other ship symbols, vectors and ships track (when AIS/TT is installed)
Etc.
Also, various screen panels will be displayed on electronic charts according to the function in use.

Display Panel:
The display panel displays various navigation information for sailing including alarms. Also, buttons that
will be frequently used for navigation operation are arranged in this panel.

Menu Title Bar:


When you move the cursor top of screen, the menu title bar opens to allow menu operation.
Left-clicking the chart display area will close the menu title bar.

2-5 2 Names and Functions


TCS Bar:
Information bar for Auto Sail. Most of the items in the TCS bar display a value by choosing route on the
Display Panel.

To WPT: Number of To WPT


Next WPT: Next number of To WPT
TTG: Estimated Time of Arrival at the To WPT
ETA: Speed to arrive at the to WPT by the planned time
XTD: XTD (Cross Track Distance)
XTL: XTL (Cross Track Limit)
In XTD and XTL, displayed side of P (Port side) and S (Starboard side).
NM/m: Selecting units of distance. This setting is applied to XTD and XTL.
CRS: Bearing from To WPT to Next WPT
Alarms: The number of alarm occurring now
Warnings: The number of warning occurring now

2 Names and Functions 2-6


2.2.1 Display Panel
The contents of display panel will change according to the chart being selected, either S-57/C-MAP or
ARCS. The following shows the typical displays common to S-57/C-MAP and ARCS

ECDIS

Own Ship Information; See 2.2.1.1.

The other ship displaying status; See 2.2.1.2.

Auto sailing status. See 2.2.1.3.

The setting of a route and the display of the WPT


information; See 2.2.1.4

The other information on the own ship; See 2.2.1.5

Chart information: The item depends on ARCS


chart and other chart.
ARCS Chart: See 2.2.1.7
S-57/C-MAP: See 2.2.1.6

Tools and Brilliance Setting; It changes a display at


the arrow button.
Tools: See 2.2.1.8
Brilliance: See 2.2.1.9

The alarm which occurs at present can be


confirmed.
Besides, you can do acknowledge of the alarm and
display of the alarm list. See 3.3.7

Bearing and distance from cursor The position of cursor.


to own ship. Latitude / Longitude

2-7 2 Names and Functions


2.2.1.1 Own Ship Information
1) The Basic Information
Chosen CCRP (Consistent Common Reference Point): The picture freeze indicator:
CCRP can be set from four (CCRP1-CCRP4). The This indicator is animating while the
CCRP setting can be changed in menu [Serviceman] - screen-display is working normally.
[Installation] - [CCRP Setting].
Heading by HDG Sensor:
The name of the sensor and the present value
are displayed.

Speed Through the Water by STW sensor:


The name of the sensor and the present value
are displayed.

Course Over the Ground and Speed Over the


Ground by primary sensor:
The name of the sensor and the present value
are displayed.

CCRP position by primary position sensor:

When the offset values are entered, the


background color is colored in sky blue.

Primary sensor information: It is fixing on "POSN1".

The name of the primary sensor is displayed.

Geodetic system name: It is fixing on "WGS-84".


If the geodetic system displays a chart except "WGS-84" at the
ARCS chart, the background changes to the sky blue.

It displays a current time.


By pushing the UTC/LMT button, the interval of UTC-LMT can be changed.
In case of UTC display, a time zone is displayed as + 00:00.
In case of LMT, a set value is displayed in the time zone.
The following item can be changed setting in menu [(7)Main] - [(0)Setting] [(3)Date/Time
Setting]
Date / Time / Time Zone (if manual setting)

2 Names and Functions 2-8


Note:
The following item can change setting in menu [Main]-[Sensor].
Heading Sensor: It chooses from the connected equipment or manual setting.
STW Sensor: It chooses from the connected equipment or manual setting.
POSN1 (Primary sensor): It chooses from the connected equipment or Dead Reckoning.
POSN2: It isn't reflected in the display panel. POSN2 can set like POSN1, or unused.
ECDIS
Date and Time Sensor: It chooses from the connected equipment or manual setting.
Time Zone Sensor: It chooses from the connected equipment or manual setting.

The following table shows the relation of the sensor name of the display panel to the sensor setting
by POSN1.
POSN1 Sensor Input data Display name on Display name on
Setting COG and SOG position
DGPS1 GPS (GPS) GPS1
DGPS1 Differential GPS (GPS) DGPS1
DGPS2 GPS (GPS) GPS2
DGPS2 Differential GPS (GPS) DGPS2
GPS-Compass GPS-Compass (GPS) GPS-C
Loran-C Loran-C (Loran) LORAN-C
DR (Dead Reckoning) (DR) DR

2) CTS / Vector Time / Water Depth

CTS (Course to Steer):


It is displayed direction azimuth to be sending to Auto Sailing system.
It is displayed during Automatic Sailing.

Vector time:
It is displaying time for vector length; Ground-referenced
velocity and Water-referenced velocity.
Vector time can be set on menu [(4)Own Ship/Track] -
[(0)Setting].

Depth:
It displays water depth and the standard position from the Depth sensor.
The kind of the standard position: Transducer, Surface, Keel.

2-9 2 Names and Functions


2.2.1.2 The Other Ship Displaying Status
In case of setting to display on the chart about the other ship information, an information name is displayed
in this column.
RADAR 1 or RADAR 2 : [MENU]-[(7)Main] [(9)Radar Overlay]- [(1)Radar 1] or[(2)Radar 2]
TT1 (Target Track 1) : [MENU][(1)AIS/TT][(1)TT1] or [(4)All]
TT2 (Target Track 2) : [MENU][(1)AIS/TT][(2)TT2] or [(4)All]
AIS (Automatic Identification System) : [MENU][(1)AIS/TT][(3)AIS] or [(4)All]

Association Setting:
When Association Setting is valid, AIS and TT targets

which are in same position are integrated..

Association Setting can change validity by clicking this
item. While Association Setting is valid, the background
color of this item changes.

It does the detailed setting of Association Setting with


menu [MENU][(1)AIS/TT][(0)Association Setting]..
If AIS is not use, Association Setting is disappeared.

Filter Setting:
It changes filter setting by AIS.

The shape of the filter has two kinds of "Ring" and "Sector". While Filter Setting is valid, the background
color of this item changes.. The setting can be changed to each shape. When both filters are invalid,
AIS filter is not function.

The feature of the filter includes two kinds of [Priority]displaying only within the limits) ,[Display](having
priority of display within the limits). It does the change of this setting and the other detailed setting with
menu [MENU][(1)AIS/TT][(0)AIS/TT Setting].

2 Names and Functions 2-10


Other Ship Information displaying procedure:

RADAR1 or RADAR2
When selecting [MENU][(7) Main][(9) Radar Overlay][(1)Radar 1], it is displayed with [RADAR1].
When selecting [MENU][(7) Main][(9) Radar Overlay][(2)Radar 2], it is displayed with [RADAR2]..
It becomes blank when making the check of [Radar Overlay] invalid.
ECDIS
[RADAR1] or [RADAR2] is as displayed even if it does an off center in the radar overlay and it makes
Radar Overlay off.

TT1 (Target Track 1)


Following is displayed by "TT1" input data when selecting [MENU][(1)AIS/TT]-[(1) TT1].
TT1(REL)
TT1(GND)
TT1(SEA)
Blank is displayed when not selecting [MENU][(1)AIS/TT]-[(1) TT1].

When using ground-speed stability of Internal TT.


[TT1-INT(GND) ]is displayed in box, and box is blank displayed.
When using through-the-water-speed of Internal TT.
[TT1-INT(SEA) is displayed in box, and box is blank displayed.

TT2 (Target Track 2)


Following is displayed by "TT2" input data when selecting [MENU][(1)AIS/TT]-[(2) TT2].
TT2(REL)
TT2(GND)
TT2(SEA)
Blank is displayed when not selecting [MENU][(1)AIS/TT]-[(2) TT2].

AIS
"AIS" is displayed when selecting [MENU][(1) AIS/TT]-[(3) AIS].
Blank is displayed when not selecting [MENU][(1) AIS/TT]-[(3) AIS].

2-11 2 Names and Functions


2.2.1.3 Auto Sailing Status
The auto sailing status panel will be displayed as follows:

Displays the autopilot steering mode.


See the autopilot instruction manual for descriptions of the various steering modes.

BLANK: Not Auto Sailing


MAN: Manual turning mode
BLANK: Not Auto Sailing
AUTO: Auto turning mode
KEEP: Keep tracking the current leg
DIRECT: Direct route to Waypoint
TURN: Changing the steering
AVOID: Under ship-avoiding operation

NotRDY: Not ready to Auto Sailing


(The route has not been loaded, or a POS1, Gyro, Log, or A/P alarm has occurred.)
READY: Ready to Auto Sailing
CONV: Conventional (Normal) type Auto Sailing
TCS: TCS type Auto Sailing

Note:
To use auto sailing feature, the Auto Pilot equipment must be connected.

2.2.1.4 The setting of the route


The setting of a route and the display of the WPT information

Route name being selected (UNLOAD appears if nothing is selected.


Drop-down list shows all route names.)
When clicking Route combo box, a drop down list of route files is displayed.
First line: File name
Second line: Comment of route file

Next waypoint being selected


(Drop-down list shows the selectable waypoints manually.)
When starting Auto Sail, the combo box can not be selected
from except WPT which is heading at current.

Bearing and Distance from the ship to the To WPT

2 Names and Functions 2-12


2.2.1.5 The other information on the own ship
CALC: (Actual Speed)
Destined waypoint (selectable from the drop-down list)

Distance from the ship to the to destined waypoint


ECDIS

Actual Speed

Estimated Time of Arrival at the to destined waypoint

Speed to arrive at the to destined waypoint by the planned time

Actual Speed mode: The mode switches over by clicking this button.

CALC: (Input ETA to calculation Average Speed)

Displays speed to arrive at the destined waypoint by the estimated


time of arrival

Setting of estimated time of arrival

Actual Speed mode: The mode switches over by clicking this button.

CALC: (Input Average Speed to calculation ETA)

Setting of speed

Displays time to go and estimated time of arrival to the destination No.

Actual Speed mode: The mode switches over by clicking this button.

Drift:

Current direction calculated by the difference between the COG


and HDG vectors

Current speed calculated by the difference between the COG


and HDG vectors.

Route:

Estimated Time of Arrival at the final waypoint

Total sum of distance between the own ship and the starting WPT000.

2-13 2 Names and Functions


WPT: Name of displayed WPT

Latitude of displayed WPT

Longitude of displayed WPT

Select from To / Next


To: Displays To WPT
Next: Displays Next to To WPT

Pair:
[Pair] tab isn't displayed when not using TCS type Auto Pilot.
Plan course, actual heading azimuth of own ship
are displayed.

Plan vessel speed, actual through the


water speed of own ship are displayed.

Plan turn course radius, order turn course


radius is displayed.

2 Names and Functions 2-14


2.2.1.6 CHART Information for S-57/C-MAP

When left-clicked, EVENT mark is put at the own ship position.

When left-clicked, MOB (Man-Over-Board) panel opens.

When left-clicked, shows the registered port name list. ECDIS

Selected port name position will be displayed on the chart.

The selecting Drop-down list is lit in green.

SENC (System Electronic Navigation Chart) information level


selectable with the drop down list button.
Base: Shows basic information such as geographic area.
(This is not intended to be sufficient for safe navigation.)
Standard: Shows standard information (First selection at power ON).
Other: Shows all information.
!: Shows all objects that belong to standard information.

Scale of the chart being displayed


(Drop-down list shows all available scales.)

Range of the chart being displayed


(Drop-down list shows all available ranges).

Motion (selectable with the drop-down list button)


True: Your ship moves on the chart. When the ship reaches the
predetermined limit on the screen, the chart is automatically
shifted to keep display the ship.
Relative: Your ship stays on the screen and the geographic objects
move instead.
Free: Chart is displayed regardless of the ships movement.

Azmuth (selectable with the drop-down list button)


North Up: The chart always orients north.

Course Up: Your ships heading faces up on the screen.


(The chart rotates. After, the screen keeps the set direction.)

Rotation: You can rotate the chart by the specified amount using the degree
specifying box on this panel.

WPT Up: The direction from ship to To WPT always faces up on the screen.
(The chart rotates. This is effective in the relative mode.)

Rotational degree entry box for Azimuth Rotation.

Home: Displays your ship on the screen.

Zoom In: You can magnify the range.


Zoom Out: You can reduce the range.

Zoom Area: You can magnify the specified area using a rubber band.

2-15 2 Names and Functions


2.2.1.7 CHART Information for ARCS

Note:
Function of the [EVENT], [PORT LIST] and [HOME] buttons
is the same as for S-57/C-MAP.

Displays the geodetic system of the chart.

Displays the original scale of the chart.

Scale Of the chart being displayed

Range of the chart being displayed

Motion (selectable with the drop-down list button)


True: Your ship moves on the chart. When the ship reaches
the predetermined limit on the screen, the chart is automatically
shifted to keep display the ship.
Relative: Your ship stays at the center of the chart and the geographic
objects move instead.
Free: Chart is displayed regardless of the ships movement.

Chart offset values

Opens the Select Chart panel. You can select the ARCS chart
you want.

2 Names and Functions 2-16


2.2.1.8 Tools Panel
Refer to 3.15.3
Units of distance switch button
Azimuth of EBL switch button
When left-click, units of VRM distance is changed.
T: True North mode
[NM] -> [km] -> [sm] -> [NM] -> ECDIS
R: Bearing Reference mode

Tool area switch button

Displaying position of cross point


on EBL1 and VRM1

Displaying position of cross point


on EBL2 and VRM2

Base point mode switch button


[Blank]: CCRP mode
D: Dropped point mode

Active/Inactive of EBL1/EBL2 switch button


Active: Displaying EBL line on chart display area
and displaying EBL azimuth
Inactive: Displaying OFF

Active/Inactive of VRM1/VRM2 switch button


Active: Displaying VRM line on chart display area
and displaying VRM distance
Inactive: Displaying OFF

EBL1/EBL2 edit mode switch button


Active: Displaying EBL line and having the right to operate by EBL dial.

VRM1/VRM2 edit mode switch button


Active: Displaying VRM line and having the right to operate by VRM dial.

2-17 2 Names and Functions


2.2.1.9 Brilliance Setting Panel
Refer to 3.3.5.
Tool area switch button

Day-Night level switch button


When left-click, display level is changed.
[DAY1]-> [DAY2]-> [DAY3]-> [DUSK]->
[NIGHT]-> [DUSK]-> [DAY3]

AIS/Tracked Target brightness switch button


Changing 0 to 4 level every Day-Night level.

Video brightness switch button (In using radar)


Changing 1 to 4 levels every Day-Night level.

Operation panel light brightness switch button


Changing 0 to 4 level every Day-Night level.

2 Names and Functions 2-18


2.2.2 Menu Title Bar
When you move the cursor top of screen, the menu title bar opens and you can access to various
menus.

ECDIS

The following shows the menu trees:

Table 2.2 Menu Tree


Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Reference
(1) AIS/TT (1) TT1 3.3.9.1
(2) TT2 3.3.9.1
(3) AIS 3.3.9.1
(4) All 3.3.9.1
(5) Deactivate All AIS 3.3.9.7
(6) All List 3.3.9.2
(7) Select List 3.3.9.8
(8) Target Track (1) Target Track Setting 3.3.9.3
(2) File Operation 3.3.9.4
(9) Own Ships AIS Data 3.3.9.2
(1) Message (1)Addressed Message 3.3.9.5
(2)Broadcast Message 3.3.9.5
(0) AIS Sentence (1) VDM 3.3.9.6
(2) TTD1 3.3.9.6
(3) TTD2 3.3.9.6
(0) AIS/TT Setting 3.35.1
(0) Association Setting 3.35.2
(2) Route (1) Route Planning (1) Table Editor 4.1.2
(2) Graphic Editor 4.1.3
(2) Create Alternate Route 4.2
(3) Distance Measurement 3.12.2
(4) Use XTD Alarm 3.12.3
(0) Setting 6.3.2 / 6.3.3
(3) Auto Sail (1) Start 6.3.4
(2) Stop 6.2
(0) Setting 3.36.1
(4) Ownship/Track (1) Adjust (1) Cursor 3.36.2
(2) Enter Position 3.36.3
(3) Enter Offset 3.36.4
(4) Clear Offset 3.3.9.1

2-19 2 Names and Functions


Table 2.2 Menu Tree -- Continued
Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Reference
(4) Ownship/Track (2) Anchor Watch (1) Create Monitoring Circle 3.18
(2) Clear Monitoring Circle 3.18
(0) Setting 3.28
(5) User Map (1) Select User Map 3.13
(2) Unselect User Map 3.13
(3) User Map Editor 5.3
(6) Chart (1) Marking/Highlighting (1) Event Mark 3.19.1
(2) Information Mark 3.19.2
(3) Tidal Stream Mark 3.19.3
(4) Highlight 3.19.4
(5) Delete Event Mark 3.19.1
(2) Off Center (1) Enter Position 3.4.5
(2) Home 3.4.1
(3) User Setting (1) Save My Port List 3.8.1
(2) My Port List 3.8.2
(3) Save Chart Setting 3.29.3
(4) Chart Setting List 3.29.4
(4) Select S-57 Chart 3.9
(5) Fix View 3.7.3
(6) Accept S-57 Updates 3.31
(7) Graphical Index 3.32
(8) Manual Update 5.4
(1) Multi View (1) Single View 3.11.1
(2) Top Bottom 3.11.1
(3) Right Left 3.11.1
(4) Right Top View 3.11.1
(5) Left Top View 3.11.1
(6) Right Bottom View 3.11.1
(7) Left Bottom View 3.11.1
(8) Select Area 3.11.2
(9) Wide Range View 3.11.3
(2) Chart Portfolio (1) Create
(2) Top Window
(3) Chart Abbreviation 30
(4) ARCS (1) Temporary and Preliminary 3.10.8
(2) Adjust Datum Offset 3.10.9
(3) Datum Transformation 3.10.9
(5) Setting (1) S-57/ C-MAP/ARCS 3.29.1
(2) Other Chart 3.29.2
(7) Main (1) EBL Maneuver
3.20
/Remove EBL Maneuver
(2) Cross Bearing 3.21
(3) Create Clearing Line (1) Not Less Than 3.22
(2) Not More Than 3.22

2 Names and Functions 2-20


Table 2.2 Menu Tree -- Continued
Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Reference
(7) Main (4) LOP (1)Create Lop 3.23
(2)Delete All LOP 3.23
(5) Print 3.37
(6) Save Screen 3.38 ECDIS
(7) Logbook 3.27.1
(8) Multi Window (1) PreSet 3.25.2
(2) Analog Meter 3.25.1
(3) Climate 3.25.2
(4) Draft 3.25.2
(5) Current Wind 3.25.2
(6) Course Rudder Graph 3.25.2
(7) Course Bar 3.25.2
(8) Ship 3.25.2
(9) Engine Graph 3.25.2
(5) Wind Graph 3.25.2
(6) TEMP Graph Setting 3.25.2
(7) PreSet Save 3.25.2
(0) Option 3.25.2
(9) Radar Overlay (1) Radar1 3.3.8
(2) Radar2 3.3.8
(3) Range Ring 3.3.8
(4) Bearing Scale 3.3.8
(0) Setting 7.11
(1) Make AZ 3.24
(2) File Manager 7.1
(3) Test (1) Alarm Log 3.3.7
(2) System Information 7.2
(3) Operating Time 7.3
(4) ARCS Color Test 7.4
(4) Sensor 7.5
(5) Code Input 7.13
(0) Setting (1) Color and Brilliance Setting 7.6
(2) Option Key Setting 7.7
(3) Date/Time Setting 7.8
(4) Marker Setting 3.16.2.1
(5) Logbook Setting 3.27.2
(6) Voyage Distance Clear 7.9
(7) Display Panel Setting 3.25.1
(8) Alarm Setting 7.10
(9) Radar Process Setting 7.11
(1) Language 7.12
(0) Buzzer Volume 3.3.5
(0) INS Setting
(0) Exit 3.39

2-21 2 Names and Functions


Table 2.2 Menu Tree -- Continued
Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Reference
(1) Serviceman (1) Line Monitor 7.16
(2) Adjust 7.17
(3) Installation (1) Installation Information 7.18
(2) CCRP Setting 7.15.2
(4) Ship's Parameter 7.15.1
(5) TCS Maintenance 7.19
(6) Radar Initial Setup 7.20
(7) Data Backup/Restore (1) Backup 7.21.1
(2) Restore 7.21.2
(0) Exit Serviceman Menu

Context Menu
Main Menu Submenu Reference
Abort 3.1.1.3
Activate AIS 3.3.9.7
Deactivate AIS 3.3.9.7
TGT Data 3.3.9.7
Cancel TGT Data 3.3.9
TGT Property 3.3.9
S-57/C-MAP /ARCS Information 3.14
Other Information 3.14
Auto mode 3.26
Zoom Area 3.5.1
Dropped EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 3.16.2.2
EBL2/VRM2 3.16.2.2
EBL1 3.16.2.3
EBL2 3.16.2.3
VRM1 3.16.2.4
VRM2 3.16.2.4
Move Origin1 3.16.2.5
Move Origin2 3.16.2.5
CCRP EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 3.16.2.6
EBL2/VRM2 3.16.2.6
EBL1 3.16.2.7
EBL2 3.16.2.7
VRM1 3.16.2.8
VRM2 3.16.2.8
Running Fix / Remove Running Fix 3.17
High Resolution Area 3.10.6
Load Low Resolution 3.10.5
Select Chart Under Cursor 3.10.2
Change Active Panel 3.10.4
Note and Diagram 3.10.7

2 Names and Functions 2-22


3
Basic
Operation
of ECDIS

3-1
Do not place any object on the operation panel.
Avoid placing anything extremely hot, in particular, as this may deform the
panel.
Do not apply any undue shock on the operation panel, trackball and dials.
Otherwise, a malfunction may result.

Notes on Description:
(1) Keys/Buttons/dials/menu names:
The keys on the operation panel, buttons on the display panel and the menu names are written as
[xxxx] in this book.
Example:
[RADAR] key (on the operation panel)
[MENU] button (on the display panel)
[(1) Cursor] (menu name)

(2) Menu operation description:


The sequential operation to access to a menu is written as follows:

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark] in that order.

You will learn how to access to a menu later.

Before starting operation, please understand how to operate the menu referring to 3.1 Menu
Operation.
The flowchart described in 3.2 General Flowchart will give you general procedure for this
equipment.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-2


3.1 Menu Operation
To operate this equipment, it is necessary to know how to select menus and set options in the menus.
Basic procedure to access to a menu and set options using the trackball section are described here. Also,
major panel (dialog box, etc.) types that will appear during operation, and how to enter numbers and letters
are described.

3.1.1 How to Select the Menu ECDIS

3.1.1.1 How to Use the Trackball


Trackball section on the operation panel
Trackball:
The trackball is used to move the cursor on the
Trackball
screen for position designation, selection of buttons
(Moves the cursor.)
on the display panel, menu designation, etc.

Left button:
Left button Right button Used for fixing and selecting a position on the chart,
(Left-click) (Right-click) or selecting a button, menus and options on the
screen. Pressing the left button is written as
left-click in this book.

Right button (context menu selection button):


Used for displaying a context menu on the screen.
Pressing the right button is written as right-click in
this book.

3-3 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


Major cursors
Cross Cursor Lens Cursor
Indicates the position on the chart. Appears when area zoom function is
Marking Cursor selected. The rubber band can be
drawn to magnify an area.

Appears while operation in following Hand Cursor


modes. Appears when the cursor is moved
Information Mark while pressing and holding down the
left button in the chart area. You can
Tidal Stream Mark
grip and move the chart freely.
Highlight
LOP Box Cursor
Indicates the position on the chart
while in User Chart Edit/Manual
Edit Cursor
Update mode and Route Graphic
Appears while moving object in User mode.
Map Editor/ Manual Update and
Route Graphic mode. Used to change
objects and WPTs.

Arrow Cursor (Pointer) OffSt Offset Cursor


Indicates the position on the display Appears while setting offset in Adjust
panel, menu title bar and panel Cursor mode.
(dialogue box, etc.)

Select Chart Under Cursor (ARCS) Auto Mode Cursor

? Appears while select chart in following


mode.
In each of the following modes, it
changes to the cursor with the angle.
Click EBL/VRM line and operating
Select Chart Under Cursor
Click AIS Filter line and operating
(ARCS Only)
Click AZ Function line and operating

EBL/VRM Setting Cursor


Appears while setting EBL/VRM in
context menu.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-4


3.1.1.2 How to Select the Menu
As for example, the following menu operation is described here.

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark] in that order.

The general menu selection procedure is as follows:


(1) Opening the menu (entering Menu mode)
(2) Selecting the menu
ECDIS
(3) Selecting the submenu/options

(1) Opening the menu


For opening the menu, move the cursor top of screen, the menu title bar opens to allow menu operation.
[Menu Title Bar]

How to close the menu:


Left-clicking the chart display area will close the menu title bar.

3-5 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


(2) Selecting [(6) Chart] ([MENU] - [(6) Chart])
Select the [(6) Chart] on the menu title bar.
The Chart menu will open.

Step-by-step operation to select [(6) Chart] menu:


1) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to [(6) Chart] on the menu title bar.
2) Left-click the left button on the trackball section to select the [(6) Chart] menu.
Then, the [(6) Chart] menu will open.

Explained as Left-click [(6) Chart].

The [(6) Chart] menu opens.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-6


(3) Selecting [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark]
1) Left-click [(1) Marking/Highlighting] on the Chart menu.
Then, the Marking/Highlighting submenu will open.
2) Left-click [(2) Information Mark].
Then, the Location/Attribute panel will open.

Shifting the cursor


will also open the
submenu. ECDIS

How to Close the Panel:


Left-click the [OK] or [Cancel].
[OK]: Enables settings in the panel and close the panel.
[Cancel]: Close the panel without changing the contents of the panel.

3-7 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.1.1.3 How to Use the context Menu
You may use the context menu by pressing the right button (by right-clicking).

Example: By right-clicking on the chart display

Right-clicking the chart may


open a context menu.
Left-click a menu item you want.
e.g. Zoom Area.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-8


Note:
In case of various operations which used the cursor, the operation can be aborted by choosing
"Abort" of the context menu.

Right-clicking on the chart may open a shortcut menu.

ECDIS

Left-click Abort to abort the current COG:

3-9 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.1.2 Various Panels
The major panel types that will appear on the screen and how to operate them are described here.

Value entry box


You can enter numbers.
1) First, left-click the entry box.
2) Next, enter the value.
3) To fix the entry, select other value entry
box, if any, or the [ENT] key.

Drop-down list
1) Left-click the button to open the
dropdown list.
2) Left-click an item you want from the
list.

Text box
You can enter numbers and letters.
How to enter, see 3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-10


Tabs
You can display one of panels by selecting a tab.
1) Left-click one of tabs to display a panel.

Check box
Left-click the item to turn it ON or OFF.
ECDIS
The check mark () shows that the
selected item is set to ON.

Option button (Radio button)


You can select one of items you want.
Left-click one of items to turn it ON.
(Other items are automatically tuned
OFF.) The check mark shows the
selected item.

List box
You can select any item in the list.
Left-click the item to turn it ON or OFF.
The check mark ( ) shows that the
selected item is set to ON.

To scroll up/down the list:


Left-click the [UP]/[DOWN] button.
While left-clicking the scroll bar, move
the trackball so that it moves upward or
downward.

The scroll bar will be located on the right


side or at the bottom of the panel.
Command buttons
Left-click the button to perform the button function.

3-11 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters
You can enter numbers and letters into the value entry box or text box using the alphanumeric graphic
buttons on the display or optional full key board.

3.1.3.1 Use of the PS/2 Keyboard


Note:
You cannot enter letters using the PS/2 keyboard in case an optional PS/2 keyboard is not
installed.

1) Loosen the 2 screws in front of the equipment that fasten the PS/2 keyboard.

Screws (2 places)

2) Pull out the PS/2 keyboard.

Put in the PS/2 keyboard in the reverse order and fix it firmly when you place it.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-12


3.1.3.2 Use of the Software Keyboard
To input data, you can use numerical keyboard or Like the PS/2 keyboard.
By the column, the kind of the keyboard is changes.

Numerical keyboard:
Left-click to value entry box, numerical keyboard is displayed.
(See 3.1.3.3 Numerical Input)

ECDIS

(Input a number) (Input latitude) (Input the time)

Like the PS/2 keyboard:


Left-click to text box, Like the PS/2 keyboard is displayed.
(See 3.1.3.4 Character Input)

(Input comments)

3-13 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.1.3.3 Numerical Input
This section explains the numerical input rules.

Inputting number is displayed value entry box.


The function of each button is as follows.
[1] ~ [9], [0]: Input number is displayed right side that likes an electronic calculator.
[+]/[-], [N]/[S], [E]/[W]: Change contents except a number.
Plus / Minus, North / South, East / West
[CLR]: Clear the inputted value, and display default value.
[ENT]: FIX the inputting data, and close the software keyboard.
[Close]: Clear the inputted value and returns to default value, and close the software keyboard.

Example of inputting the numeric 4334.187S on LAT:


1) Left-Click on the LAT column. The software keyboard is displayed.
LAT column is displayed default value.

2) Input [4] on software keyboard. Inputting value is displayed LAT.

[4]
3) Similarly, input on software keyboard as follows.

[3]

[3]

[4]

[1]

[8]

[7]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-14


4) After inputting [LAT], left click the [S] bottom.

ECDIS

5) Input [ENT] on software keyboard, the software keyboard is closed and the input data is fixed.

3-15 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.1.3.4 Character Input
This section explains the character input rules.

Inputting character is displayed on software keyboard. When fix data, the text area is entered the data.
The input character is displayed behind a character cursor. The character cursor is moved by <-, -> key
or left-clicking on input area.
The function of each button is as follows.
Alphanumeric key, Symbol key: Input character behind a character cursor on input area.
[Space]: Input space behind a character cursor on input area.
[BS]: Delete character before a character cursor.
[<-]: Move character cursor to the left.
[->]: Move character cursor to the right.
[ENT]: FIX the inputting data. Then the software keyboard is closed and the text area is entered the
data.
[Close]: Clear the inputted text, and close the software keyboard. The text area is displayed default
data.
The following button is changed to arrangement of software keyboard.
[abc]: Input the lowercase characters.
[ABC]: Input the uppercase characters.
[!#]: Input the symbol characters.
[Align]: In the setting [abc] or [ABC], change to arrange the software keyboard.
QWERTY or alphabetization

Example of inputting the characters Note 1:


Text box

1) Left-click on the arrow mark or in the text box. The cursor will appear in the text box.
2) With the software keyboard, press the [ABC] button. Then arrangement of keyboard is uppercase
characters.
3) Press the [N] key to input [N].
Character cursor
4) Press the [abc] button. Then arrangement of keyboard is lowercase characters.
5) Press the [o] button to input o.

6) Press the [t] button to input t.

7) Press the [e] button to input e.

8) Press the [1] button, and press the [ENT] key to fix the entry.
1

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-16


3.2 General Flowchart
The following shows a general flowchart to use JAN-701B/901B and the flowchart for sailing.

3.2.1 General Flowchart


[Startup Menu] [Startup Screen]
Power switch ON
ECDIS

Select [Navigation &


Planning] in Startup Menu

Startup Screen

Input ARCS PIN


(ARCS only)

Navigation & Planning [Navigation & Planning Screen]


Screen

Adjustments
[Navigation & Planning] will be Display panel
Screen brightness
automatically displayed if [ ] is (Information
Operation panel brightness
left- clicked or no operation is display area)
Sound volume
conducted for 10 seconds.
Radar overlay, etc.

(For detailed description, see 3.2.2 Flowchart for


Sailing Sailing.)

(From the [MENU])


Selects [Route]
Operation panel
Selects [To WPT]
operation Route Planning
Table editing
Graphical editing
Display panel Create alternate route
Sailing monitoring operation
Alarm monitor
Chart Editing
(Arrival, Route, etc.)
User Map editor
Menu operation Manual Update

Chart Portfolio
(S-57 only)

Press the [POWER] key


Exit and shutdown
on the operation panel

Power switch OFF

3-17 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.2.2 Flowchart for Sailing
Alarms:
If an alarm occurs, the alarm panel will blink in red and a sound will be
Sailing start
heard. Check the alarm contents and, after confirming it, press the
[ALARM ACK] key on the operation panel. Pressing the [Alarm List] on the
display panel shows the alarm contents. (For detailed description, see
3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK]).)

Select the [Route] you want from the display panel. (Initially "UNLOAD" is
Select [Route] shown.)

Select [To WPT] Select the [To WPT] (for example 1 or Auto Select).

Move you ship to the sea Move your ship manually. Your ship will always be displayed on the chart.

Ship's bearing

To WPT Your ship's symbol

Note:
Be sure that the background color is not sky
blue. If it is sky blue, your ship position is
shifted by the offset function. In this case,
return its color to gray. See, 3.34.4 Canceling
Bearing to the To WPT
the Ship Offset.

Next Page

About Auto Sailing:


You can use automatic sailing when using together with the Auto Pilot equipment. For details, see
chapter 6 Automatic Sailing.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-18


Flowchart for Sailing -- Continued

The sequel from the


pre-page
When the ship crosses a waypoint boundary, there will be an updated next
WPT, and an Arrived at WPT alarm occurs.
Route monitoring After confirming the alarm contents, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the
("Arrived at WPT" alarm operation panel or the [Alarm Acknowledgement] button on the display
occurs when arrived at the panel to stop the alarm. ECDIS

WPT.)

[Alarm Acknowledgement] button


It repeats itself until the
ship arrives at the last
WPT before the final
destination.

When the ship exceeds the boundary of the final destination, "Arrived at
Arrived at the final destination
("Arrived at LAST WPT" alarm LAST WPT" alarm will occur.
occurs.) After confirming the alarm contents, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the
operation panel or the [Alarm Acknowledgement] button on the display
panel to stop the alarm.

Select "UNLOAD". Then the route selected disappears from the screen.
Unload the route

End of sailing

3-19 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.3 Power ON/OFF and Preparation
How to turn the power ON and OFF and preparation before sailing are described here.
Note that, when you turn the power OFF, you must terminate the system by following the termination
sequence described here.
Also, how to recover the system in case of hung up is explained.

3.3.1 Power ON ([POWER])


On the operation panel
Press the [POWER] key.
The power turns on, and the [POWER] key will light. After a short while, the startup menu will be
displayed.

Do not turn on the power of the equipment with a floppy disk inserted in the
floppy disk drive.
The equipment will not start normally.

In the case of turning on the power under the condition of low temperature,
do pre-heat less than 30 minutes.
The equipment will not start normally.

[POWER] key
When ON: Lighting

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-20


3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu
The power turns on, and the [POWER] key will light. After a short while, the Startup menu will be
displayed.
You can select one of items.
Navigation & Planning
If [ ] is left-clicked, the [Startup screen] will first appear, and then the Navigation & Planning screen will
be displayed.
Chart Portfolio
ECDIS
You can update the S-57/ARCS chart. Left-clicking this
menu will open the chart portfolio screen. (See Additional
Manual for Chart Installation.)
Chart Manager
You can update the C-Map chart. Left-clicking this menu
will open the Chart Manager screen. (See Additional
Manual for Chart Installation.)
Playback
The sailed passage can be replayed by the Playback
feature. When left-clicking this menu, Playback screen is
displayed.(See chapter 8 Playback.)
Color Pattern
Displays the S-57 chart color pattern. (See 10.2.1 Color
[Startup Menu]
Pattern (S-57))
Gray Scale
Displays the gray scale for the color test. (See 10.2.2
Gray Scale)

Note:
[Navigation & Planning] will be automatically
displayed if no operation is conducted for 10
seconds.

3-21 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.3.3 Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS
Only)
1) If ARCS has been installed, the ARCS PIN panel will be displayed after [Navigation & Planning]
is selected in the Startup menu. Input the ARCS PIN and left-click on the [OK] button. The
[Startup screen] will be displayed if the inputted ARCS PIN is correct and the [OK] button is
left-clicked on the ARCS PIN panel, or if the [Cancel] button has been left-clicked. If ARCS has
not been installed, however, the ARCS PIN panel will not be displayed. The [Startup screen]
will be displayed instead.

Note:
ARCS will not be displayed unless a correct
ARCS PIN is inputted on the ARCS PIN
panel.
ARCS will not be displayed if the [Cancel]
button is left-clicked on the ARCS PIN
panel.
The ARCS PIN panel is displayed only
once after [Navigation & Planning] is
selected.
To show the ARCS PIN panel again after
left-clicking [Cancel], turn off the power of
ECDIS, and then, turn it on again to resume
the startup procedure.
ARCS will not be displayed after its contract
term has expired.

Note:
Use the software keyboard or PS/2
keyboard to input ARCS PIN.
Be sure to carefully read the caution
displayed on the startup screen.

[Startup Screen]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-22


2) After the Startup screen appears, the Navigation & Planning screen will be displayed after a short
while.

[Navigation & Planning Screen (Example)]

ECDIS

3-23 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.3.4 Power OFF Operation
On the operation panel
Press the [POWER] key.
The power is turned off and the [POWER] key light goes out.

[POWER] key
When OFF: Unlit

Note:
If the [POWER] key is pressed during Navigation & Planning, gray screen will be displayed about
20 seconds, but the power will eventually be turn off.

3.3.5 Adjusting the Brightness and Sound Volume


Perform the following adjustments as required.

(1) Brightness of the screen ([BRILL])


Adjust the Brilliance control on the LCD monitor to adjust the brightness on the screen.

JAN-701B JAN-901B

Brilliance control
Brilliance control

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-24


(2) Brightness of the operation panel ([PANEL])

Key operation:
1) On the operation panel
Press the [PANEL] key.
Each time you press the key, the operation panel brightness changes.
You can adjust the brightness in five steps.

Menu operation: ECDIS

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
In the User Chart editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
The Color and Brilliance Setting dialog will appear.
2) The operation panel brightness is changed in [Keyboard] of [Brilliance].

Tool area on display panel operation:


1) The tool area is switched from [Tools] to [Brilliance] with tool area switch button.
2) The operation panel brightness is changed by left-clicking the panel brightness switch button.

Panel brightness
switch button

Each time you left-click the button, The operation panel brightness changes.

(3) Brightness of the radar overlay image ([VID])

Menu operation:
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
In the User Chart editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
The Color and Brilliance Setting dialog will appear.
2) The panel brightness is changed in [Rader Video] of [Brilliance].

Tool area on display panel operation:


1) The tool area is switched from [Tools] to [Brilliance] with tool area switch.
2) The brightness of Radar overlay image is changed by left-clicking the Video brightness switch .

Video brightness switch

Each time you press the key, the brightness of Radar overlay image changes.
3-25 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS
(4) Brightness of the AIS/TT target symbol ([TGT])

Menu operation:
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
In the User Chart editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
The Color and Brilliance Setting dialog will appear.
2) The panel brightness is changed in [Target Symbol] of [Brilliance].

Tool area on display panel operation:


1) The tool area is switched from [Tools] to [Brilliance] with tool area switch button.
2) The panel brightness of target symbol is changed by left-clicking the [TGT] button.

[TGT] button

Each time you press the key, the brightness of target symbol changes.

(5) Volume Adjustment


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(0) Buzzer Volume] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(0) Buzzer Volume] in that order.
In the User Chart editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(0) Buzzer Volume] in that order.
The Buzzer Volume panel will appear.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-26


2) The alarm volume is changed in seven steps by moving the scroll bar of each alarm type. *1
3) To fix the changed setting and to close the panel, press OK. When pressing Cancel , the panel
is closed and the setting returns to the original condition.

*1 The volume of lift click sound remains the same regardless of the sound level setting.

Explanation and example of alarm type (Refer to 10.1 Alarm function)


Alarm Type Explanation Example (Alarm message) ECDIS

System Alarm Communication connection error and POSN 1(Data)


hardware error POSN1 shifted
AC offline
Operation Miss Specifying an unrelated place No Object
Exceeding the number of displays of Not Allowed
AIS/TT AIS 95% Capacity
Key ACK Operating the key to the operation panel (Pushing [ALARM ACK] key)
Setting Alarm The initialization of ECDIS is insufficient Safety contour not set
Safety depth not set
Navigation Alarm Urgent warning on auto sail Call-back navigator
High
Navigation Alarm Nearing a dangerous object and an area Crossing Safety Contour
Mid Encountered abnormality of sailing Approaching Wreck
Dragging anchor
Navigation Alarm A variety of alarms of the others except Timer
Low the above. CPA/TCPA
Loaded different datum chart

3-27 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.3.6 Changing the Display Color ([DAY/NIGHT])
You can change the display color to obtain optimum display matched with the lighting conditions on the
bridge. Select one of the following display colors
DAY1 (Day Bright)
DAY2 (Day Whiteback) For S-57/C-MAP only
DAY3 (Day Blackback)
DUSK (Dusk) For S-57/C-MAP only
NIGHT (Night)

Key operation:
1) On the operation panel
Press the [DAY/NIGHT] key. Each time you press the key, the display color changes.
The order with which the display color switches over to:
DAY3-DAY2-DAY1-DUSK-NIGHT-DUSK-DAY1-DAY2-DAY3-DAY2-...
Note: When leaving for 3 seconds from the operation when operating from the darker one to the
lighter one, next key operation becomes operation from the lighter one to the darker one.

Menu operation:
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order, and
then select one of items you want.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order

Day-Night level
Day Bright
Day Whiteback (S-57/C-MAP)
Day Blackback
Dusk (S-57/C-MAP)
Night

When you select the level in "Day/Night" list and push [OK] or [Apply] button, the display color of
the screen will be changed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-28


Tool area on display panel operation:
1) Tool area is switched from [Tools] to [Brilliance] with tool area switch button.
2) Display color is changed by [Day-Night level] switch button.

[Day-Night level] switch button

Each time you press the key, the display color changes. The order which a display color switches ECDIS

over to is the same as the key operation. (Refer to "Key operation".)


Note:
When you change display colors, note that a [Night] color especially can make displayed
information difficult to read/see.

3-29 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])
When the alarm occurs, the buzzer sounds and the alarm contents are displayed in the alarm display
area on the display panel to notify the operator of an alarm. When more than one alarm occurs, it changes
an alarm display every second.
After confirming the contents of the alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the operation panel or
left-click the alarm acknowledge-button on the display panel to acknowledge the alarm. When confirming
an alarm, the buzzer sound stops and the alarm display disappears from the alarm acknowledge-button.
However, until the cause of the alarm is removed, in the alarm display area, the alarm maintains a
displayed condition.
[Alarm List] button displays the alarm record which occurred recently. When you want to see the alarm
which occurred in the past, it chooses "Logbook" from the menu. (See 3.26 Logbook)

The alarm acknowledge-button [Alarm List]


botton
The alarm display area

Memo: For alarm settings, see 7.10 Setting the Alarm Options.

(1) When no alarm is found


If no alarm is found, the alarm display area displays [No Alarm].

Nothing is displayed here.

Displaying [No Alarm]

(2) When an alarm occurs


An alarm is displayed at the alarm acknowledge-button and in the alarm display area and the alarm
sound sounds.
Displaying the alarm
Blinking every 0.5 seconds

Displaying the alarm

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-30


(3) Acknowledging and canceling of the alarm (Stopping the alarm sound)

Notes:
Until it confirms the cause of the alarm, don't acknowledge an alarm.

1) The procedure of the alarm acknowledgement operation


On the operation panel
Press the [ALARM ACK] key. ECDIS

On the display panel


Left-click the alarm acknowledge-button.

The alarm sound stops and the alarm display on the alarm acknowledge-button disappears.
However, in the alarm display area, it maintains the condition which the alarm occurred to.
To erase an alarm from the alarm display area, the problem which the alarm generated must
be solved.

No Alarm

Alarm occurs
Ex: The communication error occurs in POSN1.
The Alarm occurrence condition
(Not acknowledged)
The alarm sound sounds.
Blinking the alarm

Displaying the alarm Left-click the alarm acknowledge-button.

Or, press key.


The Alarm occurrence condition
(Not acknowledged)

The alarm sound stops


Disappearing the alarm

Resolved the occurring alarm


Maintaining the alarm displaying.
Ex.: The communication of POSN1 becomes
possible.
No Alarm

2) If two or more alarms have occurred, the display of the alarm acknowledge-button and the
display of the alarm display area is displaying alarm contents changed every second. When
acknowledging alarm, the acknowledgement operation is done about the displayed alarm when
operating.

3-31 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


(4) Displaying the alarm list
1) At any time, left-click the [Alarm List] button on the display panel.
Then, the Alarm List panel opens.
If you open the Alarm List panel when the alarm blinks, the alarm button in the Alarm List
also blinks.
After confirmation, you can acknowledge the blinking alarm by left-clicking the [ACK] button.

You can also open the Alarm List panel from the menu:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(3) Test] - [(1) Alarm Log] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(3) Test] - [(1) Alarm Log] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(3) Test] - [(1) Alarm Log] in that order.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-32


2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the Alarm List panel.
* When opening Alarm List once again, the tab to have been selecting last opens.
Detailed Alarm List refers to "9.1Alarm Function".

Icon blinks in red: Title of the tab displaying red:


The alarm occurs and it is not acknowledged yet. Some alarm in the tab occurs.
Icon stays in red:
The alarm is acknowledged but it is continuing.
Button changes to green when the alarm cause is removed.
ECDIS

No Icon: Icon in green: ACK button in red, and blinking words:


The alarm does not No alarm. Some alarm occurs and there are not acknowledged yet.
occur in the current ACK button in red, and displaying words:
system configuration. Some alarm occurs and all alarms are acknowledged.
ACK button in green:
No alarm.

3-33 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


[System Alarm Status] tab:
[System alarm status] is the alarm list of the hardware error and the communication error.
[System alarm status] is displaying, dividing into the category below:
No.1 Position Data Alarm
No.2 Position Data Alarm
No.1 Position Shift Alarm
Position Difference Alarm
Radar Data Alarm
Target Data Track Alarm
Gyro Data Alarm
Log Data Alarm
Autopilot Data Alarm
Hardware Alarm

[NAV. Alarm Status] tab:


[NAV. alarm status] is the list of the alarm which needs to solve when occurring during navigation.
[NAV. alarm status] is displaying, dividing into the category below:
Safety contour Alarm
Dangerous Alarm
Route Monitoring Alarm
Target Alarm
LAT. Limit Over Alarm
Anchor Alarm
Chart Alarm
ARCS Alarm
Area Alarm

[INFO/Warning] tab:
[INFO/Warning] is the list of the Information and Warning.
"Information" alarm occurs when not doing the initial setting. Alarm icon color is in blue when
occurring.
"Warning" alarm occurs when become condition that it should be careful of the sailing.
Alarm icon color is in yellow when occurring. "Warning" alarm is not need to acknowledge.
However, the alarm is displayed in the alarm display area during the occurrence.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-34


(5) Displaying the alarm Log table
You can display the alarm Log on the sailing.

Note:
The alarm history is displayed only latest 20 items. To check the past alarm lists, see 3.26
Logbook.

Menu operation:
1) In the normal menu ECDIS

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(3) Test] - [(1) Alarm Log] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(3) Test] - [(1) Alarm Log] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(3) Test] - [(1) Alarm Log] in that order.

Select the System Alarm Log tab or NAV.Alarm Log tab after open the Alarm List panel.

3-35 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the Alarm List panel.
Alarm: Detected: Acknowledge: Removed*:
Displaying alarm Displaying date when Displaying date when the Displaying date when
contents the alarm occurred. alarm acknowledged. the alarm removed.

Icon blinks in red:


The alarm occurs and it is not acknowledged yet.
Icon stays in red:
The alarm is acknowledged but it is continuing. All Clear:
No Icon: Erase all displays of the alarm
The alarm is removed. except for the occurring alarm

*When switching off the power without acknowledge behind the alarm, all alarms are removed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-36


3.3.8 Displaying the Radar Image ([RADAR])
You can turn ON/OFF the radar image on the chart. The radar image can be adjusted with the dials on the
operation panel.

Note:
To display a radar image, the optional radar board must be installed on the unit. Also, a radar
image must be sent from the radar system.
It is not possible to display the image from the Radar in chart conversion by Chart Portfolio. ECDIS

If the radar system displays a short-range image, and a long-range image on the ECDIS at the
same time, the radar image on the ECDIS may be distorted.
While the radar image is displayed, the display range can be changed in 10 steps (0.5/0.75/1.5/3/6/
12/24/48/96/120nm).
If Display Color is [DAY1] or [DAY2], Display Color changes [DAY3] when radar display turn on.
For ARCS, the available display range differs depending on the chart displayed. If a display range
beyond 120nm is selected, the radar image will be turned off automatically.

Memo: For Radar settings, see 3.32 1Setting Radar Options

(1) Radar display ON/OFF from the menu


Turning ON/OFF the Radar 1:
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(1) Radar 1] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(1) Radar 1] in that order.
Each time you left-click [(1) Radar 1], the Radar 1 display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the mark is attached to the [(1) Radar 1].
The menu is closed and the image from the Radar 1 will be superimposed on the chart.
When the radar image is turned ON, the display range rings for radar echoes are shown in red.
* The scale combo box of the display panel becomes invalid.
* When Radar2 is displayed, the echo of Radar2 becomes hidden.

Turning ON/OFF the Radar 2:


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(2) Radar Overlay] - [(2) Radar 2] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(2) Radar Overlay] - [(2) Radar 2] in that order.
Each time you left-click [(2) Radar 2], the Radar 2 display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the mark is attached to the [(2) Radar 2].
The image from the Radar 2 will be superimposed on the chart.
When the radar image is turned ON, the display range rings for radar echoes are shown in red.
* The scale combo box of the display panel becomes invalid.
* When [Radar1] is displayed, the echo of Radar1 becomes hidden.

3-37 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


Turning ON/OFF the Range Rings:
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(3) Range Rings] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(3) Range Rings] in that order.
Each time you left-click [(3) Range Rings], the range ring display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the mark is attached to the [(3) Range Rings].
The range rings will be superimposed on the chart.

Turning ON/OFF the Bearing Scale:


1) It makes a Radar1 or Radar2 valid.
2) In the normal menu
Select [Main]-[Radar Overlay]-[Bearing Scale] in that order.
Each time you left-click [Bearing Scale], the bearing scale display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the mark is attached to the [Bearing Scale].
The bearing scale will be superimposed on the chart.

(2) Radar Overlay Setting from the menu


1) In the normal menu
Select [Main]-[Radar Overlay]-[Setting] in that order.
[Radar Overlay Setting] panel is displayed.
The following item can be adjusted:
[Gain]: Gain can be adjusted.
[Sea]: Sea can be adjusted.
[Rain]: Rain can be adjusted.
[Video]: Video can be adjusted.
Radar echo adjustment screen closes when left-click the [Close] button.

(3) Radar display ON/OFF from the operation panel


On the operation panel
Press the [RADAR] key.
The image from the radar selected by the menu operation above will be superimposed on the chart.
To clear the image, press the key again.
When the radar image is turned ON, the display range rings for radar echoes are shown in red.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-38


(4) Radar image adjustment (on the operation panel)

Note:
If menu panel adjustment ([(7) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(0) Setting] Rader Option
panel) is selected, the following dials do not work. In this case, change the menu setting to
activate the dials. For details, see 3.32.1 Setting Radar Options.

[VIDEO]: Adjusting the brightness of radar echoes


The [VIDEO] dial adjusts the brightness of radar echoes. Turning the [VIDEO] dial to the right
ECDIS
increases the brightness. Adjust to the best brightness to view radar echoes.

[RAIN]: Suppressing rain and snow clutter


The [RAIN] dial suppresses clutter caused by rain and snow. Turning the [RAIN] dial
(ANTI-CLUTTER RAIN dial) to the right enhances the contours of targets that are hidden in images
of rain and snow.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets. This dial also reduces
sea clutter. So, using both the [RAIN] and [SEA] dials is more effective. Normally, keep this dial
turned as far as possible to the left.

[SEA]: Suppressing sea clutter


The [SEA] dial lowers the reception sensitivity in near distances to reduce sea clutter. Turning the
[SEA] dial (ANTI-CLUTTER SEA dial) to the right increases the effect of suppressing sea clutter.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets like buoys and small
boats.

[GAIN]: Adjusting sensitivity


The [GAIN] dial adjusts the reception sensitivity of RADAR echo. Turning the [GAIN] dial to the right
increases the reception sensitivity and widens the distances in which RADAR echo can be
observed.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial, as reception noise on screen increases. This worsens the
contrast and makes it more difficult to tell the difference between targets and RADAR echo.
Alternatively, turning the [GAIN] dial to the left to view near distances or screens containing closely
packed targets, decreases the reception sensitivity making targets easier to view.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets.

3-39 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.3.9 The AIS/TT target Display
You can turn ON/OFF the AIS/TT target information on the chart using the operation panel or from the
menu.

Note:
TT information is displayed only when it is received from the TT device system.
AIS information can be displayed only when it is received from the AIS device system.

For AIS/TT target settings, (see 3.33 .1AIS/TT Setting).

3.3.9.1 AIS/TT display ON/OFF


(1) AIS/TT display ON/OFF using the operation panel
On the operation panel
Press the [AIS/TT] key.
The target information sent from the radar currently selected will be superimposed on the chart.

(2) AIS/TT display ON/OFF from the menu


"TT 1" "TT 2" "AIS" can be independently selected. Selecting [All] can turns ON/OFF "TT 1" "TT 2"
"AIS" displays at the same time.

In the normal menu


Select [MENU]-[(1) AIS/TT ]-[(1) TT1] or [(2) TT2] or [(3) AIS] or [(4) All] in that order..
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU]-[(3) AIS/TT ]-[(1) TT1] or [(2) TT2] or [(3) AIS] or [(4) All] in that order..
Each time you select [(1) TT1], [(2) TT2], or [(3) AIS], its display is turned ON and OFF.
When you select [(4) All], items [(1) TT1] [(2) TT2] [(3) AIS] are simultaneously turned ON/OFF.
When the selected item is turned ON, the mark is attached.

(3) Built-in of co-processor


Internal TT target is displayed on the Chart.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-40


3.3.9.2 Opening the AIS/TT list
Note that the items Bearing, Distance, CPA ,TCPA in the table are the filtered value by the
AIS/TT settings. See 3.33.1 AIS/TT Setting .

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(6) All List] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(6) All List] in that order.
ECDIS
The All List panel opens.
2) Perform the following operation.
Left-click one of the tabs, to open the TT1 or TT2 or AIS list.
When you opened AIS tab, the [View AIS Detail] becomes active.
Left-click the [Close] to close the All List panel.
3) AIS Filter
It is displayed according to the display range item which was set in AIS filter.
See 3.33.1 AIS/TT Setting .

3-41 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


List items:
The items are the same for "TT1" "TT2" "AIS". The P1, P2, etc. are the target number.
Bearing: Bearing to the AIS/TT target
Range: Distance to the AIS/TT target
Heading: Heading of the AIS/TT target
COG: Course of the AIS/TT target
SOG: Speed of the AIS/TT target
Position: Position of the AIS/TT target
CPA: Closest Point of Approach
TCPA: Time to Closest Point of Approach
Status: Status of the AIS/TT target

[View AIS Detail] button function:


You can view the detailed information on AIS.
When you left-click this [View AIS Detail], the AIS Information panel will open.
Left-click the [Close] to close the AIS Information panel.

[The item of AIS Information]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-42


Target ID:
Ships Name: Name of the AIS target ship
MMSI: 9-digit unique user ID
Status: Sleeping / Activated / Lost
NAV Status up to 10 characters
0: Under Way Using Engine: Under way
1: AT ANCHOR: Anchoring
2: NOT UNDER COMMAND: Not under command
3. RESTRICTED MANOEUVRABILITY: Steering capabilities are limited
4: CONSTRAINED BY HER DRAUGHT: Draft is limited
ECDIS
5: MOORED: Mooring
6: AGROUND: Grounding
7: ENGAGED IN FISHING: Fishing
8: UNDER WAY SAILING: Sailing
9: RESERVED FOR HSC: High-speed craft
10: RESERVED FOR WIG: Wing-in-ground effect craft
15: NOT DEFINED: Undefined

Call Sign: Call sign on the own station (up to 7 characters)


IMO No.: 9-digit number
CPA: Closest point of approach to the AIS target
TCPA: Time to closest point of approach to the AIS target
Position Sensor: Types of sensors the AIS target uses
0: NOT DEFINED
1: GPS: GPS
2: GLONASS: GLONASS
3: Combined GPS/GLONASS: GPS/GLONASS combined type
4: Loran-C: Loran-C
5: Chayka: Chayka
6: Integrated Navigation System: Integrated Navigation System
7: Surveyed: Measuring type
8-15: Not used: Not used

Position Accuracy: [>10m] / [<10m]

3-43 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


Ships Type: Types of AIS target
2X: WIG: Wing-in-ground effect craft
30: FISHING VESSEL: Fishing vessel
31: TOWING VESSEL: Towing vessel
32: TOWING VESSEL-L > 200M B -> 25M: A towing vessel having a length of 200m or longer,
or a width of 25m or longer
33: DREDGE OR UNDERWATER OPE (Engaged in dredging or underwater operation): A
vessel that is dredging or conducting underwater operations
34: VESSEL-DIVING OPE (Engaged in diving operation): A vessel conducting underwater
operations
35: VESSEL-MILITARY OPE (Engaged in military operation): A vessel being engaged in
military operations
36: SAILING VESSEL: Sailing vessel
37: PLEASURE CRAFT: Pleasure craft
4X: HSC (High speed craft): High-speed craft
50: PILOT VESSEL: Pilot vessel
51: SEARCH AND RESCUE VESSELS: Salvage vessel
52: TUGS: Tugboat
53: PORT TENDERS: Tender boat
54: WITH ANTI-POLLUTION EQUIP (Vessels with anti-pollution facilities or equipment):
Clean-up vessel
55: LAW ENFORCEMENT VESSELS: Patrol vessel
58: MEDICAL TRANSPORTS: Medical vessel

59: RESOLUTION NO18: MOB-83 (Ships according to Resolution No18 (Mob-83)): Vessels
defined by the Radio Regulation
6X: PASSENGER SHIPS: Passenger ship
7X: CARGO SHIPS: Cargo ship
8X: TANKER: Tanker
9X: OTHER TYPE OF SHIP: Other types of ships
For categories 2X, 4X, 6X, 7X, 8X, and 9X, the second digit indicates types of loaded cargoes/status.
X1: CATEGORY A (DG/HP/MP)
X2: CATEGORY B (DG/HP/MP)
X3: CATEGORY C (DG/HP/MP)
X4: CATEGORY D (DG/HP/MP)
X9: NO ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
X0: ALL SHIPS OF THIS TYPE
For categories 6X, 7X, 8X, and 9X, the second digit indicates a vessel status.
X5: NOT UNDER COMMAND: Not under command
X6: RESTRICTED BY (her ability) MANOEUVRE: Steering capabilities are limited
X7: CONSTRAINED BY (her) DRAUGHT: Draft is limited

Latitude: The latitude at which the AIS target is situated


Longitude: The longitude at which the AIS target is situated
Bearing: Bearing from own ship to the AIS target
Range: Distance between own ship and the AIS target
COG: Bearing of the AIS target
SOG: Speed of the AIS target
Length: Length of the AIS target
Beam: Beam of the AIS target
Draft: Draft of the AIS target
Heading: Heading of the AIS target
Rate of Turn: Turning speed of the AIS target
Destination: Destination of the AIS target
ETA: ETA of AIS target

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-44


Note:
The AIS system equipped on own ship also has the own ship's AIS data to transmit for another
ship. Own ships AIS data can be confirmed according to the following menu.

Select [MENU][(1)AIS/TT][(9)Own Ships AIS Data] in that order.(Ex.:normal menu

ECDIS

3-45 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.3.9.3 Target Track
Maximum of 200 Target Track are displayed. When more than 200, it is erased from old Target Track.
Even if it changes [Target Memory Interval], the point which was displayed by the first setting is
displayed just as it is
When setting [Target Memory Interval] in the distance interval, it is displayed when moving the
distance that a movement except the straight line was specified.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT]-[(8) Target Track]-[(1) Target Track Setting] in that order..
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU]-[(3) AIS/TT]-[(8) Target Track]-[(1) Target Track Setting] in that order. [Target
Track Setting] panel is displayed.
Target Track can be displayed in a maximum of 200.

Check ONTarget Track is displayed. [Target Track Color & Display] panel is
Check OFFTarget Track is not displayed. displayed.

Target Track is displayed every [3sec] [5sec]


[10sec] [30sec] [1min] [3min] [5mim] [10min]
[30min] [60min] [1NM] [3NM] [5NM] [10NM].

[OFF] : Target Track is not cleared.


[All] : Clear all.
[(Color)] : Clear Target Track of selected color.

[OFF] Target Track is not cleared.


[All] : Clear all.
[Target Track No. xx] : Clear Target Track of selected number.
[Other] : Clear to No11 from No20.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-46


2) Property Mode
Right-click on the chart and it selects [TGT Property] from the shortcut menu in the normal menu.
Then move the cursor on the target and left-click. The following screen is displayed.
TT

ID of Target Track is displayed

ECDIS
It is possible to change into the specified
color.
In this regard, however, already allocated
Target Track Number isn't displayed.

AIS

ID of AIS is displayed

It is possible to change into the specified


color.
In this regard, however, already allocated
AIS Target Number isn't displayed.

3-47 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3) Target Track Setting [Color] tab
[Target Track Color & Display] panel from left-click [Target Track Color & Display].
The color of TT can be changed and be displayed.

[Individual]: All Target Tracks are valid


[(Color)]: All Target Tracks are valid with selected
color.
[Olive][Blue][Cyan][Green][Yellow][Orange]
[Brown][Red][Pink][Magenta][White]

[OFF]:
When selecting [OFF], Target Track of selected
number isn't displayed.
[Target Track No.1] - [Target Track No10]:
Each number is changed to the color which the
color of selected Target Track select.
[Other]:
[Other] is changed to the color which the color of
Target Track No11 - No20 selects.

4) Target Track Setting [Display] tab


In the normal menu
Select [MENU]-[(1) AIS/TT]-[(8) Target Track]-[(1) Target Track Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU]-[(3) AIS/TT]-[(8) Target Track]-[(1) Target Track Setting] in that order.
[Target Track Color & Display] panel from [Display] tab is displayed from left-click [Target Track
Color & Display]. The valid or invalid of the display of Target Track can be selected.

[Individual]: Each of Target Track can be individually selected.


[OFF]: All Target Track are not displayed.
[ON]: All Target Track are displayed.

[Target Track No.1] - [Target Track No.10]:


Each display or hide can be selected.
[Other]: Display or hide of Targets Track No.11 - No.22 can be
selected.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-48


3.3.9.4 File operation
Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [Target Track] - [File operation] in that order.
[File Operations] panel is displayed.
Save, Erase, Load and so on of Target Track. can be operated.

Saved file name and date are displayed.

ECDIS
[Save Target Track File] panel is displayed.
It is possible to input of file name and save at this
panel.
The file name is to the alphanumeric 10 character.
When there is same file name, message to confirm
overwrite is displayed.

File of list can be loaded when clicking [Load]


button.
When the Target Track has loaded, "Current Target
Track is deleted, is that OK?" message is
displayed.

Selected file is displayed in [Target Track Display]


box when clicking [Select] button.

File in list can be deleted when clicking [Erase]


button.
The file can not be recovered when erasing, is that
OK? message is displayed and can selected [Yes]
or [No].

Target Track which is selected by [Target Track Display]


box can be displayed when putting a check.

* [Erase] button, [Load] button, [Select] button doesn't work when not choosing a file.
* The file can save in 9999. When saving any more, the error message is displayed and can not save.
* During select In [Target Track Display] box, that file isn't changed.

3-49 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.3.9.5 Display Received Message
It displays the message which was sent from AIS.

Addressed Message (Displays the sent message from AIS to the own ship)
Select [MENU]-[(1)AIS/TT]-[(1)Message]-[(1)Addressed Messages] in that order.

Broadcast Message (Displays the message which was sent without specifying an address from AIS)
Select [MENU]-[(1)AIS/TT]-[(1)Message]-[(2)Broadcast Messages] in that order.

3.3.9.6 AIS sentence


The sentence form that receives AIS is selected. Please confirm the specification of the AIS
device of the ship, and select an appropriate sentence.

Select [MENU]-[(1)AIS/TT]-[(0) AIS Message] and the following sentences in that order.
(1)VDM
(2)TTD1
(3)TTD2

3.3.9.7 Activating and Deactivating AIS Targets


The default for AIS targets is display in the inactive state. The procedures below are used for
activating and deactivating AIS targets.

Activating:
1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [Activate AIS] from the context menu.
The cross cursor will change to a box cursor.
2) Move the cursor with the track ball to an AIS target that is not active, then left-click on it. The
AIS target will become active, the status will be changed to active, and the vector will be
displayed.

When the cursor move the target, MMSI (the ships name) and CPA/TCPA are displayed.

Deactivating:
1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [Deactivate AIS] from the shortcut menu.
The cross cursor will change to a box cursor.
2) Move the cursor with the track ball to an AIS target that is active, then left-click on it. The AIS
target will become inactive, and the vector will not be displayed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-50


Inactive Active ECDIS

Deactivating all:
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(5) Deactivate All AIS] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(5) Deactivate All AIS] in that order.
All AIS targets will be deactivated, and the vectors will not be displayed.

3-51 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.3.9.8 Panel Display of AIS/TT Target
Left-click on the AIS/TT target displayed on the screen so that AIS/TT information will be on the
Select List panel on the display panel.

1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [TGT Data] from the context menu.
The cross cursor becomes the box cursor.
2) Use the trackball to move the cursor to the AIS/TT target, and then left-click.
The Select List panel will open and AIS/TT target information will be displayed.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(7) Select List] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(7) Select List] in that order.
If you wish to have the Select List panel open in advance,

- Up to 3 targets can be simultaneously displayed on the Select List panel. The target that was
selected first is displayed in the top panel. As new targets are selected and displayed, previous targets
move down by one. When the fourth target is selected, the bottom target display panel will no longer
display the first target selection.
- To delete a panel display, left-click on the [Release] provided in each panel. As other way, select
[Cancel TGT Data] on the context menu and left-click the target. If there is a target below the deleted
target, it moves up by one.

Bearing:
Bearing towards the AIS/TT target
Target ID:
ID of the TT/AIS target CPA:
Closest point of approach to the AIS
Range: target
Range to the TT/AIS target
TCPA:
COG:
Time to closest point of approach
Course to the TT/AIS target
to the AIS target
SOG:
Speed of the TT/AIS target [Additional] tab

[Common] tab

Name:
Name of the AIS target (not
displayed for TT targets)

[Release] button:
Position:
Release the selected target.
Current position of the AIS/TT target

Status:
Current status of the AIS/TT target

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-52


3.3.10 MOB (Man OverBoard)
This function is a monitoring function so as not to lose sight of the man overboard point when person
falls from ship.

1) Start MOB mode


In the Display panel
Left-click [MOB] .

ECDIS

In the operation panel


Push [MOB] key.

Then, the point where the mode started is marked as MOB point, and the MOB information
panel is displayed.

MOB information panel


MOB Point symbol Bearing and range from own ship

POSN (Position):
Coordinates of MOB point

BRG (Bearing):
Bearing from own ship to
MOB

RNG (Range):
Range from own ship to
MOB

NM/km/sm:
Own ship symbol Each time this button is
pushed, the unit of range
changes

NM: nautical mile


Km: kilometer
sm: statute mile

TTG (Time to go):


Time until arriving at MOB

2) End MOB mode


In the Display panel
It keeps pressing the [MOB] for three seconds or more.
In the operation panel
It keeps pressing the [MOB] key for three seconds or more.
Then, the MOB panel close, and the MOB point symbol display on the chart disappears.

3-53 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


Note
The following information can change by the administrator setting.
Display/Non-display of [MOB] button on the Display Panel
Display/Non-display of MOB information panel.
Switch of MOB Time(TTG or Time)

[MOB] button is non-displays it.

State of Time display (Display after MOB mode starts at elapsed time)

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-54


3.3.11 Using the DVD Drive and Floppy Disk
Drive and DVD
Opening the panel on the front of the main unit will allow you to use the floppy disk drive and the DVD
drive .

ECDIS

Eject button:
Eject button:
Use to open and close the tray.
Use to eject a floppy disk.

Floppy disk drive

Access lamp:
Will light green when the writing to
or reading from a floppy disk

DVD drive

Access lamp:
Will light green when information is
being read from the CD/DVD.

Note:
Do not remove a floppy disk from the floppy disk drive when the access lamp is on.

3-55 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.4 Shifting the Chart
The chart can be shifted by the following methods:
[HOME] button
Using the cross cursor (Left-click at any position on the chart)
Gripping the chart with the hand cursor (While left-clicking, move the hand cursor.)
[Port List] button
Using the position entry panel

3.4.1 Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button


At any time, you can shift the chart where your ship to a position in the chart area with plenty of room to
advance. This function will be helpful, if you have lost your ship on the chart.

Key operation:
1) On the operation panel
Press the [HOME] key.

Menu operation:
1) On the display panel
Left-click the [HOME] button.
- You can also perform the operation from the menu.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(2) Home] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(2) Home] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(2) Home] in that order.

Your ship will return to a


position in the chart area with
plenty of room to advance.

Own ship symbol

[Screen Display of Home Position]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-56


3.4.2 Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor
You can shift the chart using the cross cursor by simply left-clicking at any position on the chart. Then,
the position becomes the center of the chart.
For the detailed explanation of Motion mode, see 3.7 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode.

True Motion:
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cross cursor to the position you want to set it at the center of
the chart.
ECDIS
2) Left-click at that position.

Cross cursor intersecting point

[Moving to the Center of the Screen]

Relative Motion:
You can shift the location of ship display within the chart view.

1) Rotate the trackball and move the cross cursor to the location you want to set it the ship display.
2) Left-click at that position.

[Moving the location of ship display]

3-57 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.4.3 Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor
You can grip the chart and move it freely.

1) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the position you want to grip the chart.
2) While keeping left-clicked, rotate the trackball to move the chart. At this time the cursor
changes to the hand cursor

Hand cursor

Note:
If the ship is out of chart view, motion mode change to free automatically.

3.4.4 Shifting the Chart with the [Port List]


If a port is already registered, you can switch to that chart. The registered chart is displayed with the
registered scale.
To return to the original chart where the ship is there, press the [HOME] .

Note:
Before using this function, you should register a desired position as a port. See 3.8.1 Adding to My
Port List.

(1) Button operation to jump to the port


1) On the display panel
Left-click the [Port List] .
The drop-down list for ports opens.
2) Left-click a port name you want to jump there.
The position registered as the port will be displayed at the center of the screen.

Registered position as a port

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-58


(2) Menu operation to jump to the port
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3)User Setting] - [(2) My Port List] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(3)User Setting] - [(2) My Port List] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3)User Setting] - [(2) My Port List] in that order.
The My Port List panel opens, where position and scale column are shown.
ECDIS

- To jump to the port, left-click a port name then the [Jump] button.
- To delete the registered port, left-click a port name then the [Delete] .
- To close the panel, left-click the [Close] .

3.4.5 Displaying the Chart by Entering the


Position
You can see the chart to the position you want by entering the position in the position entry panel.
You can operate from the menu only.
To return to the original chart where your ship is, press the [HOME] .
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(1) Enter Position] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(1) Enter Position] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(1) Enter Position] in that order.
The Enter Position panel opens.
2) Enter the position (latitude and longitude), and left-click the
[OK] .
The panel closes and the chart will be displayed to the
designated position.

3-59 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.5 Zooming In/Out the Chart
(S-57/C-MAP Only)
The chart can be zoomed in or out by the following methods:
Zoom area function using the rubber band ([Zoom Area])
Zoom in/out ([Range +/-]/[Zoom In]/[Zoom Out]/Menu/ context menu)
Range selection (Range drop-down list)
Scale selection (Scale drop-down list)

3.5.1 Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band


(S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can enlarge the area surrounded by the rubber band full in the display. You can operate using the
operation panel, display panel , or menu.
1) Select the function by performing one of the following methods:
On the display panel
Left-click the [Zoom Area] button.
Right-click on the chart, then select [Zoom Area] from the context menu.
The cross cursor changes to the lens cursor.

2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the top left of the area A you want to enlarge, and
left-click there.
3) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the bottom right of the area B you want to enlarge,
and left-click there.
The rubber band surrounds the specified area to be enlarged.
After enlarged, the lens cursor returns to the cross cursor.

Selected area

[Zooming area using the rubber band]

Switching charts:
Usually, charts with different scales are displayed in the same area.
Due to the zoom in/zoom out functions, charts with a matching scale are selected and displayed.
When a displayable scale range is assigned to an original scale of a chart and when this original scale
is beyond the range, the chart will not be displayed unless there are other displayable charts.
This equipment shows in background a chart that looks like a world map as a reference. When there is
not a chart which can be displayed, a background chart is displayed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-60


3.5.2 Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can zoom in or out using the [RANGE +/-] key, [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out] button, or [Scale]/[Range]
drop-down list button.

(1) Zooming in/out using the operation panel


1) On the operation panel
Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key.
Each time the key is pressed, the chart is zoomed in or out by the amount or
ECDIS
the scale set by the system.
- Select range or scale for the zooming method.
- For switchable ranges, see 3.5.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only). For scales, see
3.5.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only).

(2) Zooming in/out using the display panel


1) On the display panel
Left-click the [Zoom In] or [Zoom Out] .
Each time you press the key, the chart is zoomed in or out by the amount
set by the system.

Over-scale alarm:
When the ship enters a different chart, an over-scale occurs
if the displayed chart is more than double in size than the
original data. The vertical lines as seen in the figure on the
right will be displayed on the chart and will appear to notify
lower chart accuracy and clarity.
The vertical lines will not display if the size has been made
larger (double or more) through proper operation. Warning lines for overscaling

3-61 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.5.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can switch the range of the chart using the drop-down list on the display panel.

(1) Switching the range using the display panel


1) On the display panel
Left-click the range switching drop-down list .
2) Left-click the range in the list. The color of indicator left side of range switching drop-down list
changes green.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the range you have selected.

Range drop-down list


Zoomed out

This indicator lights up


when Range is valid.

Zoomed in

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-62


3.5.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can switch the scale of the chart using the drop-down list on the display panel.

(1) Switching the scale using the display panel


1) On the display panel

Left-click the scale switching drop-down list.


2) Left-click the scale in the list. ECDIS

The chart is zoomed in or out according to the scale you have selected.

Scale drop-down list


Zoomed out

This indicator lights up


when Scale is valid.
Table editing
Graphical editing
Create alternate
route

Zoomed in

3-63 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.6 Changing the Object Category
(S-57/C-MAP Only)
SENC (System Electronic Navigation Chart) information available for display is subdivided into three
object categories, base display, standard display, and all information(other). You can change the object
category using the display panel.

Base Display: Important objects that cannot be deleted from the charts, such as coastline and own ships
safety contour.
Standard Display: Objects less important than base display, such as drying line, indication of fixed and
floating aids to navigation and boundaries of fairways, channels, etc.
Other Display: Other objects, such as spot soundings, submarine cables and pipelines, ferry routes and
details of all isolated dangers.

Note:
The initial chart screen status is Standard Display. For safety for sailing, use the standard display
or Other display, and not the base display.

You can change the object category by left-clicking the [Base], [Standard], or [Other] on the display
panel.
1) Left-click Object Category drop-down list.

Category drop-down list

You can also use the menu to select an object category. Also, in the [Standard] and [Other]
display methods, you can specify how objects belonging to these categories should be
displayed.
will display all objects that belong to standard display and that have been

set for display. will display all objects that belong to standard display.

For selection of object display, see 3.28.1 Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Options.

About the display in the chart area: You will see all layers being selected.
For better understanding, you can think that various layers are
used to make up the chart display. For example, standard display
consists of the base display and information (objects) for Layer
EVENT mark, etc..
standard display. This means that the base display is the basic
Objects of "Other"
one layer and the information for standard display is another Layer
layer, and the standard display is made up by overlapping both Objects of "Standard"
layers. Layer
Another additional layers may be own ship, user chart, event Objects of "Base"
Layer
mark, EBL/VRM, radar image, etc.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-64


[Base display example]

ECDIS

[Standard display example]

[Other display example]

Note:
The display will be in gray without displaying a chart when a corresponding chart does not exist in
the display area, when a chart exists with only a part of data, or when the display scale does not
match the chart scale. In this case, change the scale to check for a chart.

3-65 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.7 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode
You can select the motion of your ship on the chart and the azimuth of your ship relative to the chart
using the display panel buttons or the menu. Note that the selectable mode differs depending on the
chart type, either S-57/C-MAP Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3/ARCS.

S-57/C-MAP Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3 Chart:


[Possible combination between Motion and Azimuth modes]
Azimuth
North Up Course Up WPT Up Rotation
Motion
True Yes No No Yes
Relative Yes Yes Yes Yes
For [Rotation] mode Free Yes No No Yes

Motion drop-down Azimuth drop-down


list button list button

ARCS Chart:

Motion drop-down
list button

(1) Explanation of each mode:


For selectable modes, see the above explanation. For example, on the S-57/C-MAP chart, you cannot
use the combination of [True] or [Free] mode and [Course Up] and [WPT Up] mode. Also, on the ARCS
chart, you cannot select Azimuth mode.

1) Motion mode (True/Relative/Free):


True Land and other fixed objects are fixed on the display and only own ship moves on the display.
When own ship reaches the predetermined limit, the chart is automatically shifted so that
own ship always remains on the screen.
Relative Own ship is fixed at the center of the screen and the fixed objects such as land move
relatively.
Free You can freely rotate the chart on the display regardless of the own ships direction of travel.
Also, as the ship goes, it move and will disappear from the screen.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-66


[True Mode] [Relative Mode] [Free Mode]
Fixed Heading line Fixed Own ship
Heading line Heading line

Own ship Own ship


Own ship
Fixed
ECDIS

Note:
While in Relative mode, Chart Portfolio cannot be started.

2) Azimuth mode (North Up/Course Up/Rotation) (S-57/C-MAP Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3 Only):


North Up The chart is displayed so that the chart always orients the north. Fixed objects do not
flicker and are easily identified on the chart, and the true bearing of the objects can readily
be read out.
Course Up The chart automatically rotates so that the own ship always faces up on the display.
WPT Up The chart automatically rotates so that To WPT up on the display.
Rotation You can rotate the chart by the specified degrees by 1-degree step.
This function is used to point the route heading up, etc.

[North Up Mode] [Course Up Mode]


Heading line Heading line

Own ship
Own ship

[Rotation Mode] e.g. turned 10 degrees [WPT Up Mode]


Heading line To WPT Heading line

Own ship
Own ship

3-67 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3) Mode change caused by the operation:
In the following cases, the motion/azimuth mode will be automatically changed from the current mode to
another one.
From [True] mode to [Free] mode:
- When the own ship goes exceeding the display limit of the screen.
- When a chart where the ship does not exist is displayed by loading a new chart, including by means
of the [Port List] on the display panel.
From [Relative] mode to [Free] mode:
- When the chart is scrolled.
- When a chart is loaded, including by means of the [Port List] on the display panel.
From [Free] mode to [True] mode:
- When the [Home] is left-clicked.
The [Rotation] made in [Free] mode is retained if the mode is changed over to [True].

Note:
[Course Up/WPT Up/Rotation] is valid only the chart scale is not lower than 1/5,000,000.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-68


3.7.1 Selecting Motion Mode
You can select Motion mode using the display panel.

Note:
While [Chart Portfolio] is running, Motion mode [Relative] cannot be selected.

(1) Selecting Motion mode using the display panel


1) On the display panel ECDIS
Left-click the Motion drop-down list.

Motion drop-down
list button

2) Select one of items (True, Relative, Free) by left-clicking it.

3.7.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode


You can select Azimuth mode using the display panel.

(1) Selecting Azimuth mode using the display panel


1) Left-click the Azimuth drop-down list on the display panel.

Azimuth drop-down
list button
For [Rotation] mode

2) Select one of items (North Up, Course Up, WPT Up) by left-clicking it.
Then, the display changes according to your selection.
If you select [Rotation], enter its rotational angle in degrees. (000.0 359.9 degrees).
If [True] or [Free] is selected in Motion mode, Course Up and WPT Up cannot be selected.

3-69 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.7.3 Setting Chart Fix Mode
Regardless of Motion mode or Azimuth mode, the currently displayed chart will be fixed and no other
charts will be loaded.

Note:
For C-MAP Ed.3, Chart Fix mode is not available.

(1) Setting Fix mode using the menu


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(5) Fix View] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(5) Fix View] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(5) Fix View] in that order.
The chart display becomes fixed.
2) Select [Fix View] in that order again to cancel Fix mode.

Example use of Chart Fix mode:

If the chart (JP440JBE) is zoomed out while Chart Fix mode is turned off, the wide area chart
(JP24NC9G) will be loaded to replace the chart automatically.

1:30,000 1:250,000
JP44OJBE JP24NC9G

If the chart (JP440JBE) is zoomed out while Chart Fix mode is turned on, it is fixed in the display, and
no other chart will be loaded to replace it.

1:30,000 1:250,000
JP44OJBE JP44OJBE

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-70


3.8 My Port List
3.8.1 Adding to My Port List
You can register any position on the chart to the My Port List. After registration, you can directly access
to that position by selecting a port name from the My Port List.
The general registration procedure is as follows:

Select a chart and scale. Register the position to the My ECDIS


Shift the position you want approximately Port List using the menu.
at the center of the chart.

1) Display the position you want to register to the My Port List.


S-57/C-MAP:
The current position will be registered as it is to the My Port List with the current scale. So,
center the position you want before you register it to the My Port List.
When you want to select another position, shift the chart area (see 3.4 Shifting the Chart)
and zoom in/out the chart (see 3.5 Zooming In/Out the Chart
(S-57/C-MAP Only)) as required.
ARCS:
The current chart position will be registered as it is to the My Port List with the current size. So,
center the position you want before you register it to the My Port List.
When you want to select another chart:
Select right-click-[Select Chart under Cursor] or [Select Chart] on Display panel in that order.
For details, see 3.10.2 Selecting Chart under Cursor
(ARCS Only) or 3.10.3 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only).
2) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(1) Save My Port List] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu,
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(1) Save My Port List] in that order.
In the Table User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(1) Save My Port List] in that order.
The Add to my Port List panel opens.
3) Enter a name you want to register and left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
Up to 15 characters can be input.

3-71 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


To display the chart registered as My Port List:
Left-click the [Port List] button on the display panel and select the port name you have entered.
(You can also select from the menu.) For details, see 3.4.4 Shifting the Chart with the [Port List]

3.8.2 Deleting My Port List


You can delete the registered port name from the My Port List as follows:

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3)User Setting] - [(2) My Port List] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(3)User Setting] - [(2) My Port List] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3)User Setting] - [(2) My Port List] in that order.
The My Port List panel opens, where the registered port names are shown.
2) Left-click the port name you want to delete, and then the [Delete] button.
The selected port name will be deleted.
3) Left-click the [Close] to close the panel.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-72


3.9 Selecting a S-57 Chart (S-57
Only)
After power ON, the chart on which your ship exists is automatically called up so that the voyage can be
monitored at all times. When you want to display other chart, perform the following operation.

1) In the normal menu ECDIS


Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) Select S-57 Chart] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(4) Select S-57 Chart] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(4) Select S-57 Chart] in that order.
The Select Chart panel opens.
2) Left-click the chart name you want and then left-click the [OK] .
The Select Chart panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.

By pressing the [HOME] on the display, you can display the chart on which your ship is.

3-73 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.10 ARCS Chart Display Options
(ARCS Only)
The following display options are explained here.
High resolution area selection with the cross cursor
Larger chart/smaller chart selection (using [Larger Chart]/[Smaller Chart] on the display panel, [Zoom
In]/[Zoom Out] in the context menu)
Various options accessible from the menu

3.10.1 Selecting Larger/Smaller Chart (ARCS


Only)
In the ARCS chart, you can select a larger or smaller chart using the display panel, menu, or the
[RANGE+/-] key on the operation panel.

On the operation panel


Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key.

On the display panel


Left-click the [Large Chart] or [Small Chart]
Each time you left-click the button, the larger chart or smaller chart will be displayed.

Note:
An error message may be displayed when you switch a larger or smaller chart. For details of
error messages, see 9.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-74


3.10.2 Selecting Chart under Cursor
(ARCS Only)
1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [Select Chart under Cursor] from the context menu.
Move the cursor to the desired chart with the track ball, then left-click to open the [Select Chart]
panel.
2) Left-click the chart No. you want and then left-click the [OK].
The panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
ECDIS

If Preview is turned on, a low resolution chart of the temporarily chosen chart will be displayed.

Note:
When a chart is not displayed but a corresponding chart is displayed in the display area, the area
where a chart exists will be displayed in blue and the area where a chart does not exist will be
displayed in gray.

3-75 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.10.3 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only)
You can select a chart from all the charts loaded in the hard disk.

1) Left-clicking [Select Chart] button on the display panel.


The Select Chart panel opens.
2) Left-click the chart No. you want, and then left-click the [OK].
The panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.

If Preview is turned on, a low resolution chart of the temporarily chosen chart will be displayed.

You can open the Select Chart panel by left-clicking [Select Chart] on the
display panel.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-76


3.10.4 Changing Active Panels (ARCS Only)
A panel is displayed as a blue square for each chart. A selected chart will be displayed.

1) Right-click on the chart, then select [Change Active Panel] from the context menu.
An available chart will be displayed as a blue square.
2) Left-click on the blue rectangular so that the selected chart will be displayed.

ECDIS

Blue square

[Selected chart]

3-77 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.10.5 Loading a Low Resolution Chart
(ARCS Only)
You can select the low resolution chart.

1) Right-click on the chart, then select [Load Low Resolution] from the context menu.
Then, the low resolution chart is displayed on the screen.

3.10.6 To Select the High Resolution Chart


(ARCS Only)
1) Right-click the cursor on the chart and select the High Resolution Area from the context menu
by left-clicking it. Then, the orange square frame with the lens cursor appears. The area
surrounded by the orange frame shows are to be magnified.
2) Move the cursor (orange frame) to specify the area to be magnified and left-click the cursor.

Orange frame

[Magnified chart: High resolution chart]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-78


3.10.7 Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only)
You can display the note and diagram list defined by the current chart.

1) Right-click on the chart, then select [Note and Diagram] from the context menu.
The Note and Diagram panel opens.

ECDIS

2) When the desired items are selected, the notes and diagrams for the corresponding chart are
displayed. The panel can be closed with the [Close] , and the chart will return to the original
display position.

Note:
The note and diagram information is included in the ARCS chart. If the chart used does not
include such information, the notes and diagrams will not be displayed.

3-79 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.10.8 Displaying Temporary and Preliminary
Notice (ARCS Only)
You can display the temporary and preliminary notice list of the current chart.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(1) Temporary and Preliminary] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(1) Temporary and Preliminary] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(1) Temporary and Preliminary] in that order.
The Temporary and Preliminary panel opens.

Depending on the chart used, the items may not be displayed on the panel.

2) Select the item you want to display, and then left-click the [OK].
Then, the Information panel of the temporary and preliminary notice list for the current chart is
displayed as shown in the picture.

Temporary and Preliminary Notices can be displayed only when the chart has been
updated.

Note:
The temporary and preliminary notices are included in the ARCS chart. If the chart used does not
include such notices, they will not be displayed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-80


3.10.9 Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only)
(1) Entering offset
You can shift the chart position by entering offset values (latitude/longitude) or by using the cursor.

Note:
Do not adjust datum offset unless you need it. This adjustment will be required only when the ECDIS
geodetic system of the chart is the local one and its display position is misaligned.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(2) Adjust Datum Offset] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(2) Adjust Datum Offset] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(2) Adjust Datum Offset] in that order.
The Chart Shift panel opens.
2) Enter the offset value and left-click the [OK]
3) When the dialogue is opened, the current offset value specified by the user is displayed.
The offset value can be cleared with the [Clear]

If an offset value is already input or an offset value for WGS-84 is set in the chart data, then that
value will be displayed in the [Chart Shift] panel.
When an offset value for WGS-84 is set in the chart data, pressing the [Clear] will return the
display to that value.

3-81 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


Using the Cursor:
1) In the Chart Shift panel, left-click the [by Cursor].
The cursor type changes.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the first position. Then, move the cursor to draw the orange
line to determine the amount of offset, and left-click the cursor at the second position.
Then, the offset values thus obtained are displayed on the Chart Shift panel. (You can edit the
value.)
Note that the cursor position is always displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
3) Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.

Orange Line

Cursor

The chart will move the specified offset value. The chart offset value display section will be
displayed in blue, and Chart Shift will be displayed in Panel of the screen.
Also, the shift amount will be displayed in the display panel.

Shift amount

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-82


(2) Transforming the datum
You can convert the geodetic datum of a position or the own ships position to the WGS-84 system.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(3) Datum Transformation] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(3) Datum Transformation] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(4) ARCS] - [(3) Datum Transformation] in that order. ECDIS

The Datum Transformation panel opens.

2) Enter the reference position using one of the following methods:


Enter the position into the value entry boxes.
Left-click the [Ship Position] to enter the own ships position.
Left-click the [by Cursor] and left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the position
is entered.
3) Left-click the Geodetic Datum From drop-down list, then select the geodetic system of the
conversion source from the list.
The geodetic system will be converted, and the position after shifting and offset value will be
displayed.
4) After confirming the position after shifting and the offset displayed in the [Chart Shift] box,
left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
The chart will move by the offset value, and the offset display section of the chart will be
displayed in blue. Chart will be displayed in the message display area of the screen.

3-83 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


Note:

Chart position for the WGS-84 system

Chart position for the local


geodetic system

X, Y: Offset value for WGS-84

When X and Y are contained in the chart data, the geodetic system is converted automatically,
and the chart is displayed inclusive of these offset values. At this time, the chart position for the
primary geodetic system is displayed in blue on the display panel, and Chart Shift To WGS-84 is
displayed in the screen message area.
In such a case, the geodetic system conversion function will be deactivated even if offset values
are set in the Datum Transformation panel and the [OK] is left-clicked, and the message The
Datum is already WGS-84 will be displayed on the panel.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-84


3.11 Displaying Chart in Various Ways
(Multi View/Wide Range View)
This equipment has multi view and wide view functions. You can divide the chart screen into two
sections in which the same charts or different chart (not different geodetic system) can be displayed in
various ways. Also, with the wide view function, you can see the additional wide view screen in the
display panel area. ECDIS

Active screen

Own ship's symbol

View 1 screen
Multi view
screen example
View 2 screen View 1 screen

View 2
View 2 screen

Inactive screen Wide view screen

[Multi View and Wide View]

3-85 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.11.1 Multi View Screen
You can display two screens, View 1 and View 2 simultaneously. The selected screen has active title
bar as shown in the above figure. The other side screen is inactive.
To change a screen actively, it left-clicks the screen to want to choose. At this time, off-center will be
used to place the cursor in the center of the screen for that view. If off-center is not desired, move the
cursor to the title bar of the view, then left-click.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Multiview] in that order.
2) Left-click one of the submenus to select the multi view type.
Then, the selected multi view is displayed.
- Single View
When displaying Multi Window, the screen will return to the normal screen (single view).
- Top Bottom
Chart is displayed dividing top and bottom.
View1 is displayed in upper end title bar of chart and View2 is displayed in lower end title
bar.
- Right Left
Chart is displayed dividing right and left.
View1 is displayed in right end title bar of chart and View2 is displayed in left end title
bar.
- Right Top View
View2 is displayed in the upper right of View1.
View1 title bar is displayed in lower end of View1 and View2 title bar is displayed in
upper end of View2.
- Left Top View
View2 is displayed in the upper left of View1.
View1 title bar is displayed in lower end of View1 and View2 title bar is displayed in
upper end of View2.
- Right Bottom View
View2 is displayed in the lower right of View1.
View1 title bar is displayed in upper end of View1 and View2 title bar is displayed in
lower end of View2.
- Left Bottom View
View2 is displayed in the lower left of View1.
View1 title bar is displayed in upper end of View1 and View2 title bar is displayed in
lower end of View2.
- Select Area
A selected area will be displayed as view 2.
(Refer to 3.11.2 Selecting an Area for more information)
- Wide Range View
[Wide Range View] is displayed in the display panel.
(Refer to 3.11.3 Wide Range View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only) for more information)

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-86


(Single view) (Top Bottom view) (Right Left view) (Right Top view)

View 2
View 1

View 1 View 2 View 1


View 2

(Left Top view) (Right Bottom view) (Left Bottom view)


ECDIS

View 2 View 1
View 1
View 1

View 2 View 2

Scale, Range, Motion mode, Azimuth mode can be set to each of View1 and View2.
The following is displayed only in View1. It isn't displayed in View2.
Own ships track, Plan route
Event mark, Information mark, Tide mark, Highlighting, Reference Point, Clearing Line, Cross
Bearing, LOP, AIS, TT, Radar overlay, User map
It is canceled when changing View1/View2 during the following operation.
During EBL maneuver creating
During Make AZ
Multi-view display is canceled when doing the following operation.
Starts the Route Planning
Starts the User Map Editor
Select Single View
Manual Update is reflected in View1 and View2 both.
As for the display panel one of the following, the value of active View in View1/View2 is displayed.
Range
Scale
Motion mode
Azimuth mode

Note:
In View 2, the radar overlay, route, AIS/TT target ship symbols, own ships track, user chart objects
and manual updates are not displayed.

3.11.2 Selecting an Area


A selected area will be displayed as view 2.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Multiview] - [(8) Select Area] in that order.
The cursor becomes the lens cursor.
2) If previous view mode was single view, the area selected with the lens cursor will be displayed
in the upper right of View1. If previous view mode was multi view, selected area in view1 is
displayed in view2.

3-87 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.11.3 Wide Range View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can display the wide view screen on the display panel. The buttons that were the wide view screen
section move to the upper part of the screen.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Multiview] - [(9) Wide Range View] in that order.
The wide range view screen appears in the display panel area.
In the wide range view screen, the currently displayed area is surrounded by the blue line.
If the same chart is displayed in multi view, the view 1 chart area will be surrounded by a blue
line and the view 2 chart areas will be surrounded with a red line.

Wide view

Area currently displayed (Blue line)


To close the wide view screen:
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Multiview] - [(9) Wide Range View] in that order.
Then, the wide view screen disappears from the display panel and the buttons return to the original
place.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-88


3.12 Selecting Route and To WPT
When you start sailing, select the Route and To WPT as follows: Note that the route file extension shows
the route type. More specifically, the extension .rtn is used for Normal type and .rta is used for TOS
type.

3.12.1 Selecting Route and To WPT Using the


Display Panel ECDIS

(1) Selecting the route using the display panel


1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the Route list.
2) Left-click the route name you want in the drop-down list.
When you select the route name, it is read from hard disk and the route image is displayed on
the chart.
The initial route status is UNLOAD.

Deleting the route:


To delete the route being selected from the chart, left-click the drop-down list button to open the
Route list, and then left-click UNLOAD.
The selected route is deleted from the screen.

Note:
If the scheduled route is on floppy /CD/DVD disk, you can copy it to hard disk using the File
Manager. See 7.1 File Manager.

(2) Selecting waypoint using the display panel


As you sail, the waypoint number that the ship is currently heading to is displayed.
There are two ways, automatic and manual, for selecting the waypoint number.

Automatic selection (Auto Select):


The waypoint nearest the current position becomes the next waypoint. When your ship passes this
waypoint, the waypoint is automatically updated to the next waypoint.

1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the To WPT list.


2) Left-click the Auto Select.

3-89 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


Manual selection:
To select any waypoint, manually select the waypoint.

1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the To WPT list.


2) Left-click any waypoint number.
For example, when you start from the beginning of the
selected route, left-click 1 in the To WPT drop-down
list.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-90


3.12.2 Distance Measurement
You can calculate the distance between WPTs or between own ship and a WPT with the calculator
(Distance Measurement panel).

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(3) Distance Measurement] in the order.
Then, the Distance Measurement panel opens.
Distance Measurement panel isn't displayed when not loading a route. Load a route.
ECDIS
2) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [From] area, and select [Way Point], [Picked Point], or
[Own Ship]. If you have selected [Way Point] or [Own Ship], select the WPT number you want
from the [WPT No.] drop-down list. If you have selected [Picked Point], specify coordinates by
left-clicking an arbitrary point on the route.
3) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [To] area, and select [Way Point] or [Picked Point]. If
you have selected [Way Point], select the WPT number you want from the [WPT No.]
drop-down list. If you have selected [Picked Point], specify coordinates by left-clicking an
arbitrary point on the route.
4) The distance from the start point to the end point is automatically calculated, and the
calculation result is displayed in the [Distance] box. Left-click the [Close] button.

[Select Way point/Picked Point/Own Ship.]

[Select WPT No.] [Resultant]

3-91 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


Example use of [Distance Measurement] panel:

When selecting [Way Point]

Select [Way Point] and an arbitrary WPT No.

The calculation result is displayed.

The route between the selected WPTs is shown in green.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-92


When selecting [Picked Point]

Select [Picked Point], and left-click an arbitrary Own ship position


point on the route.

ECDIS

The calculation result is displayed.

The route from the arbitrary point to WPT No. 02 you have selected is shown in green.

When selecting [Own Ship]

Select [Own Ship]. Own ship position

Select WPT to go
through.

The calculation result is displayed.

The route from the own ship position to WPT No. 03 via selected WPT is shown in green.

3-93 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.12.3 Use XTD Alarm
XTD (Cross Track Distance) Alarm occurs when course off the plan route when XTD alarm is ON.
With the following menu, the effectively of the XTD alarm can be changed.

1) In normal menu
Select [(2) Route] - [(4) Use XTD Alarm] in that order.
The check in the menu switches over. When a check is displayed, the XTD alarm becomes ON.

The XTD alarm occurs when course off the plan route when XTD alarm is ON.
The XTD alarm doesnt occur when course off the plan route when XTD alarm is OFF.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-94


3.13 Displaying a User Map
You can display a user chart you have made.

Note:
Before use of this function, you need to make a user chart beforehand. See chapter 5 Chart
Editing.

ECDIS
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(1) select User Map] in that order.
The Open Chart File panel opens.

2) Left-click the user chart name you want and then left-click the [OK] button.
The Open Chart File panel closes and the selected user chart is displayed on the screen.

To clear the displayed user chart from the screen:


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(2) Unselect User Map] in that order.
Then, the user chart is cleared from the screen.

3-95 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.14 Reading Out Information on the
Object
Each of the objects on the chart has its own information (e.g. lighthouse, buoy, depth contour, land, river).
For example, if an object is a lighthouse, information such as lighting color and frequency can be readout.
If the object is depth contour, the water depth can be read out. The chart will be the original chart
(S-57/C-MAP/ARCS).

(1) Reading out the object on the S-57/C-MAP/ARCS chart using the menu
1) Right-click on the chart, then select [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] from the context menu.
Then, the cross cursor changes to the box cursor ( ).
2) Rotate the trackball, point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click the cursor.
Then, the Information panel opens according to the selected object.
To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.
[Example: When [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] is selected]

[S-57/C-MAP Chat Information]

[ARCS Chat Information]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-96


(2) Displaying additional chart information:

When an object has additional information, the name of the additional information will be displayed in the
combo box under the Information panel.

1) Select the information name to be displayed, then left-click the [Show].


2) The additional information will be displayed.
To close the additional information, left-click the [Close].
ECDIS

3-97 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


(3) Reading out the event/tidal stream/highlight mark/user data information and clearing
line
1) Right-click on the chart, then select [Other Information] from the context menu.
Then, the cross cursor changes to the box cursor ( ).
2) Rotate the trackball, point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click the cursor.
Then, the Location/Attributes panel opens according to the selected object.

The Location/Attributes panel used when inputting the mark, mentioned earlier is opened.
To delete the object, left-click the [Delete].
To close the panel, left-click the [Close].

[Example for the Event mark:]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-98


3.15 Displaying the AIO
You can display an AIO (Admiralty Information Overlay) that is additional information published by United
Kingdom Hydrographic Office (UKHO). (But in some software version, the AIO function is not
available.)
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(4) View AIO] in that order.

ECDIS

AIO is displayed when checkmark is ON. AIO is displayed by a red pattern as below.
(Change the object category to the [Other] on the display panel Refer to3.6 Changing the
Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only))

Un-tick the [View AIO] menu not to display the AIO.

3-99 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


2) Right-click on the chart to confirm the detail of AIO, then select [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
Information] from the context menu.

Then, the cross cursor changes to the box cursor ( ).

3) Rotate the trackball, point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click the cursor.
Then, the Information panel opens according to the selected object.

To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.

4) When an object has additional information, the name of the additional information will be
displayed in the combo box under the Information panel.

5) Select the information name to be displayed, then left-click the [Show]. The additional
information will be displayed.

To close the additional information, left-click the [Close].

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-100


3.16 Operating EBL/VRM
There are two ways to draw the EBL (Electronic Bearing Line)/VRM (Variable Range Maker) on the
chart.
Using the [EBL1/2] and [VRM1/2] keys and EBL/VRM dials on the operation panel
Using the context menu ([Dropped EBL/VRM][CCRP EBL/VRM],1 step or 2 step operation selectable)
Using the [EBL1/2] and [VRM1/2] buttons on the display panel

3.16.1 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Operation Panel


ECDIS

On the operation panel, two sets of EBL/VRMs can be used for measuring bearing and distance. You
can also set your ships position or any position as the center (base point) of the EBL/VRM.

(1) Displaying and clearing the EBL1/VRM1 marker


If you press the [EBL1] or [VRM1] key, the EBL1 or VRM1 marker with your ship as the base point,
and the EBL1/VRM1 information panel are displayed. These markers are displayed as a dashed
line. Each of these markers are controlled by turning the EBL or VRM dial.

Direction and distance from


Push EBL1 to
Center point to crossing point Push VRM1 to
display EBL1 line
display VRM1 line
EBL1
VRM1

EBL
VRM
Turn EBL dial to
Turn VRM dial to
control EBL1
control VRM1

Crossing point Own ship

[EBL1/VRM1 line display on the chart]

Azimuth of EBL1 Distance of VRM1

Displaying position of cross point


on EBL1 and VRM1
[Display panel (EBL1/VRM1 displayed)]

To clear the EBL1 marker or VRM1 marker:


Press the [EBL1] or [VRM1] key again.

3-101 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


(2) Displaying and clearing the EBL2/VRM2 marker
If you press the [EBL2] or [VRM2] key, the EBL2 or VRM2 marker with your ship as the base point,
and the EBL2/VRM2 information panel are displayed. These markers are displayed as a dash
dotted line to distinguish them from EBL1/VRM1. Each of these markers is controlled by turning
the EBL or VRM dial.

To clear the EBL2 marker or VRM2 marker:


Press the [EBL2] or [VRM2] key again.

(3) Switching EBL1/VRM1 marker and EBL2/VRM2 marker operations


The following describes how to switch operation when the EBL1 and EBL2, or VRM1 and VRM2
markers are simultaneously displayed. For example, lets assume that EBL1 and EBL2 are
displayed on the screen, and that EBL2 can be operated by the EBL dial. In this case, press the
[EBL1] key so that the EBL1 can be operated by the EBL dial. (See the next page)

These can be moved independently, such as EBL1 and VRM2 or EBL2 and VRM1.
The intersecting point positions in these cases will be displayed by combinations of the previously
displayed EBL1/VRM1 and EBL2/VRM2. When EBL and VRM are displayed independently, only
their bearing and distance will be displayed.

EBL VRM
Turn EBL dial to
Turn VRM dial to
control EBL1
control VRM2

[Display panel and chart (Operating EBL1 and VRM2)]

Note:
For VRM1 and VRM2, use [VRM1] and [VRM2] key in the same way as for EBL1 and EBL2.
They will be displayed as floating EBL/VRM while operating turning the EBL or VRM dial.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-102


[Switching of EBL1 Marker and EBL2 Marker -- Ship-centered EBL/VRM]

ECDIS

No displaying EBL
EBL1
EBL2
EBL2
EBL1

EBL EBL

Displaying EBL1 Displaying EBL2

EBL2 EBL2 EBL1 EBL1

EBL EBL

EBL2

EBL1

Displaying EBL1 and EBL2 Displaying EBL1 and EBL2


(EBL dial operate to EBL2) (EBL dial operate to EBL1)
3-103 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS
(4) Changing the EBL/VRM marker base point
The following example describes how to change the base point for EBL1 from your ships position
to another position.
VRM1, EBL2 and VRM2 are operated in the same way as EBL1.
1) With the EBL1 push EBL dial Then, the EBL/VRM base point displayed in the own ship
position.
2) Move the cursor with EBL/VRM to the new base point position by rotating the trackball.
3) Left-click at the position you want. The base point is fixed at that position

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-104


The following operation should be carried out to set the base point of floating EBL/VRM at the
ships center:
1) Make sure that the base point of the displayed EBL1 is not fixed and floating.
The base point moves on the ship..

ECDIS

[Resetting the Base Point at the Ship's Position]

3-105 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.16.2 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Context Menu
You can draw CCRP (the base position is ship-centered) EBL/VRM or Dropped (the base position is
floating) EBL/VRM with context menu.

[Context Menu Dropped EBL/VRM] [Context Menu CCRP EBL/VRM]

3.16.2.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step Option


When both EBL and VRM drawing, you can draw either 1-step method or 2-step (step-by-step) method.
In the 1-step method, EBL and VRM appear at the same time. In the 2-step method, EBL appears and,
after fixing EBL, VRM appears.

1) In the normal menu


Select [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(4) Marker Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(4) Marker Setting] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [(5) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(4) Marker Setting] in that order.
The Marker Setting panel opens.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-106


2) Left-click either 1 Step or 2 Step and then press the [OK] button to close the panel.
1 Step: Quicker operation (Both EBL and VRM appear on the chart.)
2 Step: Step-by-step operation (First EBL and then VRM)

ECDIS

Tips: Useful context Abort


During EBL/VRM operation, for example, you can cancel the current operation step by the following
procedure.

Right-click at any position on the


Left-click Abort to abort
chart to open the context menu. Rotate the trackball to move
the current operation step.
Abort context menu will open. the cursor on the Abort.

3-107 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.16.2.2 Dropped EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 (EBL2/VRM2)
The following description is an operation to draw EBL1/VRM1. Drawing EBL2/VRM2 becomes a
similar operation.

(1) 1-Step Operation


1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want. Then, the base point is fixed.
At the same time, VRM1 is displayed with EBl1, and the cross point on EBL1 and VRM1 is
displayed on the cursor.
3) Move the cursor and left-click at the position of cross point you want. Then, the cross point is fixed
along with EBL1 bearing and VRM1 distance.

Select
[Dropped EBL/VRM] Left-Click
- [EBL1/VRM1]

Left-Click

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-108


(2) 2-Step Operation
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want. Then, the base point is fixed.
At the same time, EBL1 bearing is changed with the cursor.
3) Move the cursor and left-click at the bearing you want. Then, EBL1 bearing is fixed.
At the same time, VRM1 is displayed and VRM1 distance is changed with the cursor.
4) Move the cursor and left-click at the distance you want. Then, VRM1 distance is fixed.
ECDIS

Select
[Dropped EBL/VRM] Left-Click
- [EBL1/VRM1]

Left-Click

Left-Click

3.16.2.3 Dropped EBL/VRM EBL1 (EBL2)


The following description is an operation to draw EBL1. Drawing EBL2 becomes a similar operation.

1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want. Then, the base point is fixed.
At the same time, EBL1 bearing is changed with the cursor.
3) Move the cursor and left-click at the bearing you want. Then, EBL1 bearing is fixed.

3.16.2.4 Dropped EBL/VRM VRM1 (VRM2)


The following description is an operation to draw VRM1. Drawing VRM2 becomes a similar operation.

1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [VRM1] from context menu.
Then, VRM1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want. Then, the base point is fixed.
At the same time, VRM1 distance is changed with the cursor.
3) Move the cursor and left-click at the distance you want. Then, VRM1 distance is fixed.

3-109 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.16.2.5 Dropped EBL/VRM Move Origin1 (Move Origin2)
The following description is an operation to move Origin1 (the base point of EBL1/VRM1).
Moving Origin2 (the base point of EBL2/VRM2) becomes a similar operation.

1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [Move Origin1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 and VRM1 are displayed and its base point is displayed on the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want. Then, the base point is fixed.

3.16.2.6 CCRP EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 (EBL2/VRM2)


The following description is an operation to draw EBL1/VRM1. Drawing EBL2/VRM2 becomes a
similar operation.

(1) 1-Step Operation


1) Right-Click on the chart and select [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 and VRM1 are displayed and there base point is displayed on the ship.
At the same time, the cross point on EBL1 and VRM1 is displayed on the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position of cross point you want. Then, the cross point is fixed
along with EBL1 bearing and VRM1 distance.

Select
[CCRP EBL/VRM] -
Left-Click
[EBL1/VRM1]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-110


(2) 2-Step Operation
1) Right-Click on the chart and select [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the ship.
At the same time, EBL1 bearing is changed with the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the bearing you want. Then, EBL1 bearing is fixed.
At the same time, VRM1 is displayed and VRM1 distance is changed with the cursor.
3) Move the cursor and left-click at the distance you want. Then, VRM1 distance is fixed.

Select ECDIS

[CCRP EBL/VRM] -
[EBL1/VRM1]

Left-Click
Left-Click

3.16.2.7 CCRP EBL/VRM EBL1 (EBL2)


The following description is an operation to draw EBL1. Drawing EBL2 becomes a similar operation.

1) Right-Click on the chart and select [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1] from context menu.
Then, EBL1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the ship.
At the same time, EBL1 bearing is changed with the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the bearing you want. Then, EBL1 bearing is fixed.

3.16.2.8 CCRP EBL/VRM VRM1 (VRM2)


The following description is an operation to draw VRM1. Drawing VRM2 becomes a similar operation.

1) Right-Click on the chart and select [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [VRM1] from context menu.
Then, VRM1 is displayed and its base point is displayed on the ship.
At the same time, VRM1 distance is changed with the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the distance you want. Then, VRM1 distance is fixed.

3-111 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.16.3 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Display panel
On the display panel, you can operate and display value of EBL and VRM from Tools panel.

Azimuth of EBL button Units of distance button


T: True North mode When left-click, units of VRM distance is changed.
R: Bearing Reference mode [NM] -> [km] -> [sm] -> [NM] ->

switching"Tools""Brilliance"

Displaying position of cross point


on EBL1 and VRM1

Displaying position of cross point


on EBL2 and VRM2

Base point button


[Blank]: CCRP
D: Dropped point

Active/Inactive of EBL1/EBL2 button


Active: Displaying EBL line on chart display area
and displaying EBL azimuth
Inactive: Displaying OFF

Active/Inactive of VRM1/VRM2 button


Active: Displaying VRM line on chart display area
and displaying VRM distance
Inactive: Displaying OFF

EBL1/EBL2 edit button


Active: Displaying EBL line and having the right to operate by EBL dial.
Inactive: Displaying OFF

VRM1/VRM2 edit button


Active: Displaying VRM line and having the right to operate by VRM dial.
Inactive: Displaying OFF

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-112


3.16.3.1 Drawing and deletion EBL by the Display panel
The following description is an operation of EBL1. EBL2 becomes a similar operation.

(1) Drawing EBL1 and setting the bearing


1) When EBL1 edit button is inactive, left-click to this button.
Then, EBL1 edit button is changed active and EBL1 is displayed.
At the same time, EBL1 bearing is changed with the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the bearing you want. Then, EBL1 bearing is fixed.
ECDIS

(2) Deletion EBL1


1) When EBL1 edit button is active, left-click to this button.
Then, EBL1 edit button is changed inactive and EBL1 disappears.

Lift-click to the EBL1 edit button

3.16.3.2 Drawing and deletion VRM by the Display panel


The following description is an operation of VRM1. VRM2 becomes a similar operation.

(1) Drawing VRM1 and setting the distance


1) When VRM1 edit button is inactive, left-click to this button.
Then, VRM1 edit button is changed active and VRM1 is displayed.
At the same time, VRM1 distance is changed with the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the distance you want. Then, VRM1 distance is fixed.

(2) Deletion VRM1


1) When VRM1 edit button is active, left-click to this button.
Then, VRM1 edit button is changed inactive and VRM1 disappears

Lift-click to the VRM1 edit button

3-113 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.16.3.3 Changing the base point of EBL/VRM
The following description is an operation to change the base of EBL1/VRM1.
EBL2/VRM2 becomes a similar operation.

(1) Changing Dropped (the base position is floating).


1) When Base point button is displayed blank, left-click to this button.
Then, Base point button is changed to display D and EBL1 is displayed.
At the same time, the base point of EBL1 is displayed on the cursor.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want. Then, the base point is fixed.

(2) Changing CCRP (the base position is ship-centered).


1) When Base point button is displayed D, left-click to this button.
Then, Base point button is changed to display blank and EBL1 is displayed.
At the same time, the base point of EBL1 is displayed on the ship.

Lift-click to the Base point button

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-114


3.16.4 Marker Setting
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(4) Marker Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(4) Marker Setting] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
ECDIS
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(4) Marker Setting] in that order.
The Marker Setting panel opens.

1) Display Unit Simultaneity:


[VRM1 distance unit], [VRM2 distance unit] button of cursor synchronize when making [Display Unit
Simultaneity] valid.

Distance unit synchronize .

2)EBL/VRM Step :
See 3.15.1.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step

3) Cursor Read Out:


Latitude/Longitude: When [Latitude/Longitude] is selected, latitude and longitude is displayed in the
cursor information pop up.

Bearing/Range: When [Bearing/Range] is selected, bearing and range is displayed in the cursor
information pop up.

3-115 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.17 Running Fix
the running fix function, own ship and the position to be fixed are connected with the EBL and VRM.
This connection is kept regardless of the ships movement. So, you can see the EBL and VRM of own
ship against the fixed position at all times.

1) Or right-click on the chart, then select [Running Fix] from the context menu.
The EBL and VRM are displayed on the chart.

Fixed position

Your ship

Bearing

Position

Distance

2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor and left-click at the position to be fixed.
The bearing and distance are displayed at the fixed place on the chart. As the ship moves,
the bearing and distance displayed change accordingly.

[Relation between your ships position and fixed position when the ship moves]

Fixed position

Your ship

The bearing and distance are displayed here.

To delete the running fix:


Or right-click on the chart, then select [Remove Running Fix] from the context menu.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-116


3.18 Monitoring Dragging Anchor
A circle can be drawn to monitor a dragging anchor at the user-specified position. When the own ship
moves and part of outline of the own ship goes out of this circle, a Dragging anchor alarm occurs.
A dragging anchor monitoring circle can be created with the own ship as the center or with the position at
which you left-click on the chart as the center.

Occurrence of Dragging anchor alarm


ECDIS

The dragging anchor monitoring circle

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(2) Anchor Watch] - [(1) Create Monitoring Circle] in
that order.
The Monitoring Dragging Anchor panel opens.
By default, the heading forward position is displayed as the center of the circle. Left-clicking
on the chart can also set the position as the center of the dragging anchor monitoring circle.
2) Enter the radius of the dragging anchor monitoring circle (10 to 999 m).
3) Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
The dragging anchor monitoring circle is displayed.
To re-set a dragging anchor monitoring circle, cancel the monitoring circle beforehand.

How to close the dragging anchor monitoring circle:


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(2) Anchor Watch] - [(2) Clear Monitoring Circle] in
that order.
The dragging anchor monitoring circle is cleared.

3-117 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


Dragging anchor alarm:
When the Alarm list panel opens if a dragging anchor alarm occurs, the [Dragging anchor] Icon
blinks in red.

Red Icon: Dragging Anchor

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-118


3.19 User-Marking/Highlighting
can input the following marks on the chart.
Event Mark : During voyage, you can put an Event Mark at the ship position.
Information Mark: You can put an Information Mark at any position.
Tidal Stream Mark: You can put an Tidal Mark at any position. The speed (knot) and time can be input.
Highlight: You can put a highlight area at any position for your reference.

ECDIS

Highlighing

Own ship

Tidal Stream Mark

Event Mark

Information Mark

3.19.1 Marking the Event Mark


(1) Event Marking using the display panel
During voyage, you can put an Event Mark ( ) at the point where your ship is located.
1) On the display panel
Left-click the [Event ].Location/Attributes - Event Mark panel opens.

- To check the Information on the Event Mark ,see 3.14 Reading Out Information on the
Objects.

(2) Event Marking using the menu


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(1) Event Mark] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(1) Event Mark] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(1) Event Mark] in that order.
The Location/Attributes - Event Mark panel opens.

3-119 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


2) In the Location/Attributes - Event Mark panel, perform the following editing operation.
Enter time if you want to correct the displayed time.
Enter comment on the event.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the Event Mark.
To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK] .
You will see that the Event Mark ( ) is put on the chart.

Position of the Event Mark

Event Mark

[Apply] : It is possible to do setting in the valid without closing a panel.

(3) How to delete the Event Mark


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(5) Delete Event Mark] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(5) Delete Event Mark] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(5) Delete Event Mark] in that order.
The Delete Event Mark panel opens.
2) Left-click the [No.] you want and then left-click the [Delete].
The panel closes and the selected Event Mark is deleted from the chart
3) Left-click [Close] , Delete Event Mark panel is close.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-120


3.19.2 Marking the Information Mark
You can put an Information Mark ( ) at any point on the chart.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
ECDIS
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark] in that order.
The Location/Attributes - Information panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the point you want and left-click at that position.
The left-clicked position is displayed in the position box of the panel.
3) In the Location/Attributes - Information panel, perform the following editing operation.
Enter the comment on the Information Mark.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the Information
Mark.
To edit the Information Mark position, left-click each column of LAT/LON.
The latitude and longitude entry panel opens.
Enter the value and left-click the [OK] .
To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK] .
You will see that the Information Mark ( ) is put on the screen.

Position of the Information

Information Mark

[Apply]: It is possible to do setting in the valid without closing a panel.

For viewing the Information on the Information Mark or editing/deleting the Information Mark,
see 3.14Reading Out Information on the Objects.

3-121 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.19.3 Marking the Tidal Stream Mark
You can put a Tidal Stream Mark at any point on the chart. The Tidal Stream Mark has the bearing and
Stream speed in knot. You can edit them after putting the Tidal Stream Mark on the chart.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(3) Tidal Stream Mark] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(3) Tidal Stream Mark] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(3) Tidal Stream Mark] in that order.
The Location/Attributes - Tidal Stream panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the point you want and left-click at that position.
The left-clicked position is displayed in the position box of the panel.
3) In the Location/Attributes - Tidal Stream panel, perform the following editing operation.
Set/Drift/Time setting
- Left-click either Actual or Predicted.
- Enter the bearing and speed.
- Enter time if you want to correct the displayed time
Enter comment on the Tidal Stream Mark.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the Tidal Stream
Mark.
To edit the Tidal Mark position, left-click each column of LAT/LON.
The latitude and longitude entry panel opens.
Enter the value and left-click the [OK].
To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK].
You will see that the Tidal Stream Mark is put on the screen.

Position of the Tidal Stream Mark

Time
Knot

Tidal Stream Mark

[Apply]: It is possible to do setting in the valid without closing a panel.

For viewing the Information on the Tidal Stream Mark or editing/deleting the Tidal Stream
Mark, see 3.14 Reading Out Information on the Objects.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-122


3.19.4 Highlight
You can use a polygon to highlight any parts of a chart. This function can be used when you wish to
make notations.
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(4) Highlight] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(4) Highlight] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
ECDIS
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(4) Highlight] in that order.
The Location/Attributes - Highlight panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
2) Use the trackball to move the cursor to the part to be highlighted. Then, click on the
coordinates of a point which will be the starting point of the area to be highlighted.
3) In the Location/Attributes - Highlight panel, perform the following editing operation.
Enter comment on the Highlight.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the Highlight.
To edit the Highlight position, left-click each column of LAT/LON.
The latitude and longitude entry panel opens. Enter the value and left-click the [OK].
To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK].
You will see that the Highlight is put on the screen.
Diagram is canceled when doing the left double-click when creating two points.
Diagram is canceled when clicking the [OK] when creating two points.
Diagram is canceled when clicking [Abort] from the context menu of the right-click when
creating two points.
Diagram is fixed when doing the left double-click when creating more than three points and
the Location/Attributes - Highlight panel closes.
Diagram is fixed when clicking the [OK] when creating more than three points and the panel
closes.
Diagram is fixed when clicking [Abort] from the context menu of the right-click when creating
more than three points and the panel closes. Equal to or less than two point are canceled.

When doing the following operation without ever clicking [Apply], diagram is canceled and
transitions to each mode.
Chooses [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [Other Information] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [Auto Mode] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [Zoom Area] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1 (or EBL2/VRM2)] from the context menu of
right-click.
Chooses [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [EBL1(or EBL2)] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [Dropped EBL/VRM] - [VRM1 (or VRM2)] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1 (or EBL2/VRM2)] from the context menu of
right-click.
Chooses [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [EBL1 (or EBL2)] from the context menu of right-click.
Chooses [CCRP EBL/VRM] - [VRM1(or VRM2)] from the context menu of right-click.
Diagram is fixed when clicking [Apply] once and doing the following operation and transitions
to each mode.

3-123 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


Top of a highlighted area

Highlight

[Apply]: It is possible to do setting in the valid without closing a panel.

For viewing the information on the Highlight or editing/deleting the Highlight, see 3.14
Reading Out Information on the Object.

Note:
When entering data that requires detailed editing, use the user chart (See chapter 5 Chart
Editing).

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-124


3.20 EBL Maneuver
Maneuver curve display function displays the predictable track when you turn the steering in a certain
conditions. By displaying a maneuver curve that has been drawn safely, the maneuver curve can be
used as a target when turning.

Supplemental line
Heading line
Planned route
ECDIS

R
REACH Maneuver curve

WOL (Wheel Over Line)

WOL line
Own ship's position

WOL: Wheel Over Line


Reach: Distance between when the wheel is steered and when the ship begins to turn
R: Turning radius

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(1) EBL Maneuver ] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(1) EBL Maneuver] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(1) EBL Maneuver] in that order.
The EBL Maneuver Setting panel opens and cross cursor changes to the arrow(EBL) cursor.

3-125 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


2) Set or select each item.
Reach Enter the Reach (m).
Setting range is 0-2000.
Turn Mode Left-click either Radius or Rate.
Radius: Enter the constant turn radius (NM)
Rate: Enter the constant turn speed (deg/min.)

3) Turn the trackball to determine the start point of the supplemental line.
The position of WOL (Wheel Over Line) will change depending upon the Wheel Over Line of
the supplemental line.

4) Set the bearing of the supplemental line with [EBL] dial on the operation panel.
Moving the [EBL] dial to the left and right will change the bearing of the supplemental line.
The bearing of the supplemental line will be the bearing in which own ship will finally move. The
position of WOL will change depending upon the bearing of the supplemental line.

5) Left-click on the chart.


The setting will be established.

Note:
Be sure to input the value correctly. If the heading of the maneuver curve is the same as
that of your own ship, the maneuver curve will not be created.

To delete EBL maneuver curve from the chart:


In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(1) Remove EBL Maneuver] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(1) EBL Maneuver] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(1) EBL Maneuver] in that order.
The EBL Maneuver Setting panel closed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-126


3.21 Cross Bearing
This function displays cross bearings. An angle for calculating the own ships position from the
reference point can be obtained. If a position fixing sensor such as a GPS navigation system has
encountered an error causing the own ships position to be obscure, the own ships position can be
obtained by drawing a visually observed fixed targets bearing on the chart using the cross bearing
function.

ECDIS

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(2) Cross Bearing] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(2) Cross Bearing] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(2) Cross Bearing] in that order.
The Cross Bearingdialog box opens and the mouse cursor changes.

Reference coordinates of the cross bearing


line

Reciprocal bearing from the reference point

Bearing from the reference point

Length of the cross bearing line

Selection of bearing display on the chart


(True/Reverse)

2) Sets the reference point


By the trackball operation
Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the reference coordinates of the cross bearing line,
and left-click. Alternatively, enter the reference position values in the Latitude and
Longitude fields in the [Cross Bearing] dialog box.
By the [Cross Bearing] panel operation
It inputs value to the [LAT] and [LON] numerical box.

3-127 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3) Determine the angle of the cross bearing line by turning the [EBL] dial or entering the reciprocal
bearing viewed from the reference point.
Bearing from the reference point is displayed in the 180 degree reciprocal bearing with typing in
value.

4) Determine the distance of the cross bearing line by turning the [VRM] dial or entering the
distance.
Setting range is 0.0NM - 99.9NM.

5) The drawing of the cross bearing line is determine by left-clicking the [Set], and the bearing is
displayed beside the cross bearing line.

6) The cross bearing display is switched by left-clicking the [True] radio button or the [Reverse]
radio button.

[True] display

[Reverse] display

7) To display more than one bearing line, repeat steps 1) to 4). Up to ten bearing lines can be
displayed at the same time.

8) To clear all the displayed cross bearings, left-clicking [Clear].

9) To close theCross Bearing panel, left-click the [Close].

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-128


3.22 Inputting Clearing Lines
Clearing lines can be displayed by using EBL/VRM.

1) When EBL/VRM is operating (see3.16 Operating EBL/VRM), the start point and end point of
clearing lines should be determined from the base point and cross point of EBL/VRM, and then
the right button on the track ball should be clicked.
2) In the normal menu
ECDIS
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(3)Create Clearing Line] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(3)Create Clearing Line] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] -[(3)Create Clearing Line] in that order..
menu to display Not Less Than and Not More Than, and left-click on either of them.

3) Clearing lines from the center of ERL/VRM to their intersecting points will be drawn.

NLT: Not Less Than


NLT116 means Not less than 116 (degree).
NMT: Not More Than
NMT152 means Not more than 152(degree).

For viewing the information on clearing lines or editing/deleting clearing lines, see 3.14
Reading Out Information on the Objects.

3-129 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.23 LOP(Line Of Position)
This function displays LOP. This function can correct the position of the ship by using the distance or
the angle from the reference point.

1) Display "Create LOP" panel


In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(4) LOP] - [(1) Create LOP] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(4) LOP] - [(1) Create LOP] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(4) LOP] - [(1) Create LOP] in that order.

"Create LOP" panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the cursor.

Latitude, Longitude:
The starting position of LOP is specified. Default is
own ship position of point that displays the dialog.
The specification of the value is a left-click on the chart
screen. Or, value is input left-clicking a column of
Latitude/Longitude.

Type:
Type of LOP is selected and the value is input.
Bearing Azimuth and distance are specified turns
the [EBL] dial and changes the value.
Range Distance is specified turns the VRM dial
and changes the value..
value is input left-clicking a column of Bearing/Range.

Time:
Time is specified. Default is time. Value is input
left-clicking a column of Time.

Set LOP:
LOP is fixed by set value. This button is invalid when LOP is over 3 lines.

Select Cross Point:


When two LOP (or TLP) or more is set, cross point position is displayed. Select
Cross Point panel is displayed when you left-click this button.

Create TPL (Transferred Line Of Position):


LOP being displayed now is made, and it moves parallel and TPL is made the ship
movement. see 3-120122 Example of ship position correction that uses TPL.

Close:
Close"Create LOP" panel.Made LOP doesn't disappear.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-130


2) Delete LOP
Select [(7)Main]-[(4)LOP]-[(2)Delete All LOP]. Then All LOP line is deleted.

3) Select Cross Point


When two LOP (or TPL) or more is set, cross point position is displayed. Select Cross Point
panel is displayed when you left-click this button. When LOP ( or TPL) is set 3 lines and more,
information message is displayed and cross point is displayed by select 2 lines.

Latitude, Longuitude:
ECDIS
Display the position cross point.
When there are two points or more, left-click
the position list and select crossed LOP point.

Reference Point
Adjust own ships position to selected cross
point.

Close
Close Select Cross Point panel.

3-131 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


1. Select Cross Point by 2lines LOP
Displayed Select Cross Point panel and marked
Cross Point chosen LOP becomes a red line

Adjusted own ship's position

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-132


2. Select Cross Point by 3lines LOP
Displayed information message

Click [OK] button

ECDIS

Displayed Select Cross Point panel


and no marked Cross Point Marked Cross Point chosen LOP red line.

Select 2 lines

Adjusted own ship's position

3-133 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


4) Create TPL (Transferred Position Line)
After the own ship adjusts by Cross Point, TPL can be displayed according to the progress of
the ship.

Example of ship position correction that uses TPL:

1. Display "Create LOP" panel. The direction from the ship to the target is measured, and LOP is set.
Moreover, the distance to the ship and the target is measured, and LOP is set.

Two LOP is set.

2. Select "Select Cross Point" button to display the cross point.

Displaying the cross point.

3. Select "Reference Point" button to adjust the position of the ship. (Temporary Position)

Adjusting the position of the ship.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-134


4. The ship is at some time.

ECDIS

5. Display "Create LOP" panel. The direction from the ship to the target is measured again, and the third
LOP is set.

Third LOP is set.

6. Select [Create TPL] . Then, TPL is displayed according to the progress of the ship.

Displaying TPL

3-135 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


7. Select "Select Cross Point" . And, set the cross point of TPL and the third LOP.

Information message displayed when there are three LOP or more.


Select [OK] .

Select the third LOP and TPL.

Displaying cross point.

8. [Reference Point] button is selected, and the position of the ship is adjusted.

Adjusting the position of the ship.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-136


Note:
When the own ship is adjusted by LOP, the operation is recorded in Logbook. When
"Event-Reference Point" is selected from the list and [View REF Point] button is pushed, the
[Information] panel is displayed. The [Information] panel displays [Information] of associated LOP.

Select [MENU] [(7)Main] [(7)Logbook] in that order.

ECDIS

Select Event-Reference Point and left-click [View REF Point]

3-137 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.24 Acquisition Zone
Acquisition Zone is used to automatically monitor AIS target in vicinity of own ship.
When AIS target enters Acquisition Zone, status of AIS is automatically changed to Activate state.

1)In the MENU


Select [MENU] [(7)Main] [(1)Make AZ] in that order
When [AZ Function] of Make AZ panel is valid., Acquisition Zone 1(or 2) is displayed on the chart
screen. When [AZ Function] of Make AZ panel is invalid, Acquisition Zone 1(or 2) is disappeared.
It changes to edit mode when left-click onto the Acquisition Zone line.

Acquisition Zone 1
Setting of Acquisition Zone 1 is changed

AZ Function
Display of Acquisition Zone 1 is switched
ON Acquisition Zone 1 is displayed
OFFAcquisition Zone 1 is disappeared

Make AZ 1
Setting of Acquisition Zone 1 is changed
AZ Function is valid after fixing the input.
[Start Side], [End Side], [Far Edge, Width]

Display setting of Acquisition


(Refer to figure below)
Setting is changed by [Make AZ] 1 is
clicked

Acquisition Zone 2 setting area


Setting of Acquisition Zone 2 is changed
Item is the same as Acquisition Zone 1.
Acquisition Zone 1 Setting area
Acquisition Zone 2 Setting area Close Make AZ panel is closed

Start Side
End Side

Far Edge

Width

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-138


2) Change setting method of Acquisition Zone
The procedure for changing the setting is shown about the range of the area of Acquisition
Zone.

Change setting method of Acquisition Zone 1 Setting area *the procedure is same as for Acquisition
Zone 2 Setting area.
1. Select [Make AZ 1] button. Then [Make AZ 1] button is changed color.

ECDIS

2. [EBL] dial of the operation panel is turned and the angle of "Start Side" is changed. Similarly, [VRM]
dial of the operation panel is turned, and the distance of "Far Edge" is changed.

Start Side
Change by [EBL] Dial of the
operation panel.
Setting range is 000.0 -
359.9.

Far Edge
Change by [VRM] Dial of the
operation panel.
Width is not change.
Setting range is 0.50NM
31.50NM.

3. [EBL] dial of the operation panel is pushed short.

4. [EBL] dial of the operation panel is turned and the angle of "End Side" is changed. Similarly, [VRM]
dial of the operation panel is turned, and the distance of "Width" is changed.

End Side
Change by [EBL] Dial of the operation
panel.
Setting range is 000.0- 359.9.

Width
Change by [VRM] Dial of the operation
panel.
Value of Far Edge changes according
to changing Width.
Setting range is 0.50NM - 31.50NM.

5. [EBL] dial of the operation panel is pushed short.


The display of "Make AZ 1" returns to the origin, and "AZ Function of Acquisition Zone 1" is valid.

3-139 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.25 Multi Window
3.25.1 Using the Analog Meter
During voyage, you can display the analog meter panelon the display panel. You can see the HDG,
COG, set/Drift, CTS on the analog meter panel. Also, you can select the Display Panel Setting
panel to be displayed on the analog meter panel.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] - [(2) Analog Meter panel] in that order.
The following analog meter panel is displayed.
On the analog meter panel, items with the arrow mark (e.g. COG) are represented by the
indicators of the analog meter panel. The color of the item and that of the indicator match
each other. So, you can easily identify each indicator from the color.

The white arrow corresponds to the white


triangle.
(Color matches each other in it supports items) Ships heading.

Log speed (speed through water)

Course and speed (The vector of the vessels motion over


the ground and the course of the route selected)

Course to Steer
Note: It is displayed during Automatic Sailing only.

Current direction calculated by the difference between the


COG and HDG vector.

Current speed calculated by the difference between the COG


and HDG vector.

Set /Drift(Blue arrow)

HDIG (Gray arrow)

COG (Gray arrow)

CTS (Red arrow)

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-140


To the close the analong mater panel:

In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8)Multi Window]-[(2)Analog meter] in that order.

Then, the Display Panel Setting panel is closed.

Changing the items to be displayed on the analog meter panel:


1) In the normal menu ECDIS

Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(7) Display Panel Setting] in that order.
Then, the Display Panel Setting panel opens.
2) Left-click to turn ON/OFF the items you want to display and left-click the [OK] button. It reflects
setting and it closes a panel.
It cancels setting and it closes a panel when clicking [Cancel] button.

CTS label, CTS value are displayed in the display panel when making valid.

Depth label, Depth sensor name, Depth value are displayed in the display
panel when making valid.

HDG is displayed at the Analog meter panel when making valid.

COG is displayed at the Ana log meter panel when making valid.

Set / Drift is displayed at the Analog meter panel when making valid.

CTS is displayed at the Analog meter panel when making valid.

Triangle is displayed in the left side of each of HDG, COG, Set, CTS of the
display panel.

3.25.2 Other Multi Window display


The window of the following contents can be displayed at the thing except the analog meter.
Because the contents which can be displayed by the establishment environment are different, for the
details, refer to the instruction manual of each of the facilities.

1) To open multi window


In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] and select to want to display more than the
menu, the supporting menu has a check mark and the panel is displayed.

3-141 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


The menu where a window is displayed:
(2)Analog Meter (See3.25.1 )
(3)Climate
(4)Draft
(5)Current Wind
(6)Gyro Rudder Graph
(7)Course Bar
(8)Ship
(9)Engine Graph
(1)Depth Graph
(2)Current

2) To close multi window


In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] and select to want to close more than the
menu, the supporting menu disappears a check mark and a panel is close.

3) Preset the multi window display condition


The condition of the multi window can be saved and preseted. (either valid or invalid, and the
position to display, and so on )

Save the multi window condition:


In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] [(7) PreSet Save] in that order.
It maintains the display condition and the display position of the present multi window. When
doing the same operation once again from the menu, the display condition and the display
position maintain new one.

Preset the multi window condition:


In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] [(1) PreSet] in that order.
It presets the display condition and the display position of the multi window to have maintained.

4) Setting to the multi window display


It changes the setting of each multi window. for the details of the setting, refer to the instruction
manual of each of the facilities.

In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(8) Multi Window] [(0) Setup] in that order.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-142


3.26 Cursor Auto Mode
The auto mode is the mode that the display of the contents and the change of the setting can be
implemented by repeating a cursor in the specific object and the line.
The cursor becomes a crosshair cursor.
Navigation & Planning The initial condition in case of start-up becomes an auto mode about the sailing
executive-state.

ECDIS
When choosing [AUTO mode] from the context menu when a cursor is displayed at the thing except the
crosshair cursor in [Zoom Area] etc, the cursor mode changes to the auto mode.
Also, it returns to the auto mode automatically when not clicking for 1 minute when a cursor is displayed
at the thing except the crosshair cursor and leaving.

The selectable object and the displayed information


When adjusting a cursor to each object for 1 second, the following information is displayed.
Priority *1 Object Operation which is Information which is displayed
possible when when adjusting a cursor
left-clicking
1 AIS AIS Non-active: actived AIS target.
Ships name(number) Active:Select List display and
CPA being hidden.
TCPA
2 TT TT Select List display and being
Target number hidden.
CPA
TCPA
3 BUOY BUOY
Comment
4 LIGHT LIGHT
Comment
5 Cross point of EBL1 or EBL1(EBL2) Changing the EBL1(EBL2) or
VRM1 VRM1(VRM2) VRM1
(EBL1 or VRM1) (VRM2);1-step operation.
6 EBL1(EBL2) EBL1(EBL2) Changing the EBL1(EBL2)
7 VRM1(VRM2) VRM1(VRM2) Changing the VRM1(VRM2)
8 AZ1(AZ2) AZ1(AZ2) Changing the AZ1(AZ2)
The item to change by the place to
click is different.
Start Side
End Side
Far Side
Width

3-143 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


The selectable object and the displayed information --continued--
When adjusting a cursor to each object for 1 second, the following information is displayed.
Priority *1 Object Operation which is Information which is displayed
possible when when adjusting a cursor
left-clicking
9 User Map Object MAP
(Symbol/Line/Area/Text) Comment
Event Mark EVENT
Comment
Information Mark INFO
Comment
Tidal Stream Mark TIDE
Comment
Highlight HIGHLIGHT
Comment
10 AIS Ring filter AIS Changing to the value AIS Ring
Ring filter.
AIS Sector filter AIS Changing to the value AIS Sector
Sector filter.
*1 Operation is done about the object with the priority which is high when adjusting a cursor when an
object overlaps and is displayed

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-144


3.27 Logbook
You can display the logbook where various voyage information is written. The recorded items and the
items shown on the logbook table are selectable with the logbook Settingpanel . How to display the
logbook and how to select the items to be saved are explained here.

3.27.1 Displaying the Logbook


The items displayed in the logbook are selectable. For the selection, see the next 3.27.2 Logbook ECDIS

Setting .

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(7) Logbook] in that order.
The Logbook panel opens. Contents of the logbook are as follows:
(Note that, to see all the contents, scroll the panel.)
No.
Date
Time
Event (kind of alarm, Event Mark Navtex, etc. -- depends on the
Logbook setting panel settings.),
POSN1
POSN2
Latitude
Longitude
COG
SOG
HDG
STW
Av. Speed 4h
Av. Speed 24h (average speed recent 4/24 hours)
Voyage DIST. (G )
Voyage DIST. (W) (Voyage distance (Ground)/(Water))
Charts
Set
Drift
Wind Dir. (direction)
Wind Speed
Wave Dir. (direction)
Wave Height
Air Press (pressure)
Air Temperature.
Water Temperature.
Engine Rev. (revolution)
Comments

3-145 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


Note:
The voyage distance can be reset to 0.0nm. (See 7.9 Clear Voyage Distance.)
The voyage distance is available only if the interface with the ship speed sensor is in a log pulse
format.
Some of the items of Logbook may not be available depending on the hardware and system
configuration used.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-146


Button Operation (left-click the button):

[Filter]: The Logbook Setting panel opens. You can set the filtering conditions. For
logbook option settings, see the next 3.26.2 Logbook Setting.

[Column Setting]: You can select any item in the list. Left-click the item to turn it ON or OFF.
The check mark () shows that the selected item is set to ON. Selected
column and [Up] or [Down], The column changes the order in table of
Logbook panel ECDIS

Column list is as follows:


Date
Time
Event
POSN1
POSN2
Latitude
Longitude
COG()
SOG(kn)
Heading()
Log(kn)
Av. Speed 4h(kn)
Av. Speed 24h(kn)
Voyage DIST.(G)(NM)
Voyage DIST.(W)(NM)
Charts, Set(), Drift(kn)
Wind Dir. ()
Wind Speed(m/sec)
Wave Dir. (kn)
Wave Height(m)
Air Press Temp.(hPa)
Temp(), Water Temp.()
Engine Rev.(rpm)
Comments
Wave Height(m)
Air Press .(hPa)
Air Temperature ()
Water Temperature.()
Engine Rev.(rpm)
Comment
Following column can not move:
Date
Time
[OK] : It saves setting contents.
[Cancel] : It cancels setting contents.

3-147 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


[View Navtex]: Left-click the log that is including "Event-Navtex" , and then left-click to open
the Letter panel that shows the detailed information on the Navtex
messages.
You can mark it if you select [Marking on the Chart]. You can set expiration
date then. When [Expire Date] is off, a marking is deleted after the reception
15 days later.
It changes to the data which the information on the "Letter" panel selected
when selecting another Navtex in "Logbook" panel as it opened a panel
and clicking

[Letter].

[Marking on the Chart]: It displays Navtex symbol on the chart when making valid.
[Expire Date]: [Expire Date] entry field and the note become valid when making valid.
Navtex symbol becomes hidden when passing an [Expire Date]
In case of invalid, the symbol becomes hidden when passing on the 15
days from the date of receive.
In the date of reception, the date in front can not be entered.
Also, more than 15 days after date, too, can not be entered from the date
of reception.
[Edit]: Navtex "Location" panel is displayed.
[Print]: When setting a printer, the Navtex information can be printed.
[Close]: Letter panel is closes.
[View REF Point]: Left-click the log that is including Event-Reference Point , and then
left-click this button to open the Information panel that shows the
detailed information on the Reference Point messages.The following
contents are displayed when selecting Event-Reference Point and
clicking
[View REF Point].
LAT
LON
Min Scale
Max Scale
Plot Type
Source
Time
Comment

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-148


The following contents are displayed when there is LOP cross point information.
LOP1(or LOP2)
Latitude
Longitude
BRG()
RNG(NM)
Data
TPL(Yes / No)
The panel closes when clicking [Close] . ECDIS

[Delete Navtex]: Left-click the log that is including "Event-Navtex", and then left-click this
button to open the Delete panel.
Select either of the following to delete desired log number that includes
Navtex.
Selected Message: When the [OK] is left-clicked, the selected log No. in the
Logbook panel is deleted.
Before: Enter the [date/time] you want delete the Navtex messages
before the entered [date/time].
When the [OK] is left-clicked, the Navtex messages before the
set [date/time] are deleted.
All Message: When the [OK] is left-clicked, All Message in the Logbook
panel is deleted.

[Export]: Logbook content is saved as a CSV file. The saved file can be opened with a
spreadsheet program and edited with a personal computer. Select one of the
following items in the Export panel:
Selected Message: The selected record data will be exported.

From/To: Logs saved during the term specified in the entry boxes will be
exported.

The Save As panel will be displayed after you left-click on the [OK] in the
Export panel. Input the name of the file in the [File name] column, select
the folder in which the file is to be saved, then left-click the [OK] .

3-149 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


For the data format of the logbook to be exported, see 10.5 Data Formats
of Files that ECDIS can Import/Export.
[Cancel]: [Save As] panel closes without changing setting.

[Jump]: Left-click the record data, and then left-click this . Then, the position of recorded
data is displayed at the center of the screen.

[Print]: The Print panel will open. You can print out the Logbook data after setting the
printing conditions.
(This is only valid when a printer is connected.)
Selected Message: The selected recorded data is printed.
From/To: The data in the date range entered in the input box will be
printed. (The item which is printed is decided.)

[Print] panel closes when clicking [Cancel] .

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-150


[Input]: You can manually enter the following values and comment as required. When the
[OK] is left-clicked, the entered values are displayed in the Logbook panel. (The
No. in this panel corresponds to the No. in the Logbook panel.)

ECDIS

When clicking [Cancel], input value are canceled and the Input panel closes.

[Close]: Closes the panel.

3-151 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.27.2 Logbook Setting
You can filter the trigger conditions to record the log data in the logbook. Also, you can filter the trigger
conditions to save the log data which will only be used to display in the Logbook panel explained in
3.27.1 Displaying the Logbook .

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(5) Logbook Setting] in that order.
The Logbook Setting panel opens.
2) Left-click the option items you want to select in the Logging and View panels, and left-click
the [OK] .

Note:
Some of the items of Logbook may not be available depending on the hardware and system
configuration used.

Log data is automatically saved according to the settings on the Logging area.
Also, log data will be saved for displaying in the Logbook panel,
For example, if you left-click and select At Noon. The log data is saved At noon.
Contents of the logbook items are as follows:
At Noon:
Data will be saved at
12:00 (LTM) when this
item is valid.
Every X minutes:
Data will be saved after
set duration of time.
Route Alarm:
Data will be saved
when an alarm related
to Route Monitoring
Alarm.
Chart Alarm:
Data will be saved
when an alarm related
to Safety counter
Alarm Dangerous
Alarm LAT.Limit Over
Alarm Chart Alarm
Area Alarm,
Navtex:
Data will be saved when data from Navtex are received.
When press :
Data will be saved when the [Event] button is held down.
AUTO Sail/Sensors:
Data will be saved when an alarm related to Alarm System States tab.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-152


Others:
Data will be saved when any other kind of alarm (Startup, Offset Reference Point,etc)
occurs.
Latest display days:
It displays of the number of days of setting,setting log days.
[Navtex Setting]:
The Navtex Setting panel opens.

Set the Navtex message filtering conditions by selecting each item on the Station, ECDIS

Month/Year and Message area. Then, left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
The Navtex messages received from the selected Station will be filtered by the condition set
by the Month/Year and Message, and then they will be saved as the Navtex information for
displaying on the chart.

The following Navtex mark will be displayed on the chart according to


the Navtex information.

Station: You can filter the stations by specifying the first letter of the station name.
For example, if you select the letter A, the station name that begins with A
will be accepted. If you do not select Filtering, Messages of all the stations
will be not accepted
Month/Year: You can filter the Navtex messages by specifying the month/year.
Message: You can filter the Navtex messages by specifying the kind of the message.
If you do not select Filtering, the navigational warnings will be not accepted.

Note:
The above Navtex filtering function is provided for message display in Logbook.
The function is not for receiving or recording Navtex messages.
The Navtex messages to be received vary depending on the filter setting of the Navtex receiver.
For details, see the Navtex receiver instruction manual

3-153 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.28 Own Ships Setting
The following settings on own ship are explained here.
Primary position (of own ship) and secondary position settings
Vector display and heading line at the primary position
Danger detection vector and sector
Primary position track and time label, etc.
Each item is shown in the following figure.

COG vector HDG vector

Danger detection sector

Danger detection vector

Own ship
Heading line

Own ship
Beam line

Tracking past position dots


Time labels

Tracking period

[Own Ships Setting Items]


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Own Ship Setting panel is displayed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-154


3.28.1 Own Ship Symbol
You can select your ships shape, either symbol (a) or outline (b). Either (a) or (b) will be displayed at the
primary position on the chart.
Shape of the outline (b) depends on the scale of the chart and the width and length of the ship setting at
installation.
Even though you choose the outline (b), the symbol (a) will be displayed unless enlarged chart is
selected. When the chart is enlarged, the outline (b) will be displayed.

Width of ship according to scale ECDIS

Length of ship according to scale

(a) (b)

[Your Ship Symbol]

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Own Ship Setting panel is displayed.
2) In the Own Ship Symbol area, left-click either Symbol (a) or Out Line (b).
Then, left-click the [OK] to close the panel.

Ships Name: Own ship name can be set.


Receive value is displayed when receiving from AIS.

3-155 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.28.2 Vector Display at POSN1
The COG vector (vector of the vessels motion over the ground), HDG vector (vector of the vessels
motion through the water) can be displayed for your ships symbol.
The COG and HDG vectors can be displayed at lengths proportional to the ships current speed in
minutes. For example, if the vector length is set as 10 minutes, the tip of the vector is the expected
position in 10 minutes assuming that the ship sails at the current speed.

Vector length
Vector length

Vector time mark Vector time mark

HDG vector COG vector

[Vector Display and Heading line]

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Own Ship Setting panel is displayed.
2) Set each item on the Vector area.
To display the heading line ON/OFF, left-click the [Display Ground-Referenced Velocity] on the
[Display Ground-Water-Referenced Velocity]. Then, left-click the [OK] on the Own Ship
Setting panel. Then, the panel will close.

Turns ON/OFF the COG vector display.

Turns ON/OFF the HDG vector display.

COG/HDG vector time until the ship reaches


the expected position. (Min.1min,Max. 60 min.)

Turns ON/OFF the Vector Time Mark display.


(Min.1min,Max.6min)

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-156


3.28.3 Danger Detection Vector and Sector
You can set the danger detection vector and sector for your safety. The danger detection vector can be
set the monitoring area of the cross line of the safety contour and the danger area etc. While, the
sector can be set to monitor dangerous objects around your ship. The danger detection vector is
shown in the rectangular shape and the tip of the vector is the expected time assuming that the ship sails
at the current speed. The sector and its radius can be set as required.

Danger Detection Sector radius Danger Detection Vector length ECDIS

(1.0min to 30.0min (1.0min to 30.0min


or 0.1NM to 5.0NM) or 0.1NM to 5.0NM)

Danger Detection Sector angle Danger Detection Vector width


(0.0deg to 359.9deg) (30m to 250m)

[Danger Detection Vector and Sector]

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Own Ship Setting panel is displayed.

2) Left-click each item on the Danger Detection panel.


Danger detection vector display ON/OFF

Danger detection sector display ON/OFF

[When left-clicking,the[Alarm Limit Setting]


panel opens].

3-157 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3) Left-click the [Set Alarm Limit] , the Alarm Limit Option panel opens.
Vector:
Turns ON/OFF to affect danger detection
vector.
Length:
Set 0.1 to 5.0 NM or set 1.0 to 30.0 min
NM / min:
Change to unit of Length.
NM: distance from ship
min: time until arriving
Width:
Set 30.0 to 250.0m.
Sector:
Turns ON/OFF to affect danger detection
sector.
NM / min :
Change to unit of Radius.
NM: distance from ship
min: time until arriving
Radius:
Set 0.1 to 5.0 NM or set 1.0 to 30.0 min
Width:
Set 0.0 to 359.9deg.

4) Left-click the [Vector] and [Sector] and enter the value


Vector: It left-clicks a Dangerous Detection Vector [length] and [width] colum and it
enters a value.
Sector: It left-clicks a Dangerous Detection Vector [radius] and [width] colum and it
enters a value.

5) Left-click the [OK] on the Alarm Limit Setting panel, and then the [OK] on the Own Ship
Setting panel to close all panels,setting becomes valid.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-158


3.28.4 Track and Time Label Display
The primary position of own ship is memorized to hard disk every second, and up to 24 hours of
information is displayed on the chart as the track as follows:

Time labels
Own ship (Primary position) Every 10 to 60 min.

ECDIS

Tracking period (1 to 24 hours) Tracking past position dots


(Every 3sec to 60min
or every 0.1NM to 10NM)

[Primary Position Track and Time Label]

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Own Ship Setting panel is displayed.
2) In the "Track" area, left-click [Display Past Track] and [Display Time Label] to select them.
3) It enters value with the following item.[color][Track Period][Past POSN][Interval].
Then, left-click the [OK] on the Own Ship Setting panel to close it.

Color of ships track (Red, Green, Blue,


Magenta, Orange, Brown, or Black)

1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24 hour

OFF.
3, 5, 10, 30 sec.
1, 3, 5, 10,30,60 min.
0.1,0.2,0.3,0.5,1,3,5,10 NM

10, 30, 60 min.

3-159 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.28.5 Heading Line and Beam Line
You can set the Heading Line and Beam Line for display ships direction.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Own Ship Setting panel is displayed.

2) Left-click the item to select it.


Heading line
Left-click to turn it ON/OFF.

Heading line

Beam line
When [Display Heading Line] is ON setting, Left-click to turn it ON/OFF.

Heading Line and Beam line

3) Left-click the [OK] on the Own Ship Option panel to close it.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-160


3.29 Chart Setting
You can set the various Chart Settings.

3.29.1 Chart Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS ] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu ECDIS

Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS ] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(0) Setting] - [(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS ] in that order.
The Chart Setting panel opens. This panel consists of three tabs View Common, View1
and View2, each of which can be selected by left-clicking the tab.

[View Common tab]

Note:
You can select CMAP Version setting when the [View Common] tab is selected from the normal
menu but you cannot select a chart when the [View Common] tab is selected from the Table Editing
menu, Graphic Editing menu, or User Chart Editing menu.

3-161 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.29.1.1 Setting the "View Common" tab
The settings made here apply to View1 and View2 tabs for single/multi-view.

1) Left-click the item to Select.[OK] on the panel to close it.


a) Display Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Base/Standard/Other
Selection is the same as when the [Base], [Standard] and [Other] on the display panel are
used. For detailed function, see 3.6 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only).
b) Area Boundary (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Plane : Plane boundary (The boundary of the area is drawn by the dotted lines)

Boundary of the area

Symbolized : Symbolized boundary (The boundary of the area is drawn by the symbolized
line)

Boundary of the area

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-162


c) Redraw
Border range: Sets the border range to shift the chart when ship reaches it. (Effective
only when motion True is selected.) Border range can set from 30%
to 80%.
Margin (Chart Rotation): This function is effective only when the mode Course up is
selected. (See 3.7.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode.) The chart
will be turned step-by-step by the angle set here. Namely, if
the [Margin (Chart Rotation)] is set to 10 degrees, the chart
will be rotated each time the ship turns more than 10 degrees. ECDIS

[Ex. The boarder range feature]

When set border range is 80%, When your ship reaches the border range,
the chart automatically shifts as follow:

3-163 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


d) Chart Symbol (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Paper Chart: Lighthouses and other symbols are shown as indicated on the paper
charts.
Simplified: Simplified: A simple-ized symbol is displayed.
Full Light Line: The range of lighthouse light is displayed in circle. When the [Full Light
Line] is set to ON, the size of the circle changes according to the chart
scale. When the chart is enlarged, the circle becomes large accordingly.
Consider Scale Minimum: When this item is selected, if the chart is reduced exceeding the
minimum scale set in a symbol, the symbol will not be displayed.
The minimum scale of a symbol differs among symbols. Also,
note that this item will not work when the chart (symbol) contains
no information.

[When [Paper Chart]is selected]

marks displayed on Electronic


Chart Display indicate that there are
rocks or other dangerous obstacles
in the water area where the vessel is
sailing.
Display of marks depends on
the settings of Depth Alarm. For the
method of setting Depth Alarm, see
e) Depth Alarm (S-57/C-MAP Only).

[When [Simplified] is selected]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-164


[Full Light Line setting]
When [Full Light Line] is OFF

ECDIS

Range of lighthouse light

When [Full Light Line] is ON

Range of lighthouse light


The size of the circle changes
according to the chart scale.

3-165 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


[Consider Scale Minimum setting]
When the minimum scale of spot depth is 1:40000 and a chart display scale is 1:50000:
When [Consider Scale Minimum] is ON

When [Consider Scale Minimum] is OFF

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-166


e) Depth Alarm (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Shallow Contour: The color of the sea indicated on the chart for the preset depth can be
changed.
Safety Contour: Depth smaller (or shallower) than the preset value are displayed
enhanced.
If there is no safety depth line on the chart, a deeper safety depth line
than you set is displayed.
Safety Depth: Spot soundings smaller than the preset value are displayed enhanced
displayed only at the value. ECDIS

Deep Contour: The color of the sea indicated on the chart for the preset depth can be
changed.
Two Color Depth: Generally, the sea is displayed on charts with sea depths divided into
four colors. However, when [Two Color Depth] is selected, the sea
depths are displayed in two colors, with Line of "Shallow Contour" and
"Safety Contour" displayed as one color, and and Line of "Deep
Contour" displayed as another color.("Safety Depth" is displayed at the
value). This feature is used to clearly indicate and divide the sea into
safe areas and dangerous areas where care must be taken during the
voyage, just like Shallow Pattern described earlier.
Shallow Pattern: The [Shallow Pattern] check mark adds grid lines to shallow sea set at
Shallow Contour and Safety Contour in the four selectable depths. This
function is for highlighting areas that require special care during the
voyage.
Show Isolated Danger In Shallow WaterWhenShow Isolated Danger In Shallow Water
is selected, display isolated danger in shallower water than safety
contour as mark .

Value:
Min:0m
Max:200m

[Shallow Contour/Safety Contour/Deep Contour settings]


Shallow Contour
Deep Contour

Land Land

shallow water

safety water

deep water

Safety Contour

3-167 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


[Two Color Depth setting]
When [Two Color Depth] is OFF (The sea is indicated in four colors.)

Deep Contour Shallow Contour

Land

Safety Depth(only the value)

Safety Contour

When [Two Color Depth] is ON (The sea is indicated in two colors.)

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-168


[Shallow Pattern setting]
When [Shallow Pattern] is ON (Shallow Pattern is displayed.)

Shallow Pattern

ECDIS

When [Shallow Pattern] is OFF (Shallow Pattern disappears.)

3-169 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


Show Isolated Danger In Shallow Water Shallow Pattern
When Show Isolated Danger In Shallow Water Shallow Patternis ON (Isolated Danger
in shallower water than safety contour display as mark .

Dangerous object

Safety Contour

When Show Isolated Danger In Shallow Water Shallow Patternis OFF (Isolated Danger
in shallower water than safety contour does not display as mark .

Dangerous object

Safety Contour

f) C-MAP Ed.3 Database


The chart that C-MAP Ed 3 was imported can be chosen from.

The list of the C-MAP Ed.3 chart which


was imported in Chart Portfolio is
displayed.

When setting a truns ON/OFF in the


validity, a chart is displayed.
When choosing more than one, it rises
one above another and it is displayed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-170


g) Chart Graphic Performance

FastPriority is given to drawing Speed.


Hi QualityPriority is given to drawing Accuracy.
ECDIS

3-171 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.29.1.2 Setting the "View1" tab
The View1 tab setting is used for the [View 1] screen. Namely, this settings apply to the single
view screen (normal screen), or the "View 1" screen when you select multi view function to display
"View 1" and "View 2" screens. (For multi view function, see 3.11 Displaying Chart in Various
Ways (Multi View/Wide View).)

1) Left-click the setting items to set them ON /OFF.


Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
[Cancel]: It closes a panel without saving contents when clicking the [Cancel].
[Apply]: Contents can be saved without closing a panel when clicking the [Apply]
[View1 tab]

Multi screen view statuses:


The top right square on the view panel shows how view is divided. The blue area is the display area for
the current view.
(For multi screen display, see 3.11.1 Multi View Screen)

Single view Top Bottom view Right Left view Right Top view

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-172


a) Type (Type of chart)
S-57: S-57 chart is displayed.
C-MAP Ed.2: S-57 can be selected for simultaneous display.
C-MAP Ed.3: C-MAP Ed.3 chart is displayed.
ARCS: ARCS chart is displayed.
Note:
ARCS can be selected only if the ARCS chart has already been installed and the [ARCS
PIN] is correctly inputted when the "Navigation & Planning" is started.
ECDIS
ARCS and other S-57 or C-MAP cannot be selected at the same time.

b) Text Size (S-57/C-MAP only)

Expands characters.

Reduces characters.

The character size in the text to which the mark is attached can be changed.
Example: Land region

Small Large

Small Large Large Small

Smalld Large Large Small

Large

Small

3-173 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


c) Layer (S-57/C-MAP only)
Layers displayed on the chart are listed below. There are [-] layer, [S] layer, and [O] layer.

[-]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [Base], [Standard], and [Other]
mode
[S]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [Standard] or [Other] mode.
[O]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [Other] mode.
(For chart object display, see 3.6 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)

Display of each layer listed below can be turned ON/OFF:

Layers in S-57

[S] objects:
unknown object
Land region, Sea area/named water area
Causeway, Dam, Dyke, Gate
Dyke, Slope topline, Airport, Building, single, Crane, Landmark, Built-up area
Swept area
Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable, Submarine
Navigation line
Recommended track
Ferry route
Radar range, Radar line
Restricted area
Ferry route, Military practice area, Offshore production area
Caution area, Fairway
Fishing ground, Marine farm/culture
Anchorage area, Anchor berth
Cable area, Pipeline area
Dumping ground, Cargo transshipment area, Incineration area
Daymark
Navigational system mark
topmarks
light
Fog signal, Retro-reflector, Radar transponder beacon, Radar reflector
Pilot boarding place, Signal station, Traffic, Signal station, Warning

[O] objects:
Quality of data,Low accuracy data
Nautical publication information
Coverage, Compilation scale of data
Local magnetic anomaly, Magnetic variation
Sloping ground, Land elevation, Slope topline
Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, River, Water fall, Tideway
Building, Fortified structure, Land mark, Silo/Tank, Airport, Road, Railway
Check point, Harbour facility
Distance mark

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-174


Berch, Crane, Drydock, Mooring/Warping facility, Gate
Sounding
Depth area, Depth counter,Label for contour
Water turbulence, Tide..., Current-non-gravitational
Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, Spring
Fishing-facility
Obstruction, Wreck, Underwater/Awash rock
Cable, Submarine, Pipeline, Submarine/on land
Continental shelf area ECDIS

Custom zone, Free port area, Harbour area


Fishery zone
Administration area, Contiguous zone, Exclusive economic zone
Radar station, Radio station, Coastguard station, Rescue station

Layers in C-MAP Ed.3

[S] objects:
Land region, Sea area/named water area
Causeway, Dam, Dyke, Gate
Dyke, Slope topline, Airport, Building, single, Crane, Landmark, Built-up area
Swept area
Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable, Submarine
Navigation line
Recommended track
Ferry route
Radar range, Radar line
Restricted area
Ferry route, Military practice area, Offshore production area
Caution area, Fairway
Fishing ground, Marine farm/culture
Anchorage area, Anchor berth
Cable area, Pipeline area
Dumping ground, Cargo transshipment area, Incineration area
Daymark

3-175 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


Navigational system mark
Fog signal, Retro-reflector, Radar transponder beacon, Radar reflector
Pilot boarding place, Signal station, Traffic, Signal station, Warning

[O] objects:
Quality of data,Low accuracy data
Nautical publication information
Coverage, Compilation scale of data
Local magnetic anomaly, Magnetic variation
Sloping ground, Land elevation, Slope topline
Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, River, Water fall, Tideway
Building, Fortified structure, Land mark, Silo/Tank, Airport, Road, Railway
Check point, Harbour facility
Distance mark
Berch, Crane, Drydock, Mooring/Warping facility, Gate
Sounding
Depth area, Depth counter,Label for contour
Water turbulence, Tide..., Current-non-gravitational
Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, Spring
Fishing-facility
Obstruction, Wreck, Underwater/Awash rock
Cable, Submarine, Pipeline, Submarine/on land
Continental shelf area
Custom zone, Free port area, Harbour area
Fishery zone
Administration area, Contiguous zone, Exclusive economic zone
Radar station, Radio station, Coastguard station, Rescue station

d) Text (S-57/C-MAP Only)


The texts that will be displayed on the chart. You can turn the display of the following texts
ON and OFF.

Text in S-57
Important text (Vertical Clearance bridge, overhead cable, so on)
Name/Number of: buoys, beacons, so on
Light description
Note on chart data or nautical publication
Nature of seabed
Geographic names
Value of: magnetic variation, swept depth
Height of islet or land feature
Berth number
National language

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-176


Text in C-MAP Ed.3
Important text(Vertical Clearance bridge, overhead cable, so on)
Other text (Name of building so on)
Light description
Note on chart data or nautical publication
Geographic names
National language

Note: When setting "National Language" in the validity, it overlap with the other displaying ECDIS

information specified in English. Therefore, when setting "National Language" in the validity, set
the other Text check item in the invalid resemblance.

3-177 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.29.1.3 Setting the "View2" tab
The [View2] tab setting is used for the View 2 screen. This settings apply to the view 2 screen
(the second screen) which will be displayed when multi view function is used. The view 2 screen
will not be displayed if you use a Single View screen (normal screen). (For multi view function,
see 3.11 Displaying Chart in Various Ways (Multi View/Wide Range View) .

1) Left-click the setting items to set them ON/OFF.


Left-click the [OK] on the panel to close the panel.
[Cancel]: It closes a panel without saving contents when clicking the [Cancel].
[Apply]: Contents can be saved without closing a panel when clicking the [Apply].
The setting contents are the same as for [View 1] panel mentioned earlier.
The setting items are as follows:
Type (Type of chart) Layer Text Text Size

Note:
[View2-Type] doesn't change with [View1-Type] and it functions.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-178


Multi screen view statuses:
The top right square on the view panel shows how view is divided. The blue area is the display area
for the current view.
(For multi screen display, see 3.11.1 Multi View Screen)

ECDIS

Single view Top Bottom view Right Left view Right Top view

3.29.2 Other Chart Setting


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(0) Setting] - [(2) Other Charts] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(0) Setting] - [(2) Other Charts] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(0) Setting] - [(2) Other Charts] in that order.
The Other Chart Setting panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON/OFF.
Then, left-click the [OK] to close the panel.

The item which removed a check become hidden.

3-179 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.29.3 Save Chart Setting
This function can save the setting contents of [Chart Setting].

1. In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(3) Save Chart Setting].
2. [Save Chart Setting] panel is displayed.
Name can be entered to 15 characters.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(4) Chart Setting List].
the saving setting can be loaded.
see 3.29.4 Chart Setting List.

The following set value is saved.


[View Common] tab
Display Category
Area Boundary
Depth Alarm
Redraw
Chart Symbol
[View1/View2] tab
Type
Text Size
Layer
Text

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-180


3.29.4 Chart Setting List
This feature can load the set value which saved in[Menu]-[(6)Chart]-[(0)Setting]-[(1)S-57/C-MAP/ARCS].

1. In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) User Setting] - [(4) Chart Setting List].
2. Chart panel and a saving setting list are displayed.
[Load]: Selected setting can be loaded.
[Delete]: Selected setting can be deleted.
ECDIS
[Close]: [Chart Setting List] is closes.

3-181 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.30 Chart Abbreviations
Displays a table of the meanings of the chart abbreviations.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(3) Chart Abbreviation] in that order.
An Information panel with a table of the meanings of the chart abbreviations is displayed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-182


3.31 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart
You can merge the S-57 updating charts with the original charts. Whether you merge the updating chart
here in "Navigation & Planning" screen or you merge it when importing with the "Chart Portfolio" is
selectable in the setting. (For Chart Portfolio operation, see attached Chart Portfolio.

1) Be sure that the SENC information level is set to [Standard] or [Other].( A part is displayed in
[Base].)
ECDIS

[Standard] or [Other] is selected.

2) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(6) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Chart] - [(6) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order. I
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(6) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order.
The Accept Updates panel opens.

3-183 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3) Left-click one of the S-57 updating charts in the table.
If you want to display and check the updating objects, select chart to left-click the [Show].
Then, the S-57 updating chart will be displayed on the chart.
The objects of the updating chart will be superimposed on the original chart and show in red.

Accept updating objects


by left-clicking the [OK]
on the Accept
Updatespanel.

Updating objects will be The updating objects are merged


displayed in red. with the original chart and its color is
changed from red to normal one.

4) Left-click the [OK] .


The panel closes and the updating objects are merged with the original chart.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-184


3.32 Graphical Index
Graphical Index is a function to display the index of SENC stored by the system.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] and then [(6) Chart] [(7) Graphical Index] in that order.
Then chart index is displayed on the chart and Graphical Index panel is displayed.
2) Left-click on the chart, the "Graphical Index Information"panel of the clicked place is displayed.
ECDIS

Graphical Index

"Graphical Index Information"panel of


the clicked place

3-185 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3) To want to change display function, select turns ON/OFF and select [Apply].

Display ENC Data:


Switch Display ENC Data in Graphical Index.

Display Chart Name:


Switch Display the Chart Name. If this function is
effective, Chart Name is displayed upper right in
the chart index.

Chart Boundary:
Select display index in either resolution level.
The boundary of the chart to have made valid is
displayed.
Overview Low Resolution
General
Coastal
Approach
Harbour
Berthing High Resolition

2) To ending graphical index mode, Left-click on the [Close]. Then, the chart display returns to
original condition.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-186


3.33 Date-dependant View
Date-dependant View is a function to display S57/63 chart at the time of specified date. For example,
you can display chart of arrival area depended on ETA when planning voyage,

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU]-[(6)Chart]-[(9)Date-dependant View] in that order.
Date-dependent View Setting panel opens.
ECDIS

2) Enter the date/time you want to display S57/63 charts. And Left-click the Apply button.

UTC/LMT
Change UTC/LMT of specified date.
Data
Enter the date you want to see the chart.
Time
Enter the time you want to see the chart.
TimeZone (only LMT)
Enter the time zone you want to see the chart.

3) The chart is displayed based on entered date/time.

3) If Left-click "Apply" button and close panel, the chart is displayed based on now time.

3-187 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.34 Setting Radar Options
3.34.1 Setting of RADAR
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
In the TUser Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(9) Radar Overlay] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Radar Option panel opens.
2) After setting the items as required, left-click the [Close] button on the panel to close it.

Note:
For details on each setting item, refer to the INSTRUCTION MANUAL for Radar being used.
The Rader Option panel will not be displayed if an optional radar board is not installed.

IR (Interference Rejection):
This function is used to remove unnecessary signals from
other radars when they are superimposed over the
selected radar signal.

Gain Adjust/Sea Adjust/Rain Adjust/Video


You can adjust these items using the dials on the operation
panel other than using the dialog box

To Adjust the Radar Image Using the Radar Option Panel:


1) Select value with the scroll bar.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the Radar Option
panel.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-188


3.35 AIS/TT Setting
3.35.1 AIS/Target Track Setting
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(0) AIS/TT Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(0) AIS/TT Setting] in that order.
The AIS/Tracking Target Setting Option panel opens. ECDIS

2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON/OFF, and, for the items that require value entry, enter
the value. Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
Note:
For details on each setting item, refer to the INSTRUCTION MANUAL for TT/AIS to be used.

AIS/TT Past Position: CPA/TCPA Limit:


AIS/TT past position can be displayed It becomes valid when setting [AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm] to
in the set interval. [ACT]. Alarm is occurred when the target enters in each
[0.5min] [1min] [2min] [3min] [4min] setting range.
[0.1NM] [0.2NM] [0.5NM] [1NM]: It CPA (Closest Point of Approach) is distance between
displays in the set interval. own ship and target. CPA Limit setting range: 0.1 - 9.9NM
TCPA (Time to Closest Point of Approach) is time to own
ship and CPA of target. TCPA Limit setting range: 1
Display TT Vector:
99min
It displays TT Vector
when putting check.
AIS Lost Alarm
[OFF]: "Lost Alarm" not effect
[ACT&Danger]:
Active target and Danger target
[Danger]:
Danger target only

AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm:


[ACT]: Active target only
[ACT & Sleep]:
Active target and Sleep target

AIS Filter:
Target Number: Refer to 3) AIS Filter
<AIS>
[OFF]: Label is not displayed
[ON]: Display only label of Activated AIS Target
[AIS Track]: Display only label of target to which route is displayed
[ships Name]:AIS Target name is display
<TT>
[OFF]: Label is not displayed
[ON]: Displays a label.
[TT Track]: Display only label of target to which route is displayed

3-189 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


Note:
Tracking spots of AIS/TT are cleared by changing screen, e.g. Zooming In/Out.

* In case of built-in Target Track processing co-processor.


Acquisition relation menu of Target Track becomes able to be selected when making [Internal Target
Tracking function] ON.
Acquisition relation menu of Target Track becomes invalid when making [Internal Target Tracking
function] ON.

3) AIS Filter

High Priority filter for display:


Ring: The AIS targets within the specified distance are displayed.
It changes to edit mode when left-click onto the "Ring" line.
Sector: The AIS targets within the specified bearing with the heading as the center are
displayed.
It changes to edit mode when left-click onto the "Sector" line.
Heading line
Sector area
Ring area

Own ship

120nm

Note:
Maximum number of visible targets are 300. For over 300 targets, at first the targets
attributed danger have priority to show. And secondary the targets without danger are
shown the nearest from own ship one by one.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-190


It sets the range of Ring. It sets the range of Sector.
Minimum: 0.0 NM Minimum: 0.0
Maximum: 120.0 NM(MAX) Maximum: 359.9
It becomes valid when check is ON. It becomes valid when check is ON.

Filter Mode:
[OFF]: Regardless of the setting range, ECDIS

AIS Target is displayed.


[Display]: Only AIS in the setting range is
displayed.
[Priority]: When AIS Target is displayed
above the maximum, AIS Target
which is the farthest from the
own ship is not displayed in turn.

Range which was set in Ring and Sector is


displayed when putting a check.

The priority of display is as follows when AIS Target is more than maximum.
Numerical display Target
CPA/TCPA Target
Target in AZ
Association Target
Activated Target
In CPA Limit setting range 1.TCPA sequence 2.CPA sequence 3.Number sequence
Out of CPA Limit setting range 1.Range sequence 2.Number sequence

3-191 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


TT symbols:
Item Symbol Color

Tracked target (Selectable)

Dangerous target Red (blink)

Object: (Selectable)
Lost target
Cross Line: Red (blink)

Initial acquisition mark (Selectable)

AIS symbols:
Item Symbol Color

Sleeping target (Selectable)

Activated target (Selectable)

Selected target (Selectable)

Dangerous target Red (blink)

Object: (Selectable)
Lost target
Cross Line: Red (blink)

COG (variable length)

ROT (fixed length)

HDG (fixed length)


HDG

[Sleeping target] [Activated target]

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-192


Conditions for AIS lost targets:
When the data of an AIS target cannot be received for a specified time, the target data is
considered to be lost. As shown in the table below, a time period for judging a target as lost
varies depending on the class of receive data and the target status.

[SOLAS-compliant ship] (Class A)


Time until judgment
Target status
of lost target ECDIS

Vessel below 3 knots and it is now at anchor or on the moored 18 min


Vessel of 3 knots or more and it is now at anchor or on the moored 60 sec
Vessel of 0 to less than 14 knots 60 sec
Vessel of 0 to less than 14 knots and it is now changing the course 60 sec
Vessel of 14 to less than 23 knots 36 sec
Vessel of 14 to less than 23 knots and it is now changing the course 36 sec
Vessel of 23 knots or more 30 sec
Vessel of 23 knots or more and it is now changing the course 30 sec

[SOLAS-incompliant ship] (Class B)


Time until judgment
Target status
of lost target
Vessel below 2 knots 18 min
Vessel of 2 to less than 14 knots 180 sec
Vessel of 14 to less than 23 knots 180 sec
Vessel of 23 knots or more 180 sec

When an AIS dangerous target is lost and the target data cannot be received for 1 minute, the
target and target data are deleted.
Dangerous Target cam be showed ,only when ARPA is received.

3-193 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.35.2 Association Setting
When the ship that transmits AIS information is displayed with the AIS device,
both of the TT symbol received AIS target symbol and radar are plotted. Setting for ECDIS to treat as the
same target is set on this "Association Setting"panel because information on originally the same ship is
shown.

Association Setting to the Association


target on the chart.

Association symbol

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(1) AIS/TT] - [(0) Association Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AIS/TT] - [(0) Association Setting] in that order.
The Association Setting panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON/OFF, and, for the items that require value entry, enter
the value. To close the panel, Left-click the [OK] on the panel.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-194


Association Target can be set in valid or invalid.
It becomes valid when putting a check.
It is connected with the [Association] of the display
panel.

[Synchronized with TTD] is valid only the AIS data


receive from the Radar ECDIS

It preference which of AIS or TT and it can be set.

It sets [Bearing][Range][Course][Speed].

The setting range is as the following:


[Bearing]: 0.0- 9.9
[Range]: 0m - 999m
[Course]: 0- 99
[Speed]: 0kn - 99kn
Association is valid to 125 % of the set value.

3.36 Shifting Own Ship Position


During voyage, you can shift own ships position on the chart using one of the following methods:
Shifts to the position designated by left-clicking the cursor(Select to [Cursor])
Shifts by entering the latitude/longitude(Select to [Cursor])
Shifts by entering the offset value (Select to [Enter Offset])

Shifted own ship

When shifting the own ship position with an offset, a reference point mark can be displayed in the
position after the offset. A panel for setting the reference point will be displayed.

3-195 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


Please set the following items:

Position to display the reference point:


The position can be modified by left-clicking the select each column of [LAT] or [LON].

MIN Scale: Sets the minimum scale in which the reference point mark is displayed.
MAX Scale: Sets the maximum scale in which the reference point mark is displayed.

Comment: Comments for a reference point mark


can be input.

OK: Reference Point Mark will be displayed in the


specified location, and close this panel.
Cancel: Reference Point Mark will be not displayed.
Apply: Reference Point Mark will be displayed in
the specified location, and keep this panel
displayed.

Plot Type: Select EP/DR.

Source:
Selects the type of reference positioning data that is to be displayed
for Reference Point Mark.
Delete: Delete in selected GPS/DGPS/Decca/Loran/Radar/Astronomical/MFDF/Transit/GNSS/
Reference Point Line of Position/Visual Bearing LOPS/Visual Range LOPS
Mark
Time: Displays the time to be displayed for reference point marks.

Reference Point Mark

Type of reference positioning

For viewing the information on"Reference Point Mark" or editing/deleting "Reference Point Mark",
see 3.14 Reading Out Information on the Objects.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-196


Do not use the offset function during navigation.
If the equipment is used with the offset value entered as the own ship
position, the position of your ship displayed on the screen is shifted from the
real one, and accidents may result. ECDIS

When the offset values are entered, the background color of the position
panel on the display panel is colored in sky blue, and the message Position
Shift alarm is displayed in the message display area. Check these
indications, and cancel the offset function if necessary.

3.36.1 Shifting Using the Cursor


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(1) Cursor] in that order.
The Confirmation panel opens.

2) Left-click the [OK] .

The ship offset cursor appears.


3) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the position
you want, and then left-click there.
4) The "Location/Attributes-Reference Point" panel is
displayed.
5) Own ship will shift to that position.

Clear Offset:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order

3-197 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.36.2 Shifting by Entering the Position
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(2) Enter Position] in that order.
The Enter Position panel opens.

2) Enter the position and left-click the [OK] .


3) The "Location/Attributes-Reference Point" panel is displayed.
4) Own ship will shift to that position.
5) It does not off center when clicking [Cancel] .
To clear the offset:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order.

3.36.3 Shifting by Entering the Offset Value


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(3) Enter Offset] in that order.
The Enter Offset panel opens.

2) Enter the amount of offset to be shift and left-click the [OK] .


3) The "Location/Attributes-Reference Point" panel is displayed.
4) Own ship will shift by the amount of offset entered.
5) It does not off center when clicking [Cancel].

3.36.4 Canceling the Ship Offset


In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Ownship/Track] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order.
The offset applied to own ship can be canceled. As the offset is canceled, the color of the position
display on the panel changes from sky blue to gray.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-198


3.37 Printing Display
(Only when Connected to a Printer)
By using a printer connected to the workstation, you can print out dialog boxes, such as logbooks, or
panels displayed on the screen.

1) In the normal menu ECDIS


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(5) Print ] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(5) Print] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(5) Print] in that order.
The Print panel opens.
2) According to following figures, select the printer, and set for printing and left-click the [OK] on
the panel to close the panel.
Printing will starts.

HP Officejet K5400dn

HP Officejet 8000

HP Officejet 8100

3-199 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS


3.38 Saving the Screen
An image of the displayed screen can be saved on the hard disk as a 256-color bit map file.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(6) Save Screen] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(6) Save Screen] in that order.
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Main] - [(6) Save Screen] in that order.
The image file of the screen will be saved with a file name in the following format:
* When the Lost target, Danger TT Target, Danger AIS Target is in the blink condition, it isn't
captured.
* Radar echo is captured in the contained condition.

Drive_YY MM DD _ HH MM SS.bmp

Year Date Minute


Month Hour Second
(Example) If the file was created at 10:50:15 on 6 June 2008, If the file was created at 10:50:15 on 6
June 2008,it preserves at the E drive. the file name would beE_080606105015.bmp

3.39 Displaying the Startup Menu


(Exit the navigation & Planning)
After the Navigation & Planning is exited, the Startup Menu panel will be displayed.
For the Startup Menu panel, see 3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU][(0) Exit]in that order.
The Confirmation panel will be displayed.
2) Left-click on the [OK] .
Navigation & Planning is exited, and the Startup Menu will be displayed.

3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-200


4
Route
Planning

4-1
In this Chapter, how to make a route is explained in 4.1. In addition, how to create alternate route during
voyage is explained in 4.2.
For selecting the route you have made in this chapter, see 3.12 Selecting ROUTE and To WPT.
To set route options, see 4.1.1 Setting the Route Options.

Note:
If you make a Track line more than limit longitude distance, track line can not displayed and Not
Allowed message is indicated.

If you make a Track line more than 80 degree latitude distance, track line can not displayed

4.1 Route Planning


You can make a route by using one of the following methods. After you have made a route, you can edit it.
Edition is possible by using either method.
Route planning using the Table Editor
You can make a route by entering each WPT value in the WPT entry table. Using the [View Sync]
button, the current WPT can always be displayed on the chart during editing.
Route planning using the Graphic Editor
You can make a route by graphically drawing each WPT on the chart.

Editing Screen and Editing Menu:


When you enter the Table Editing mode or Graphic Editing mode from the normal menu, the editing
screen is displayed.
On the editing screen, editing buttons are displayed. Further, special editing menu is provided and it
opens by rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of screen in the same way as for normal
menu.
The editing button functions are included in this special menu, though some names of buttons are slightly
different from those of menus.

Note:
The special editing menu has the same menus as for normal menu. Explanation of these menus is
omitted in this Chapter.

Route Name and Extension of File:


Route Name: You can enter up to 8 characters. For example: Route-01
(Note) Characters such as . and that cannot generally be used in file names cannot
be used as route names.
Extension of File: The extension (3 additional letters) is automatically attached to the route name as
follows.
Route-01.rtn

4 Route Planning 4-2


Route shown on the Screen:

W000

Planned course

W001

ECDIS

Planned speed [kt]

Leg

Port side (in red line)


and port side width

Starboard side (in green line) Arrival radius


and starboard side width

WPT : Way Point

Note:
For each default value, see 4.1.1 Setting the Route Options.

4-3 4 Route Planning


4.1.1 Setting the Route Options
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Route] - [(0) Setting] in that order.

Then, the Route Plan Setting panel opens.

2) Select an item, and enter the value in the numeric input box as needed.
Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.
a) Date/Time for monitoring
Select UTC/LMT for arrival time display during route monitoring.

UTC display LMT display

4 Route Planning 4-4


b) Select Route
When the checkbox of Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark), the arrival time is
displayed at WPT during route monitoring.

When Estimated Time of Arrival is off (no checkmark):

ECDIS

When Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark) and UTC is


selected for Route Monitoring Time:

When Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark) and LMT is


selected for Route Monitoring Time:

4-5 4 Route Planning


c) Default
Set the default of the route to be created during route planning.
XTL PORT: Port side width
XTL STBD: Starboard side width
Arrival Radius: Arrival radius
Speed: Planned ships speed
Sail: RL (Rhumb line)/GC (Great circle)
ROT: Turn rate
Turn Radius: Turn radius
Time Zone: Time zone

d) Max. Latitude
Waypoints cannot be set in latitudes higher than the set latitude. If a GC leg is higher than
the set latitude, waypoints are added for limiting the GC leg to the maximum latitude.

When the GC leg between W002 and W003


exceeds the maximum latitude (60N)

60N

When the maximum latitude is 60 or more, a GC leg exceeding 60 can be input.

W003 and W004 are added for limiting the


GC leg to the maximum latitude (60N).
(RL leg between W003 and W004)

60N

Waypoints are added at intersections between the GC leg and 60, so a leg exceeding 60 is
not input.

e) Check Safety in Editing


During editing the route, safety check is automatically conducted.
(You can manually conduct safety check with the [Safety Check] button.)
If an error is detected during the safety check, the route will have to be reset.
(The error part is drown in black color after safety check.)

Note:
The route cannot be created if the GC leg extends over 120 and more in longitudinal direction.

4 Route Planning 4-6


f) Route Type
Select a route type when making a route file.

Normal route TCS route

ECDIS
WOP

WOL

Note:
In editing the route, "View Ship's Parameter" can be displayed.
"View Ship's Parameter" dialog is only a display.

In Route Editing menu (Table / Graphic)


Select [(4) Route] - [(5) View Ships Parameter] in that order.
Then, the View Ships Parameter panel opens.

4-7 4 Route Planning


4.1.2 Route Planning Using the Table Editor
The order of explanation here is as follows:
About the Table Editing mode
Table editing menu and button functions
Operation flowchart
Detailed operation
The route you have made with the Table Editor can be edited with the Graphic Editor.

Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84).


Use of routes edited with any other geodetic systems may cause accidents.

4.1.2.1 Table Editing Mode


On the operation panel
Press the [ROUTE PLAN] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] - [(1) Table Editor] in that order.
The Table Editing screen as shown below will open.
On this screen you can make or edit the route.

[Table Editing Screen]

How to open the Table Editing Menu:


Left-clicking the [MENU] button on the display panel in the Table Editing mode will open the special menu
for Table Editor.

4 Route Planning 4-8


How to exit the table editing mode:
Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the Table Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit from
Route Planning] in that order.

How to print the WPT table contents (only when a printer is connected):
Open the route file (WPT table) to be printed, and left-click the [Print] button. Alternatively, in the Table
Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(7) Print WPT] in that order.

4.1.2.2 Table Editing Menu and Button Functions (Table Editor)


(1) Table editing menu
The following shows each menu in the Table Editing mode:
ECDIS

Table 4.1 Table Editing Menu Tree


Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Reference
(1) File (1) New 4.1.2.4
(2) Open 4.1.2.5
(3) Import (1) Normal 4.1.2.6
(2) TCS 4.1.2.6
(3) 2G TCS 4.1.2.6
(4) Save 4.1.2.4
(5) Save as 4.1.2.5
(6) Export 4.1.2.7
(7) Print WPT 4.1.2.1
(0) Exit from Route Planning 4.1.2.4
(2) Edit (4) Sort Reversely 4.1.2.4
(3) AIS/TT (1) TT1 3.3.9.1
(2) TT2 3.3.9.1
(3) AIS 3.3.9.1
(4) All 3.3.9.1
(5) Deactive All AIS 3.3.9.7
(6) All List 3.3.9.2
(7) Select List 3.3.9.8
(8) Target Track (1) Target Track Setting 3.3.9.3
(2) File Operation 3.3.9.4
(9) Own Ships AIS Data 3.3.9.2
(1) Message (1) Addressed Message 3.3.9.5
(2) Broadcast Message 3.3.9.5
(0) AIS Sentence (1) VDM 3.3.9.6
(2) TTD1 3.3.9.6
(3) TTD2 3.3.9.6
(0) AIS/TT Setting 3.34.1
(0) Association Setting 3.34.2
(4) Route (5) View Ships Parameter 4.1.1
(0) Setting 4.1.1

4-9 4 Route Planning


Table 4.1 Table Editing Menu Tree (Continued
Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Reference
(5) Chart (1) Marking/Highlighting (1) Event Mark 3.19.1
(2) Information Mark 3.19.2
(3) Tidal Stream Mark 3.19.3
(4) Highlight 3.19.4
(5) Delete Event Mark 3.19.1
(2) Off Center (1) Enter Position 3.4.5
(2) Home 3.4.1
(3) User Setting (1) Save My Port List 3.8.1
(2) My Port List 3.8.2
(3) Save Chart Setting 3.29.3
(4) Chart Setting List 3.29.4
(4) Select S-57 Chart 3.9
(5) Fix View 3.7.3
(6) Accept S-57 Updates 3.31
(4) ARCS (1) Temporary and Preliminary 3.10.8
(2) Adjust Datum Offset 3.10.9
(3) Datum Transformation 3.10.9
(0) Setting (1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS 3.29.1
(2) Other Chart 3.29.2
(6) Main (1) Maneuver Curve
3.20
/Remove Maneuver Curve
(2) Cross Bearing 3.21
(3) Create Clearing Line (1) Not Less Than 3.22
(2) Not More Than 3.22
(4) LOP (1) Create LOP 3.23
(2) Delete All LOP 3.23
(5) Print 3.37
(6) Save Screen 3.38
(9) Radar Overlay (1) Radar1 3.3.8
(2) Radar2 3.3.8
(3) Range Rings 3.3.8
(4) Bearing Scale
(0) Setting 7.11
(3) Test (1) Alarm Log 3.3.7
(2) System Information 7.2
(3) Operating Time 7.3
(0) Setting (1) Color and Brilliance Setting 7.6
(2) Option Key Setting 7.7
(3) Date/Time Setting 7.8
(4) Marker Setting 3.16.2.1
(6) Voyage Distance Clear 7.9
(7) Display Panel Setting 3.25
(8) Alarm Setting 7.10
(0) Buzzer Volume 3.3.5

4 Route Planning 4-10


Context Menu (Right Click on the chart display area)
Main Menu Submenu Reference
Abort 3.1.1.3
S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information 3.14
Other Information 3.14
Zoom Area 3.5.1
Dropped EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 3.16.2.2
EBL2/VRM2 3.16.2.2
EBL1 3.16.2.3
EBL2 3.16.2.3
VRM1 3.16.2.4
ECDIS
VRM2 3.16.2.4
Move Origin1 3.16.2.5
Move Origin2 3.16.2.5
CCRP EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 3.16.2.6
EBL2/VRM2 3.16.2.6
EBL1 3.16.2.7
EBL2 3.16.2.7
VRM1 3.16.2.8
VRM2 3.16.2.8
Running Fix / Remove Running Fix 3.17
High Resolution Area 3.10.1
Load Low Resolution 3.10.6
Select Chart Under Cursor 3.10.3
Change Active Panel 3.10.5
Note and Diagram 3.10.8

4-11 4 Route Planning


(2) Button functions

Left-click to close the route file and exit the Table Editing mode.

Left-click when making a new route file.

Left-click to select a route file previously made.

Left-click when saving the route file currently made.

Left-click when printing the WPT contents. (Only when connected to a printer)

Left-click when inserting a new WPT.

Left-click when deleting a WPT.

Left-click to divide the leg.

Left-click to set default value on following columns.


PORT/STBD/ARR RAD/ SPD/Sail/Turn RAD/Time Zone.

Left-click when checking the safety of the route. As a result of the checking,
warning dialog box will appear if the route is not safety.

Left-click to check if the route exceeds the limit (leg length, etc.).
This button is available for TCS mode only.

Left-click when you want to display the WPT during editing.

Left-click the drop-down list button to left-click one of the items. The Name
column contents in the editing table change according to the selected item.

Name : You can enter name in the Name column.


WPT to WPT : WPT to WPT information is
displayed.
Total : W000 to WPTn information is displayed.

It shifts to Graphic Editor.


When editing a route, the editing can be continued on Graphic Editor.

4 Route Planning 4-12


(3) Context Menu on Table
When right-clicking on the table, a context menu is displayed. Operation is applied to the line which
displayed a menu.

Context Menu

ECDIS

Left-click when inserting a new WPT.

Left-click when deleting a WPT.

Left-click to divide the leg.

Left-click to set default value on following columns.


PORT/STBD/ARR RAD/ SPD/Sail/Turn RAD/Time Zone.

4-13 4 Route Planning


4.1.2.3 Operation Flowchart for Table Editor
The following shows the general flowchart for planning a route using the Table Editor.
File opening and saving operation differs depending on whether you make a new route file or you select a
route file previously made, though the table editing operation is the same.

(1) Making a new route file (Table Editor)

Start

Clear any route if


Left-click to select [UNLOAD].
displayed.

Enter the Table


In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) RoutePlanning] - [(1) Table
Editing mode.
Editor] in that order.

Open a new route file.


Left-click [New].

Table editing operation


.

W000 entry
Position (Lat./Lon.) W000 entry screen

Left-click the next


WPT No.

The following items are automatically


W001 entry displayed. Change, if necessary.
Position (Lat./Lon.) XTL(PORT/STBD)
ARR RAD
SPD[kn]
Repeat WPT entry Sail (RL/GC)
until the final WPT. Time Zone
Name

Left-click [Save]

Enter the file name.

Left-click [Close] Exit the Table Editing mode.

End

4 Route Planning 4-14


(2) Editing the route file (Table Editor)

Start

Clear any route if Left-click [UNLOAD].


displayed.

Enter the Table In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) RoutePlanning] - [(1)
Editing mode. Table Editor] in that order.

Select a route file you want to edit. ECDIS


Left-click [Open].

Select route type.

Table editing operation

Edit the WPT table.

When you want to change the file name.

To save without chang- Left-click [Save as]


Left-click [Save]
ing the file name. in the menu.

Enter the new file


name.

Left-click [Close] Exits the Table Editing mode.

End

4-15 4 Route Planning


4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor)
This explanation is made according to (1) Making a new route file (Table Editor) in 4.1.2.3 Operation
Flowchart for Table Editor.

(1) Unloading the selected route before starting


Before starting, left-click the ROUTE drop-down button on the
display panel, and then left-click the [UNLOAD] to clear any
route on the screen.

(2) Entering the Table Editing mode


1) On the operation panel
Press the [ROUTE PLAN] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] - [(1) Table Editor] in that order.
Then, the Table Editing screen opens.
[MENU] Button

When you open the Table Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part
of screen.
Then, the Table Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click any position on the chart.

[Table Editing Menu]

(3) Opening a new route file


1) To make a new route file, left-click the [New] button.
In the Table editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(1) New] in that order.

4 Route Planning 4-16


(4) Making a route
1) Left-click the LATatitude and LONongitude in the position column, and enter the position for
W000.

2) Left-click the next WPT No. (i.e., W001). ECDIS

Then, the same position as the previous WPT (i.e. W000) is automatically set in the position
column. Also, default values are displayed in the other columns.
WPT can be made up to 511.

Position: Latitude/Longitude
XTL PORT: Port side width
XTL STBD: Starboard side width
ARR RAD: Arrival radius (This item isn't displayed in the TCS setting.)
SPD [kn]: Ships speed
Sail RL/GC: Sail RL (Rhumb line)/GC (Great circle)
ROT [/min]: The ship's rotation over every 1 minute (This item is automatically computed.)
Turn RAD: The turning radius
Time Zone: Time zone
Name: Comment entry column.
The contents of column are changed by left-clicking the [Name] drop-down list
button and then [Name], [WPT to WPT], or [Total].

Name: You can enter a comment.


WPT to WPT: The Name column changes as follows:
CRS: Course to the next WPT
DIST: Distance from waypoint to
waypoint
TTG: Estimated time required from
waypoint to waypoint

Total: The Name column changes as follows:


CRS: Course to the next WPT
DIST: Total distance from waypoint 0
to the specified waypoint
ETA: Total time from waypoint 0 to
the specified waypoint

4-17 4 Route Planning


[Entry example: The route displayed on the chart corresponds to the list data.]

(5) Saving the route file


1) Left-click the [Save] button.
The Save as Route File panel opens.

2) Enter the route file name and comment. Left-click the [OK] button.
3) Left-click the [Close] button.
Close the file. Then, the system exit the Table Editing mode and the list and table editing buttons
are cleared from the screen.
The route file can be edited even after it is saved.

Note:
The route cannot be created if the GC leg extends over 120 and more in longitudinal
direction.

4 Route Planning 4-18


How to edit in the Table Editing Menu:

Left-click WPT No. 2, for example, and then left-click the [Insert] button.

In the context menu


Right-click on the table and it selected [Insert WPT] from the context menu for
Table Editor.
* Even if it right-clicks on the chart, a context menu for Table Editor isn't displayed.
Then, the new WPT will be added to the WPT No. 2, and the W002 and later
WPTs will move by one line downwardly.

ECDIS

WPT can be made up to 511.

Left-click W002, for example, and then left-click the [Delete] button.
In the context menu
Right-click on the table and it selected [Delete WPT] from the context menu for
Table Editor.
* Even if it right-clicks on the chart, a context menu for Table Editor isn't displayed.
Then, the W002 is deleted and W003 and later WPTs will move by one line
upwardly.

4-19 4 Route Planning


How to edit in the Table Editing Menu: -- Continued:

After entering WPT(s), left-click the [Safety Check] button to check the safety.
The Route Warning Check panel opens.
Left-click Select Leg or All Leg and left click the
[OK] button. (When you use Select Leg, you
should select a WPT to be checked beforehand.)
The Safety Check function checks not only the
displayed chart but also all-scale S-57/C-MAP
charts that cross the route to be checked.
If there are no safety issues, the following messages are displayed in the [Route
Check] result display box.

[For Select Leg ]

[For All Leg ]

Note:
In case of C-Map(Dynamic License), credit decrease for access charts under
the route when Safety Check.

4 Route Planning 4-20


How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:

If the following message is displayed, you should modify the route.


The leg warned is displayed in red in the table. The leg is displayed in red on the
chart.
And dangerous objected is emphasized in black color.

ECDIS

Shown in red

Shown in red

You can make a route while watching the WPT on the chart. For example, above
chart is made with the [View SYNC] button left-clicked to set it ON.

Left-click to check if the route exceeds the limit (leg length, etc.).
This button is available
for TCS mode only.

4-21 4 Route Planning


How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:

1) Left-click the WPT with GC leg you want to divide in the WPT table.
In the Table Editing Button
Select [Divide] Button in that order.
In the context menu
Right-click on the table and it selected [Divide] from the context menu
for Table Editor.
* Even if it right-clicks on the chart, a context menu for Table Editor isn't
displayed.
(When you want to divide the leg between W002 and W003, select
W003.)
Then, the Divide Route W002 to W003 panel will open.

Every (Lon): Divides the GC leg every specified longitude value.


Every: Divides the GC leg every specified distance.
2) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Then, the leg is divided according to the setting. (Note that the divided leg
type is changed from GC to RL.)

WPT can be made up to 511.

4 Route Planning 4-22


How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:
[Before dividing]

ECDIS

[After dividing]

4-23 4 Route Planning


How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:

[Before dividing RL leg]

After dividing]

4 Route Planning 4-24


How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:

[Editing the Course and Distance in the WPT to WPT display mode]

In the Table Editing mode, left-click the following drop-down list button and select
[WPT to WPT]. You can edit the values of CRS (Course to the next WPT) and
DIST (Distance to the next WPT) columns.

ECDIS

Example:
In the following example, the Cse and Dist for the W001 are modified. As a
result, the position of the W002 changes according to this modification. Since the
position of the W002 changes, the Cse and Dist values of W002 for W003 also
change.

W002 (After modification)

W003

W001

W002 (Before modification)

[Editing the ETA in the Total display mode]

In the Table Editing mode, left-click the following drop-down list button and select
[Total]. You can edit the value of ETA (Estimated time of arrival to the WPT from
W000) column.

When you edit the WPTns ETA, the ETA and ETD of W000 to WPTn-1 are
calculated based on the WPTns ETA, and the calculated ETA values are
displayed in the table.

4-25 4 Route Planning


How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:

[Sort Reversely] In the Table Editing mode


Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Sort Reversely] in that order.
Then, the WPTs in the list and chart are displayed in the reverse order.

Before reverse sorting

After reverse sorting

4 Route Planning 4-26


How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:

It changes to Graphic Editor from Table Editor when clicking this button.

In the following cases, the route is continued after change to Graphic Editor
mode.
When editing the route.
When opening the created route.
Editorial contents and a file name and so on are taken over to "Graphic Editor".

ECDIS

4-27 4 Route Planning


4.1.2.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Table Editor)
This explanation is made according to (2) Editing the route file (Table Editor) in 4.1.2.3 Operation
Flowchart for Table Editor.

(1) Unloading the selected route before starting


Before starting, left-click the ROUTE drop-down button on the
display panel, and then left-click the [UNLOAD] to clear any
route on the screen.
You can also unload the selected route by the following menu operation.

(2) Entering the Table Editing mode


1) On the operation panel
Press the [ROUTE PLAN] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] - [(1) Table Editor] in that order.
- When you open the Table Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of
screen.
Then, the Table Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click any position on the chart.
[Table Editing Menu]

(3) Selecting the route file


1) To select the route file, left-click the [Open] button.
In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(2) Open] in that order.
The Open Route File panel opens.

2) Select a route file you want to edit, and left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the selected file opens on the screen.
Now you can edit the file in the same way as when you make a new route file.

4 Route Planning 4-28


(4) Saving the route file
When saving without changing the file name:
1) Left-click the [Save] button.
In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(4) Save] in that order.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Table Editing mode.

When saving as the new file:


1) In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in the order.
The Save as Route File panel opens.
2) Enter the new file name and comment, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel. ECDIS

If you want to change the route type, change it to another one. For detailed description, see
(5) Saving the route file in 4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor).
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the file.

4.1.2.6 Importing Route Files


(1) Importing Normal Route Files
Import normal route files that were exported from this equipment.
In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(1) Normal] in that order.
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. Only routes having a file
name starting with rot_ can be selected. The name of the file to be opened will be displayed in
the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button to start file import (for route
export, see 4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files).

CSV format:
For each WPT of a route, a file containing a data row is created. Data are divided by a comma in this
file. You can use Microsoft EXCEL to edit this file.

4-29 4 Route Planning


(2) Importing Route Files Created with Other ECDIS Models (2G TCS)
Import CSV format route files created with other models ECDIS (JAN-3598), Total Navigator
(JAN-1290, JAN-1397), Chart Display Unit (JAN-1100) we offer.
To convert route files into CSV format, conversion software should be procured separately.
In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(3) 2G TCS] in that order.
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. The name of the file to be
opened will be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button
to start file import.

-
Note:
Use routes based on the world geodesic system (WGS-84).

4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files


Save newly created route files or already opened route files in CSV format.
In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Export] in that order.
Then, use the Save As panel to select the name of a file to be exported. If a route file to be
exported already has a name, save it as rot_[date and time].csv. If you wish to change the file name,
follow the naming rules such as rot_[date and time].csv (normal route). Left-click on the [OK] button
to save the route file under the name displayed in the file name box.

Example:
When exporting a file test.rtn, its
name will be set to rot_[date and
time].csv.

4 Route Planning 4-30


Note:
Do not use exported routes in systems other than the world geodesic system (WGS-84).
In the following case, Export becomes invalid.
When not creating more than two WPT by New
In case of not opening a route

ECDIS

4-31 4 Route Planning


4.1.3 Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor
The order of explanation here is as follows:
About the Graphic Editing mode
Graphic editing menu and button functions
Operation flowchart
Detailed operation
The route you have made with the Graphic Editor can be edited with the Table Editor.

Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84).


Use of routes edited with any other geodetic systems may cause accidents.

The file operation using [New], [Open], [Save] and [Close] button is the same as for Table Editor. In the
Graphic Editor, you can make a route graphically by positioning the WPTs. The position
(latitude/longitude) of the cursor is shown on the bottom of the display panel for your reference. After you
have entered the WPT, you can move the WPT with the [Move] button or edit the WPT position with the
[Info] button. Also, the route you have made can be edited with the Table Editor.
For positioning the WPTs, you can also use the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation panel.

4.1.3.1 Graphic Editing Mode


In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] - [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.
The Graphic Editing screen as shown below will open.
On this screen you can make or edit the route graphically.

[Graphic Editing Screen]

How to open the Graphic Editing Menu:


Rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of screen in the Graphic Editing mode will open the
special menu for Graphic Editor.

4 Route Planning 4-32


How to exit the graphic editing mode:
Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the Graphic Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit from
Route Planning] in that order.

How to print the WPT table contents (only when a printer is connected):
Open the route file (WPT table) to be printed, and left-click the [Print] button. Alternatively, in the
Graphic Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(7) Print WPT] in that order.

4.1.3.2 Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic


Editor)
(1) Graphic editing menu ECDIS

The following shows each menu in the Graphic Editing mode:

Table 4.2 Graphic Editing Menu Tree


Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Reference
(1) File (1) New 4.1.3.4
(2) Open 4.1.3.5
(3) Import (1) Normal 4.1.3.6
(2) TCS 4.1.3.6
(3) 2G TCS 4.1.3.6
(4) Save 4.1.3.5
(5) Save as 4.1.3.5
(6) Export 4.1.3.7
(7) Print WPT 4.1.3.1
(0) Exit from Route Planning 4.1.3.1
(2) Edit (1) Use EBL/VRM 4.1.3.8
(2) Use Assistant-Circle 4.1.3.4
(3) Divide Leg
(4) Sort Reversely 4.1.3.4
(3) AIS/TT (1) TT1 3.3.9.1
(2) TT2 3.3.9.1
(3) AIS 3.3.9.1
(4) All 3.3.9.1
(5) Deactive All AIS 3.3.9.7
(6) All List 3.3.9.2
(7) Select List 3.3.9.8
(8) Target Track (1) Target Track Setting 3.3.9.3
(2) File Operation 3.3.9.4
(9) Own Ships AIS Data 3.3.9.2
(1) Message (1) Addressed Message 3.3.9.5
(2) Broadcast Message 3.3.9.5
(0) AIS Sentence (1) VDM 3.3.9.6
(2) TTD1 3.3.9.6
(3) TTD2 3.3.9.6
(0) AIS/TT Setting 3.34.1
(0) Association Setting 3.34.2
(4) Route (3) Distance Measurement 3.12.2
(5) View Ships Parameter 4.1.1
(0) Setting 4.1.1

4-33 4 Route Planning


Table 4.2 Graphic Editing Menu Tree -- Continued
Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Reference
(5) Chart (1) Marking/Highlighting (1) Event Mark 3.19.1
(2) Information Mark 3.19.2
(3) Tidal Stream Mark 3.19.3
(4) Highlight 3.19.4
(5) Delete Event Mark 3.19.1
(2) Off Center (1) Enter Position 3.4.5
(2) Home 3.4.1
(3) User Setting (1) Save My Port List 3.8.1
(2) My Port List 3.8.2
(3) Save Chart Setting 3.29.3
(4) Chart Setting List 3.29.4
(4) Select S-57 Chart 3.9
(5) Fix View 3.7.3
(6) Accept S-57 Updates 3.31
(4) ARCS (1) Temporary and Preliminary 3.10.8
(2) Adjust Datum Offset 3.10.9
(3) Datum Transformation 3.10.9
(0) Setting (1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS 3.29.1
(2) Other Chart 3.29.2
(6) Main (1) Maneuver Curve
3.20
/Remove Maneuver Curve
(2) Cross Bearing 3.21
(3) Create Clearing Line (1) Not Less Than 3.22
(2) Not More Than 3.22
(4) LOP 3.23
(5) Print 3.37
(6) Save Screen 3.38
(9) Radar Overlay (1) Radar1 3.3.8
(2) Radar2 3.3.8
(3) Range Rings 3.3.8
(4) Bearing Scale 3.3.8
(0) Setting 7.11
(3) Test (1) Alarm Log 3.3.7
(2) System Information 7.2
(3) Operating Time 7.3
(0) Setting (1) Color and Brilliance Setting 7.6
(2) Option Key Setting 7.7
(3) Date/Time Setting 7.8
(4) Marker Setting 3.16.2.1
(6) Voyage Distance Clear 7.9
(7) Display Panel Setting 3.25
(8) Alarm Setting 7.10
(0) Buzzer Volume 3.3.5

4 Route Planning 4-34


Context Menu
Right-clicking when editing a graphic will display a shortcut menu. One of the menus below will
be displayed, depending on the operation state when right clicking.

ECDIS

(It is set to some cursor mode.) (A cursor mode is not set.)

Context Menu (The item which is common with the other operation)
Main Menu Submenu Reference
Abort 3.1.1.3
S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information 3.13
Other Information 3.13
Zoom Area 3.5.1
Dropped EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 3.16.2.2
EBL2/VRM2 3.16.2.2
EBL1 3.16.2.3
EBL2 3.16.2.3
VRM1 3.16.2.4
VRM2 3.16.2.4
Move Origin1 3.16.2.5
Move Origin2 3.16.2.5
CCRP EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 3.16.2.6
EBL2/VRM2 3.16.2.6
EBL1 3.16.2.7
EBL2 3.16.2.7
VRM1 3.16.2.8
VRM2 3.16.2.8
Running Fix / Remove Running Fix 3.17
High Resolution Area 3.10.1
Load Low Resolution 3.10.6
Select Chart Under Cursor 3.10.3
Change Active Panel 3.10.5
Note and Diagram 3.10.8

4-35 4 Route Planning


(2) Button functions

Left-click to exit the Graphic Editing mode.

Left-click when making a new route file.

Left-click to select a route file previously made.

Left-click when saving the route file currently made.

Left-click when printing the WPT contents. (Only when connected to a


printer)

Left-click when adding a WPT to the W000 or the to the last WPT.

Left-click when inserting a WPT in the course of the route.


Left-click when moving a WPT.

Left-click when deleting a WPT.

Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected WPT or leg.

Left-click to check if the route exceeds the limit (leg length, etc.).
This button is available for TCS mode only.

It shifts to Table Editor.


When editing a route, the editing can be continued on Table Editor.

4 Route Planning 4-36


4.1.3.3 Operation Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing)
The following shows the general flowchart for planning a route using the Graphic Editor.
File opening and saving operation differs depending on whether you make a new route file or you select a
route file previously made, though the graphic editing operation is the same.
The file opening and saving operation is the same as when using the Table Editor.

(1) Making a new route file (Graphic Editor)

: The same procedure as for the Table Editor.


Start

ECDIS

Clear any route if Left-click to select [UNLOAD].


displayed.

Enter the Graphic In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] -
Editing mode. [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.

Open a new route file.


Left-click [New].

Graphic editing operation

W000 entry
(using the cursor)

Next WPT entry


(using the cursor)

Repeat WPT entry


until the final WPT.

Left-click [Save]

Enter the file name.

Left-click [Close] Exits the Graphic Editing mode.

End

4-37 4 Route Planning


(2) Editing the route file (Graphic Editor)

Start : The same procedure as for the Table Editor.

Clear any route if Left-click [UNLOAD].


displayed.

Enter the Graphic In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] -
Editing mode. [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.

Left-click [Open]. Select a route file you want to edit.

Select route type.

Graphic editing operation

Edit the WPT.

When you want to change the file name.

Left-click [Save as]


Left-click [Save] To save without chang- in the menu.
ing the file name.
Enter the new file
name.

Left-click [Close] Exits the Graphic Editing mode.

End

4 Route Planning 4-38


4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing)
This explanation is made according to (1) Making a new route file (Graphic Editor) in 4.1.3.3 Operation
Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing).

(1) Unloading the selected route before starting


Before starting, left-click the ROUTE drop-down button on the
display panel, and then left-click the [UNLOAD] to clear any
route on the screen.

(2) Entering the Graphic Editing mode


1) In the normal menu
ECDIS
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] - [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.

When you open the Graphic Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part
of screen.
Then, the Graphic Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click any position on the chart.

[Graphic Editing Menu]

(3) Opening a new route file


1) To make a new route file, left-click the [New] button.
In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(1) New] in that order.

How to save the route:


The route file saving operation is exactly the same as for Table Editor.
See (5) Saving the route file in 4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor).

4-39 4 Route Planning


(4) Making a route
Making a route using buttons on the screen:
The following shows the way how to make a route using the buttons on the screens. (You can mix
the EBL/VRM operation with this button operation. See 4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM
Keys and Dials.) Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display
panel.

Note:
If [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is on (with a checkmark), operation using EBL/VRM is to be performed.
If [(2) Use Assistant Circle] is on, operation using supplemental lines is to be performed. To
turn on/off each item, select the menu. Operation using EBL/VRM and operation using
supplemental lines cannot be turned on at the same time.
While [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is on, turning on [(2) Use Assistant Circle] turns on operation using
supplemental lines. Conversely, while [(2) Use Assistant Circle] is on, turning on [(1) Use
EBL/VRM] turns on operation using EBL/VRM.

4 Route Planning 4-40


1) Entering WPTs:
Left-click at the WPT (W000) position and rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the next
WPT (W001).
Then, left-click there.

[W000fixing/W000 to W001] [W001 fixing]

ECDIS

[W001 to W002] [W002 fixing]

4-41 4 Route Planning


How to shift the chart during entering WPTs:
Left-click on the chart and hold the button down, and then move the cursor to scroll the chart
while entering WPTs.

2) Terminating WPT entry:


Left-click twice quickly to terminate WPT entry. (You can also terminate the operation by
selecting [Abort] in the shortcut menu after right-clicking.)

[Left-clicking twice quickly to stop entry] [The route you have entered]

Note:
If a waypoint is located in a position other than an active chart when using ARCS and if another
panel exists at that position, then the panel display will change automatically.

Creating routes using EBL/VRM:


In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(1) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.
The EBL/VRM intersection becomes an entering position instead of a cursor.

Entering position

Line drawn from


the previous WPT

First, left-click on the center of Then, decide where the EBL/VRM


EBL/VRM. intersection will be and left-click on it.

4 Route Planning 4-42


Creating routes using Assistant Circle:
In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Use Assistant Circle] in that order.
WPT input using a supplemental line is enabled.

1) W000 input
Move the cursor to an arbitrary position, and left-click. A supplemental line from the own
ships position will be displayed. Move the trackball to move the intersection between the
circles radius and supplemental line to W000, and left-click.

ECDIS

Cursor Supplemental line

Supplemental line W000 W000

This circle is not displayed in actual operation.

4-43 4 Route Planning


2) Specify the center of the circle, and left-click.

W000
Supplemental line

This circle is not displayed in actual operation.

3) Move the trackball to specify the contact with the circles radius, and left-click. The
intersection between the circle and supplemental line will be entered as a WPT.

W001
Supplemental line
W000

This circle is not displayed in actual operation.

4 Route Planning 4-44


How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu:

Deleting the WPT:


1) Left-click the [Delete WPT] button.
2) Left-click a WPT you want to delete. Then, the selected WPT is deleted.

[Select W003.] [W003 is deleted.]

ECDIS

Adding a WPT to the W000 or to the last WPT:


1) Left-click the [Add] button
2) Left-click the W000 or the last WPT. and rotate the trackball to move the
cursor for additional WPT. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WPT.

[Select W002 (the last WPT).] [W003 is added.]

4-45 4 Route Planning


How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu -- Continued:

Moving a WPT (other than W000 and the last WPT):


1) Left-click the [Insert/Move WPT] button.
2) Left-click a WPT you want to move.and rotate the trackball to move the cursor
for moving the WPT. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WPT.

[Select W002.] [Move W002.]

[W002 is moved.]

4 Route Planning 4-46


How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu -- Continued:

Inserting a new WPT between WPTs:


1) Left-click the [Insert/Move WPT] button
2) Left-click the leg you want to insert a new WPT there. and rotate the
trackball to insert a new WPT. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WPT. A new
WPT is inserted and the number of the later WPTs is increased by 1.

[Select the leg.] [Make a new WPT.]

ECDIS

[New WPT is inserted as W002.]

4-47 4 Route Planning


How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu -- Continued:

Designating coordinates by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance:


Positions can be designated by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance instead of
left-clicking on the chart to designate a coordinate when entering, moving, inserting and adding route.

Designating coordinates by entering position


1) Make sure the system will accept cursor designation of coordinates when entering, moving,
inserting and adding route. (Make sure that the cursor has changed to the cursor type on
the chart.)

2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Lat/Lon] from the shortcut menu.
The Enter Position panel opens.

3) Enter the position (longitude and latitude), then left-click the [Enter] button the position is
designated..
Left-click the [Close] button the panel is closed.

Designating coordinates by entering bearing/distance


1) Make sure the system will accept cursor designation of coordinates when entering, moving,
inserting and adding route. (Make sure that the cursor has changed to the cursor type
on the chart.)

2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Bearing/Distance] from the shortcut menu.
The Bearing/Distance panel opens.

3) Enter the bearing and distance from the previous way point, then left-click the [Enter] button.
the position is designated.
Left-click the [Close] button the panel is closed.

Note:
When entering the second way point of a route, the bearing and distance are those from the
previous way point. The shortcut menus cannot be used when designating coordinates that do
not require relative positions, such as the first way point of route.

4 Route Planning 4-48


How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu -- Continued:

Displaying/Modifying information of WPT or leg:


1) Left-click the [Property] button.
2) Left-click the WPT.
When WPT is selected, [Edit Waypoint] panel opens, while [Edit leg 1] panel
opens when Leg is selected.
Enter the value if you want to change. You can enter a name for the WPT. If
you want to return each value to the default value, left-click the [Default]
button. (The default value is set in the Route Plan Option panel. See 4.1.1
Setting the Route Options.) After setting, left-click the [OK] button to close
the panel. ECDIS

[Information for WPT.]

[Information for Leg.]

4-49 4 Route Planning


How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu -- Continued:

It changes to Graphic Editor from Table Editor when clicking this button.

In the following cases, the route is continued after change to Graphic Editor mode.
When editing the route.
When opening the created route.

[Sort Reversely]

In the Graphic Editing mode


Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Sort Reversely] in that order.
Then, the WPT is in the list and chart are displayed in the reverse order.

4 Route Planning 4-50


4.1.3.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor)
This explanation is made according to (2) Editing the route file (Graphic Editor) in 4.1.3.3 Operation
Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing).

(1) Unloading the selected route before starting


Before starting, left-click the ROUTE drop-down button on the
display panel, and then left-click the [UNLOAD] to clear any
route on the screen.

(2) Entering the Graphic Editing mode


1) In the normal menu
ECDIS
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(1) Route Planning] - [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.

- When you open the Graphic Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper
part on screen.
Then, the Graphic Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click any position on the chart.

[Graphic Editing Menu]

(3) Selecting the route file


1) To select the route file, left-click the [Open] button.
In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(2) Open] in that order.
The Open Route File panel opens.

2) Select a route file you want to edit, and left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the selected file opens on the screen. Now you can edit the file in the same way as when
you make a new route file.

4-51 4 Route Planning


(4) Saving the route file
When saving without changing the file name:
1) Left-click the [Save] button.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Graphic Editing mode.

When saving as the new file:


1) In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in the order.
The Save as Route File panel opens.
2) Enter the new file name and comment, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the file.

4.1.3.6 Importing Route Files


(1) Importing Normal Route Files
Import CSV format normal route files that were exported from this equipment.
In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(1) Normal] in that order.
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. Only routes having a file
name starting with rot_ can be selected. The name of the file to be opened will be displayed in
the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button to start file import (for route
export, see 4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files).

4 Route Planning 4-52


(2) Importing Route Files Created with Other ECDIS Models (2G TCS)
Import CSV format route files created with other models ECDIS (JAN-3598), Total Navigator
(JAN-1290, JAN-1397), Chart Display Unit (JAN-1100) we offer.
In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(3) 2G TCS] in that order
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. The name of the file to be
opened will be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Press the [OK] button to start
file import.

ECDIS

Note:
Use routes based on the world geodesic system (WGS-84).

4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files


Save newly created route files or already opened route files in CSV format.
In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Export] in that order.
Then, use the Save As panel to select the name of a file to be exported. If a route file to be exported
already has a name, save it as rot_[date and time].csv. If you wish to change the file name, follow the
naming rules such as rot_[date and time].csv (normal route). Left-click on the [OK] button to save the
route file under the name displayed in the file name box.

Example:
When exporting a file test.rtn,
its name will be set to rot_[date and
time].csv.

Note:
Do not use exported routes in systems other than the world geodesic system (WGS-84).

4-53 4 Route Planning


4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and
Dials
The following shows the way how to make a route using the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation
panel. (You can mix the EBL/VRM operation with the button operation on the screen mentioned earlier.)

Note:
Before starting, be sure that [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is set to ON.
If not,
In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(1) Use EBL/VRM] in that order to set it ON.

Be sure that the check mark is attached.

The EBL cursor is displayed on the screen. (The cursor type changes when [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is
set to ON.) Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display panel.

1) Press the [EBL1], [EBL2], [VRM1], or [VRM2] key on the operation panel.

2) Move the cursor to the voluntary point. (e.g. cape) and left-click there.

Left-click

Line drawn from own ship

4 Route Planning 4-54


3) Turn the EBL/VRM dial to move the point of intersection to the planned W000, and left-click
there.

Left-click

ECDIS

4) Move the cursor to the voluntary point. (e.g. cape) and left-click there.
(A line will be drawn through the W000 and EBL/VRM intersection.)

(This circle is not displayed.)


(This circle is not displayed.)

Left-click

4-55 4 Route Planning


5) Turn the EBL/VRM dial to move the point of intersection to the next WPT (W001), and left-click
there.

(This circle is not displayed.)

Left-click

Green line
Red line
(Starboard side)
(Port side)

6) Follow the steps 4) and 5) until you make the final WPT.

How to Edit the Route:


After pressing the [Add] or [Insert/Move WPT] button on the screen, you can add, move, or insert a
WPT in the same EBL/VRM operation as above.

4 Route Planning 4-56


4.2 Creating an Alternate Route
During voyage only, you can create an alternate route while referring to the current route on the screen.
The alternate route can be saved as a TEMP file, or by naming a new route name.
The alternate route can be created in the same manner as for making a route using the Graphic Editor.
The operation buttons and the special menu for creating an alternate route are exactly the same as those
for the Graphic Editor. So, the same explanation is omitted here. For omitted information, see 4.1.3
Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor. You can use EBL/VRM in the same way as for the Graphic
Editor, though the explanation is omitted here.

Note: ECDIS
Whether the alternate route is replaced with the original route or not depends the saving methods.
- When you left-click the [Save] button and then [Close] button after you made the alternate route,
the original route is replaced with the alternate route. (In this case, the alternate route file name is
TEMP.)
Normally, you will use this method for alternate route.
- When you saved as a new file using the Save as menu, the alternate route is not replaced with
the original route. (For details, see (3) Saving the alternate route file in 4.2.2 Creating
Alternate Route.)

4.2.1 Operation Flowchart


Start

During voyage Be sure that the current route is displayed on the screen.
(Route is displayed.)

Enter Create Alternate In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(2) Create Alternate Route]
Route mode. in that order.

Create the alternate route in the same manner as for the Graphic Editor.
Alternate route To create an alternative route, you will use the following buttons.
making operation

: For [Property] button, see 4.1.3 Route Planning Using


the Graphic Editor.

Left-click the [Save]


button The original route is replaced with the alternate route.
(If you simply want to save the alternate route file and you are not intending to
replace the route, you should use Save as menu. In this case, the original
route remains as it is. For details, see (3) Saving the alternate route file in
4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route.)
Left-click [Close]
Exits the Alternate Route Creating mode.

End

4-57 4 Route Planning


4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route
The following two charts show the original route and the altered route, respectively. You will see that,
during creating alternate route, the alternate route is displayed together with the original route.
In this example, the following WPTs are altered:
Position of W001 (Moved)
W002 (Inserted. So, the number of the later WPTs is increased by 1.)
W006 (Added one WPT to the last WPT.)
You will learn how to accomplish these alterations.

[Original Route]

[Original Route and Created Alternate Route]

W006:
Added to the last WPT.

Alternate Route

W001:
Position changed.

W002:
Inserted.

4 Route Planning 4-58


(1) Alternate Route Editing mode
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Route] - [(2) Create Alternate Route] in that order.
The Alternate Route Editing screen as shown below will open. (This screen is the same as for
Graphic Editor.)

[Alternate Route Editing Screen]

Opening the Alternate Route Editing Menu: ECDIS

On the display panel in the Alternate Route Editing mode


Rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of screen.
The special menu for Alternate Route Editor will open. (This menu is the same as for Graphic
Editor.)

(2) Creating Alternate Route


The following shows the way how to make an alternate route using the buttons on the screens.
(When you use the EBL/VRM on the operation panel, see 4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using
EBL/VRM Keys and Dials.
Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display panel.

Note:
Alternate routes will be displayed in orange so that the modified section can be differentiated from
the original route.

4-59 4 Route Planning


Moving the WPT for Alternate Route:
1) Left-click the [Insert/Move WPT] button.
2) Left-click the WPT and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for moving W001. Then, left-click
to fix the new W001 for the alternate route.
[Select W001.]

[Move W001.]

How to shift the chart during making an


alternate route:
Left-click on the chart and hold the button
down, and then move the cursor to scroll
the chart while creating alternate routes.

[Fix the new W001 for alternate route.]

Alternate route is created. (Orange)

Moved new WPT (W001).

4 Route Planning 4-60


Inserting the WPT for Alternate Route:
1) Left-click the [Insert/Move WPT] button.
2) Left-click the leg between W001 and W002 and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for
inserting a new WPT. Then, left-click to fix the WPT. New W002 is inserted and the number of
the later WPTs is increased by 1.
[Select the leg.]

ECDIS

[Position the new W002.]

[New WPT is inserted as W002.]

Inserted WPT (W002).

4-61 4 Route Planning


Adding the WPT for Alternate Route:
You can add the WPT to the first WPT or to the last WPT.
1) Left-click the [Add] button.
2) Left-click the first WPT or last WPT and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for additional
WPT. Then, left-click to fix the WPT.

[Select the first WPT or last WPT.]

[Position the new first WPT or last WPT.]

[W006 is added as the last

Added WPT (W006).

4 Route Planning 4-62


Deleting the WPT from Alternate Route:
1) Left-click the [Delete WPT] button.
2) Left-click the WPT you want to delete. The selected WPT will be deleted.
(In the example, W002 is deleted. You can also delete any WPT of the alternate route, such as
W003.)
[Select W002.] [W002 is deleted.]

ECDIS

You can use this button to display and edit the selected WPT and leg.
For details, see [Property] button (page 4-50) of (4) Making a route in
4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing).

Sort Reversely of WPTs:


In the Alternate Editing mode
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Sort Reversely] in that order.
Then, the WPTs in the list and chart are displayed in the reverse order.

Safety Check of WPTs:

When checking the safety of the route, click Safety Check button. As a result of the
checking, warning dialog box will appear if the route is not safety.

Limit Check of WPTs:

When checking the Limit of the route, click Limit Check button. As a result of the
checking, warning dialog box will appear when exceeding the demarcation of the sailing
feature of the own ship

4-63 4 Route Planning


(3) Saving the alternate route file

a) When saving without changing the file name ([Save] button):

Note:
In this case, the file is saved as TEMP, and, when you close the file, the alternate route
TEMP becomes the new route. Namely, the original route is replaced with the alternate
route TEMP.

1) Left-click the [Save] button.


Then, the alternate route file is save as TEMP.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Alternate Route Editing mode.
Then, the original route on the screen is replaced with the alternate route TEMP.

b) When saving as the new file ([(5) Save as] menu):

Note:
In this case, the file is saved as the name you given, and, even when you close the file, the
original route is maintained. Namely, the route is not replaced with the alternate route.

1) In the Alternate Route Editing menu


Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save as] in the order.
The Save as Route File panel opens.

2) Enter the file name and comment.


3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
4) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Alternate Route Editing mode.

4 Route Planning 4-64


5
Chart Editing

5-1
This chapter describes how to create user maps and how to manually update charts.

User Map
User map can be created and displayed on other charts. User map information contains various objects
(symbols, lines, areas, and texts). User map can also be edited and updated. Also, you can merge
multiple maps together to create one user map.
The following figures show how to use user map:

Example 1: Example 2: Example 3:

User Map 2 You can merge as


User Map 1 User Map 2
User Map 1 one user map.
Chart Chart
Chart

How to Display the User Map:


To display the user map, see 3.13 Displaying a User Map.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(1) Select User Map] in the order.

Manual Update
Objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts) can be manually updated. When you save data after
manually updating the objects, there will be a panel for you to enter the issue date of a notice to mariners.
Enter the date. You can check the issue dates of a notice to mariners by using S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
information.
Unlike User Map Edit operation, Manual Update operation links objects directly to the chart. Therefore,
the objects updated manually in the chart cannot be deleted as desired, but can only be hidden from the
chart. For the method of hiding the objects, see 0 .
When all the following conditions are met, objects updated manually are deleted automatically from the
chart.
The chart having objects updated manually has been updated in Chart Portfolio.
3 months or more have passed since the chart was updated manually.
The objects to be deleted are hidden from the chart.

Note:
C-MAP charts cannot be updated manually.
The objects updated manually in S-57, S-63 or ARCS chart can be used commonly in those charts.

5 Chart Editing 5-2


5.1 Chart Edit Mode
There are two modes in this Chart Edit mode: User Map Edit mode and Manual Update mode. Follow
the procedure below to start there modes.

User Map Edit mode:


In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(3) User Map Editor] in that order.
A map edit screen as shown below will be displayed. Use this screen to create/edit a user map.

[User Map Editing Screen]

ECDIS

Manual Update mode:


In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(8) Manual Update] in that order.
A chart edit screen similar to the above will be displayed (buttons at the top and the object entering
screen on the left are slightly different). Use this screen to manually update a chart.

How to open the Chart Edit menu:


In User Map Edit mode or Manual Update mode
Rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of screen. The following Chart Edit menu
will be displayed at the top of the screen.

5-3 5 Chart Editing


5.2 Menus and Button Functions
5.2.1 Chart Editing Menu
Menu items available in Chart Edit mode are shown below. The same menu items are displayed in User
Map Edit mode and Manual Update mode, but there will be some special menu items for each mode.

Table 5.1 User Map Editing Menu Tree


Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Reference
(1) File (1) New 5.3.2.1
(2) Open 5.3.2.2
(3) Import (1) CSV file(WGS84) 5.3.2.4
(2) CSV file(TOKYO) 5.3.2.4
(3) OLD Format 5.3.2.4
(4) Export
(5) Save 5.3.2
(6) Save as 5.3.2
(7) Merge 5.3.2.3
(0) Exit from User Map Editor 5.3.2.1
(2) Edit (4) Use EBL/VRM 5.3.2
(0) Setting 5.3.2.5
(3) AIS/TT (1) TT1 3.3.9.1
(2) TT2 3.3.9.1
(3) AIS 3.3.9.1
(4) All 3.3.9.1
(5) Deactive All AIS 3.3.9.7
(6) All List 3.3.9.2
(7) Select List 3.3.9.8
(8) Target Track (1) Target Track Setting 3.3.9.3
(2) File Operation 3.3.9.4
(9) Own Ships AIS Data 3.3.9.4
(1) Message (1) Addressed Message 3.3.9.5
(2) Broadcast Message 3.3.9.5
(0) AIS Sentence (1) VDM 3.3.9.6
(2) TTD1 3.3.9.6
(3) TTD2 3.3.9.6
(0) AIS/TT Setting 3.35.1
(0) Association Setting 3.35.2
(4) Chart (1) Marking/Highlighting (1) Event Mark 3.19.1
(2) Information Mark 3.19.2
(3) Tidal Stream Mark 3.19.3
(4) Highlight 3.19.4
(5) Delete Event Mark 3.19.1
(2) Off Center (1) Enter Position 3.4.5
(2) Home 3.4.1
(3) User Setting (1) Save My Port List 3.8.1

5 Chart Editing 5-4


Table 5.1 User Map Editing Menu Tree -- Continued
Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Reference
(6) Chart (3) User Setting (2) My Port List 3.8.2
(3) Save Chart Setting 3.29.3
(4) Chart Setting List 3.29.4
(4) Select S-57 Chart 3.9
(5) Fix View 3.7.3
(6) Accept S-57 Updates 3.31
(4) ARCS (1) Temporary and Preliminary 3.10.8
(2) Adjust Datum Offset 3.10.9
(3) Datum Transformation 3.10.9
(0) Setting (1) S-57/ C-MAP / ARCS 3.29.1
(2) Other Chart 3.29.2
(5) Main (1) Maneuver Curve
3.20
/Remove Maneuver Curve ECDIS
(2) Cross Bearing 3.21
(3) Create Clearing Line (1) Not Less Than 3.22
(2) Not More Than 3.22
(4) LOP 3.23
(5) Print 3.37
(6) Save Screen 3.38
(9) Radar Overlay (1) Radar1 3.3.8
(2) Radar2 3.3.8
(3) Range Ring 3.3.8
(4) Bearing Scale 3.3.8
(0) Setting 3.34.1
(3) Test (1) Alarm Log 3.3.7
(2) System Information 7.2
(3) Operating Time 7.3
(0) Setting (1) Color and Brilliance Setting 7.6
(2) Option Key Setting 7.7
(3) Date/Time Setting 7.8
(4) Marker Setting 3.16.2.1
(7) Display Panel Setting 3.25
(8) Alarm Setting 7.10
(0) Buzzer Volume 3.3.5
(0) INS Setting

5-5 5 Chart Editing


Shortcut Menus
Shortcut menus are displayed by right-clicking when editing charts. Depending on the cursor type
when right-clicking, one of the following menus will be displayed. See 5.5 Entering Objects for
details on the various cursor types.

Buttons for the same operations:


Move
Delete
Add Vertex
Insert/Move Vertex
Delete Vertex
Property

When not edit mode (Cursor column is displayed nothing)

Enter an object at the designated longitude and latitude.

Designate the bearing and distance from the previous way


point, and enter an object in that position.

When edit mode (Cursor column is displayed operation)

5 Chart Editing 5-6


. Context Menu (The item which is common with the other operation)
Main Menu Submenu Reference
Abort 3.1.1.3
S-57/ C-MAP /ARCS Information 3.14
Other Information 3.14
Zoom Area 3.5.1
Dropped EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 3.16.2.2
EBL2/VRM2 3.16.2.2
EBL1 3.16.2.3
EBL2 3.16.2.3
VRM1 3.16.2.4
VRM2 3.16.2.4
Move Origin1 3.16.2.5
Move Origin2 3.16.2.5
ECDIS
CCRP EBL/VRM EBL1/VRM1 3.16.2.6
EBL2/VRM2 3.16.2.6
EBL1 3.16.2.7
EBL2 3.16.2.7
VRM1 3.16.2.8
VRM2 3.16.2.8
Running Fix / Remove Running Fix 3.17
High Resolution Area 3.10.6
Load Low Resolution 3.10.5
Select Chart Under Cursor 3.10.2
Change Active Panel 3.10.4
Note and Diagram 3.10.7

5-7 5 Chart Editing


5.2.2 Button Functions
In Chart Edit mode, buttons shown below will be displayed at the top of the screen. The same buttons
are used in User Map Edit mode and Manual Update mode, except for one.
[User Map Edit mode]

Left-click on this button to close the file and to exit Map Edit Mode.

During user map edit:



Left-click on this button to create a new user map file.
Left-click on this button to open a created user map (not available during manual

update).

Left-click on this button to save a created user map.

Left-click when moving an object.

Left-click when deleteing an object.

Left-click when adding a segment to the end of the line or a area surrounding

line to the area.

Left-click when inserting a segment into the line.

It deles the part of the object.

Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected object.

[Manual Update mode]


Left-click on this button to close the file and to exit Chart Edit Mode.

During manual update:



Left-click on this button to manually update the objects.
Left-click on this button to open a created user map (not available during manual

update).

Left-click on this button to save the updating chart.

Left-click when moving an object.

Left-click when deleteing an object.

Left-click when adding a segment to the end of the line or an area surrounding line

to the area.

Left-click when inserting a segment into the line..

It deles the part of the object.

Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected object.

5 Chart Editing 5-8


5.3 User Map Editor Operation
This section describes how to edit user maps. For operations in the manual update process, see 5.4
Manual Update Operation.

Files are opened and saved in different ways when you create a new user map file and when you open a
created file. Open/Save a file following the procedure described in the Table/Graphic Editor section of
chapter 4 Route Planning.

5.3.1 Flow of User Map Edit


(1) Creating a new user map file

Start
ECDIS

Start User Map Edit


Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(3) User Map Editor] in that order.
mode.

Left-click on the
Open a new user map file.
[New] button.

Map edit operation

Symbols
Lines See 5.5 Entering Objects .
Areas
Texts

Left-click on the Enter a file name and


[Save] button. a comment.

Select a datum in the


Datum Conversion
panel.

Left-click on the
Exit User Map Edit mode.
[Close] button.

End

5-9 5 Chart Editing


(2) Editing a user map file

Start

Start User Map Edit


Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(3) User Map Editor] in that order.
mode.

Left-click on the
Open user map file you wish to edit.
[Open] button.

Map edit operation

Symbols
Lines See 5.5 Entering Objects.
Areas
Texts

When overwriting When saving under a new file name


Left-click on the
[Save] button. Select [Save as] from
the menu.

Select a datum in the


Datum Conversion
panel.

Left-click on the
Exit User Map Edit mode.
[Close] button.

End

5 Chart Editing 5-10


5.3.2 Operation when Editing User Map
File operations are different when you create a new user map and when you edit an existing user map.
This section describes operations in both cases (descriptions follow 5.3.1 Flow of User Map Edit). This
section also describes how to merge user map and how to import user map files.
Creating a new user map -> See Section 5.3.2.1.
Editing a user map -> See Section 5.3.2.2
Merging user map -> See Section 5.3.2.3
Importing user map -> See Section 5.3.2.4

Note:
The maximum of the object is 20,000. ("Simple Line", "Warning Line", "Polygon", "Warning Area"
counts 1 top as one.) When adding beyond 20000, the "Max Point" notice occurs and it isn't possible
to do the addition of the object.
ECDIS

5.3.2.1 Creating a New User Map


Follow the procedure below to create a new user map.

(1) Entering the Map Editing mode


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(3) User Map Editor] in the order.

How to exit the user map editing mode:


Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the User Map Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit
from User Map Editor] in that order.

- When you open the Map Editing menu, rotate the trackball to move the cursor on upper part of
screen.
Then, the Map Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, or left-click any position on the map.

[Map Editing Menu]

(2) Opening a new user map file


1) Left-click the [New] button.
In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(1) New] in that order.

5-11 5 Chart Editing


(3) Entering objects
1) When you use EBL/VRM to enter objects, make sure that [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is turned on
(checked). If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a map,
In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.
[(4) Use EBL/VRM] is turned off (remove a checkmark).

If using EBL/VRM: Check it.


If not using EBL/VRM: Uncheck it.

2) Proceed to 5.5 Entering Objects and enter objects.


After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a user map file.

(4) Saving a user map file


1) Left-click the [Save] button.
In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save], [(6) Save as] in that order.
The Save as panel opens.

2) Enter the file name (up to 8 characters) and comment.

5 Chart Editing 5-12


3) Left-click the [SAVE] button to close the panel.
Then, the Datum Conversion panel opens.
Select [Select Datum] or [Enter Offset] to execute datum conversion or offset entering.

Select Datum:
ECDIS
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum].
Enter Offset:
You can give offset to the object by entering the offset value (latitude/longitude).
4) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
5) Left-click the [Close] button.
Then, the system exit the User Map Editing mode.

(5) Exiting the User Map Editing mode


1) Click the [Close] button to exit the mode.
2) When you are not operating in the editing, this editor is closed and changed to normal mode.
3) When you are operating in the editing, the confirmation dialog is displayed.

It returns to the edit-display.

It changes to the save operation. User Map Editor is closed and


(See (4) Saving a user map file) editing contents is canceled.

5-13 5 Chart Editing


5.3.2.2 Editing a User Map
Follow the procedure below to edit an existing user map.

(1) Starting User Map Editing mode


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) User Map] - [(3) User Map Editor] in that order.

(2) Opening a user map file


1) Left-click on the [Open] button.
In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(2) Open] in that order.
The Open Chart File panel will be displayed.
2) Select the name of a file you wish to open, and then left-click on the [OK] button.
The selected user map file will be displayed.

(3) Entering objects


1) When you use EBL/VRM to enter objects, make sure that [(4) Use EBL/VRM] is turned on
(checked). If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a map,
In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.
[(4) Use EBL/VRM] is turned off (remove a checkmark).

If using EBL/VRM: Check it.


If not using EBL/VRM: Uncheck it.

2) Proceed to 5.5 Entering Objects and enter objects.


After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a user map file.

5 Chart Editing 5-14


(4) Saving a user map file
When saving a file without changing its file name (using the [Save] button):
1) Left-click on the [Save] button.
In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save] in that order.
2) Left-click on the [Close] button to exit User Map Edit mode.

When saving a file under a different name (using the [(6) Save As] menu):
1) In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Save As] in that order.
The Save as panel will be displayed.

ECDIS

2) Enter a file name (using up to 8 characters) and a comment.


3) Left-click on the [SAVE] button. The panel closes.
The Datum Conversion panel opens.
Select [Select Datum] or [Enter Offset] to execute datum conversion or offset entering.

[Select Datum]:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum].
[Enter Offset]:
You can specify offset (latitude/longitude) of the object and move the object.
4) Left-click on the [OK] button. The panel closes.
5) Left-click on the [Close] button
User Map Edit mode ends.

5-15 5 Chart Editing


5.3.2.3 Merging User Maps
You can merge the user maps as follows:

1) Make a new user map file or recall a user map file.


(For example, recall User-01 file.)
2) In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(7) Merge] in that order.
The Open Chart File panel opens.
3) Left-click the file you want to merge with the User-01 file (for example, User-02), and then
left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
You will see that both objects of the User-01 and User-02 files are shown on the screen.
4) Left-click the [Save] button to save without changing the file name (User-01).
If you want to save as the new file,
In the User Map Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Save As] in that order.
5) Left-click the [Close] button.
Then, the system exits the User Map Editing mode.

User Map "USER-02" You can merge as one


user map.
User Map "USER-01"

User Map

5 Chart Editing 5-16


5.3.2.4 Importing User Maps
User map files can be imported and used.

1) In the User Map Editing menu


Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] in that order.

And select a file format to be used at the destination.


- CSV file (WGS-84)
Select this when importing user map data created with the WGS-84 geodetic system.
- CSV file (TOKYO)
Select this when importing user map data, created with the Japanese geodetic system, as
WGS-84 geodetic system data.

ECDIS

The Open panel will be displayed.

2) Select a file you wish to import, and then left-click on the [OK] button.
The selected user map will be displayed on the screen.

Note:
When importing, MIN Scale of import object is set to 1/1000000 and MAX Scale is set to
1/4000000.

5-17 5 Chart Editing


5.3.2.5 User Map Setting
The initial setting when adding an object in editing can be changed.

1) In the User Map Editing menu


Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Editor Setting panel will be displayed.

Range of scale to display the object:


Minimum Scale / Maximum Scale

The setting of the color:


Symbol Color / Text Color / Line Color
The kind of the color: Black, Red, Green, Blue,
Amber, Orange, Purple, Yellow.

The thickness of the line: Five kinds

The style of the line:


Solid line, Broken line, Dotted line.

The setting of a filling color in Area:


The kind of the color: Black, Red, Green, Blue,
Amber, Orange, Purple, Yellow.
The kind of transparency: 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%.

The set to size of the font:


Small Font / Large Font
The size of the font: 6pts - 72pts

To fix setting, click this button.

If you want to cancel the operation and close


the dialog, click this button.

To fix setting and close dialog, click this button.

Note:
The following object is always displayed in the red regardless of "Editor Setting".
Symbol - Warning" : Symbol Color
Line - "Warning Line" : Line Color
Area - "Warning Area" : Line Color, Fill Color

"Warning Line" object displays a unique line irrespective of the setting of Line Width and
Line Style.

5 Chart Editing 5-18


5.4 Manual Update Operation
This section describes manual update operations. For operations in the user map edit process, see 5.3
Operation Flowchart When manually updating the objects, there will be a panel for you to enter the
issue date of a notice to mariners. Enter the date. When certain conditions, such as period that
passed since the manual update, are met (see page 5-2), the entered objects are deleted automatically
from the chart.

5.4.1 Flow of Manual Update


Start

Start Manual Update In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(8) Manual UpDate] in
ECDIS
mode. that order.

Left-click on the
[Start] button.

Left-click on a chart
[Example]
you wish to edit.

Chart edit operation

Symbols
Lines See 5.5 Entering Objects.
Areas
Texts

Left-click on the
[Save] button

Select a datum in the


Datum Conversion
panel.

Enter the issue date of


a notice to mariners.

Left-click on the
Exit Manual Update mode.
[Close] button.

End

5-19 5 Chart Editing


5.4.2 Operation when Manually Updating Objects
This section describes operations in the manual update procedure (descriptions follow 5.4.1 Flow of
Manual Update).

Note:
The maximum of the object is 20,000. (On "Polygon" object, "Warning Area" object and Line Object
except for "Arc", it counts 1 top as one.) When adding beyond 20,000, the "Max Point" notice occurs
and it isn't possible to do the addition of the object.

(1) Starting Manual Update mode


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(8) Manual UpDate] in that order.

- Left-click on the [MENU] button on the display panel to open the Chart Edit menu.
The Chart Edit menu will be displayed at the top of the screen. Left-click on the [MENU] button
again or left-click anywhere on the chart to close the menu window.

[Chart Edit menu]

(2) Selecting a chart to be edited


1) Left-click on the [Start] button.
The Information panel will be displayed. Left-click on the [OK] button so that the panel
closes.

2) Left-click on the chart you wish to edit.


A panel showing the chart name will be displayed. Left-click on the [OK] button so that the
panel closes (as shown below).

Note:
When you click the [Start] button in the editing, the following operation is done.
When not editing, the new operation becomes beginning.
When editing, confirmation dialog "Save Change to ****?" is displayed.
Yes: It shifts to the save operation.
No: It cancels update contents, and new operation
becomes beginning.
Cancel: It closes a dialog and returns to edit operation.

5 Chart Editing 5-20


(3) Entering Objects
1) When you use EBL/VRM to enter objects, make sure that [(4) Use EBL/VRM] is turned on
(checked). If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a chart, then turn [(4) Use EBL/VRM] off
(remove a checkmark) by selecting [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.

If using EBL/VRM: Check it.


If not using EBL/VRM: Uncheck it.

2) Proceed to 5.5 Entering Objects and enter objects.


After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a Manual Update
file.
ECDIS

(4) Saving a Manual Update


1) Left-click on the [Save] button.
In the Manual Update Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save] in that order.
The Datum Conversion panel opens.
Select [Select Datum] or [Enter Offset] to execute datum conversion or offset entering.
Normally, conversion of geodesic systems is not necessary.

[Select Datum]:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum]. Normally,
conversion of geodesic systems is not necessary.
[Enter Offset]:
You can specify offset (latitude/longitude) of the object and move the object.
2) Left-click on the [OK] button. The panel closes.
The Notices to Mariners panel opens.
Enter the issue date of a notice to mariners.

3) Left-click on the [OK] button. The panel closes.


4) Left-click on the [Close] button.
Manual Update mode ends.

5-21 5 Chart Editing


Tips! (How to check dates of issue of a notice to mariners for entered objects)
You can use the Object Information panel to check the dates of issue of a notice to mariners for
entered objects.
In the normal menu
It right-clicks a screen and it chooses [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] from Context Menu..
The object information will be retrieved. Entered dates of the objects will be displayed.

Display example

5 Chart Editing 5-22


5.4.2.1 Manual Update Setting
The initial setting when adding an object in editing can be changed.

1) In the Manual Update Editing menu


Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
The Editor Setting panel will be displayed.

The setting of the color:


Symbol Color (General Symbol) / Text Color /
Line Color (General Line and area)
The kind of the color: Black, Red, Green, Blue,
Amber, Orange, Purple, Yellow.

The thickness of the line: Five kinds ECDIS

The style of the line:


Solid line, Broken line, Dotted line.

The setting of a filling color in Area:


The kind of the color: Black, Red, Green, Blue,
Amber, Orange, Purple, Yellow.
The kind of transparency: 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%.

The set to size of the font:


Small Font / Large Font
The size of the font: 6pts - 72pts

To fix setting, click this button.

If you want to cancel the operation and close


the dialog, click this button.

To fix setting and close dialog, click this button.

Note:
Editor Setting is applied to the following item.
Symbol Color: "General" category in "Symbol" tab. (Except for "Warning")
Text Color: All symbol in "Text" tab.
Line Color: "General" category in "Line" tab and All symbol of "Area"tab. (Except for "Warning
Line" and "Warning Area"; displaying red)
Line Width, Line Style: "General" category in "Line" tab and All symbol of "Area" tab. (Except
for "Warning Line" )
Fill Color: All symbol of "Area" tab. (Except for "Warning Area" )
Transparency: All symbol of "Area" tab.
Font Size (Small): "Small Font" in "Text" tab.
Font Size (Large): "Large Font" in "Text" tab.

5-23 5 Chart Editing


5.5 Entering Objects
This section describes how to enter objects. Basic operations are the same in User Map Edit and
Manual Update modes. There are four types of objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts). User Map
Edit mode and Manual Update mode use different symbols and lines.

Object types available for user map edit


[Symbol] Tab [Line] Tab [Area] Tab [Text] Tab

5 Chart Editing 5-24


Object types available for manual update
[Symbol] Tab [Line] Tab [Area] Tab [Text] Tab

ECDIS

5-25 5 Chart Editing


5.5.1 Selecting Object Types
1) Left-click on a tab for the object type (Symbol, Line, Area, and Text) you wish to select.
2) Select the object you want. See How to Select Objects below.
The selected object may be displayed at the bottom part of the object selection panel.
Now you can enter the object you have selected.

How to Select Objects:


You can see the tree structure of the objects on the object
selection panel. For example, to select Light flare, default
symbol of the Barrel buoy, perform as follows.
1) Left-click Buoys twice quickly to open the items 1)
2)
behind it.
3)
2) Left-click Barrel buoy twice quickly to open the items
behind it. (Keep continue this operation until - mark
disappears.)
3) Left-click Light flare, default.
The symbol will appear at the bottom of this panel.
To close Buoys, left-click it twice quickly.

You can also select the item by left-clicking + and -


mark:
Left-clicking + will open the behind items.
Left-clicking - will close the behind items.

5 Chart Editing 5-26


5.5.2 Entering Objects
See the current cursor position displayed at the bottom when entering objects.

(1) How to enter symbols


Putting symbols:
1) Select one of the objects on the symbol selection panel.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Make Map.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor, and left-click at the position you want to put the symbol.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the symbol is added on the chart.
3) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

First entry Second entry

ECDIS

Last entry

Deleting symbols [Delete]:


1) Left-click the [Delete] button.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Delete Map.
2) Left-click the symbol you want to delete.
3) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

Selected symbol

Moving symbols [Move]:


1) Left-click the [Move] button,
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Move Map.
2) Left-click the symbol you want to move.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the symbol is moved to the new position.
4) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

Edit

(When you left-click the cursor.) (When you left-click the cursor.)

5-27 5 Chart Editing


Designating object coordinates by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance:
Positions can be designated by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance instead of
left-clicking on the chart to designate a coordinate when entering, moving, inserting and adding
symbols, lines, areas and text.

Designating coordinates by entering position


1) Make sure the system will accept cursor designation of coordinates when entering, moving,
inserting and adding symbols, lines and areas.

2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Lat/Lon] from the shortcut menu.
The Enter Position panel opens.

3) Enter the position (longitude and latitude), then left-click the [Enter] button the position is
designated..
Left-click the [Close] button the panel is closed.

Designating coordinates by entering bearing/distance


1) Make sure the system will accept cursor designation of coordinates when entering, moving,
inserting and adding objects, lines, areas and text.

2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Bearing/Distance] from the shortcut menu.
The Enter Bearing/Distance panel opens.

3) Enter the bearing and distance from the previous way point, then left-click the [Enter] button
the position is designated...
Left-click the [Close] button the panel is closed.

Note:
When entering the second point of a line or area, the bearing and distance are those from
the previous point. When moving objects, the bearing and distance are those from the
previous position. The shortcut menus cannot be used when designating coordinates that
do not require relative positions, such as symbol and text entering.

5 Chart Editing 5-28


Getting Information and Editing Information (Symbol):
1) Left-click the [Property] button.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Property.
2) Left-click the symbol you want to get information.
The Location/Attributes panel opens.
You can edit the latitude and longitude by entering position LAT and LON.
You can rotate the symbol by entering rotational angle to Rotation.
You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
You can enter a comment.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

ECDIS

Rotated symbol by 90 degrees

Difference in symbol display between User Map Edit mode and Manual Update mode:
Symbols used in the manual update operation will have a mark as shown below. Symbols used in the
user map edit operation will not have this mark.

[Symbols used in the user map edit operation] [Symbols used in the manual update operation]

This mark will be


added.

5-29 5 Chart Editing


Tips!
You can check the current edit mode at Cursor column of upper part of screen.
For example, When displayed [Move map] in Cursor column. It is Move mode.

Hiding objects (only during the manual update operation)


Saved objects can be hidden from the chart. For details, see 5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the
Manual Update Operation).

Using EBL/VRM on the operation panel:


You can use the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation panel when positioning an object or
drawing a line. When using EBL/VRM, see 4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials.
When using EBL/VRM, first make sure that [(4) Use EBL/VRM] is checked.

If using EBL/VRM: Check it.

5 Chart Editing 5-30


(2) How to draw lines
Drawing lines:
1) Select one of the objects on the line selection panel.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Make Map.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor, and left-click at the position you want to start drawing a
line.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the line is extended on the chart.
3) Left-click twice quickly to stop to extend the line.
4) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

ECDIS

Tips! (Moving the chart)


Click the left trackball button while drawing lines. A hand icon will be shown on the chart.
Move the trackball while holding the left button down to move the chart.

Deleting the line [Delete]:


1) Left-click the [Delete] button.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Delete Map.
2) Left-click the line you want to delete.
3) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

Tips! (Moving the chart)


When it is difficult to properly click on the segment you wish to delete, press the Chart [Zoom In]
button provided on the right side of the display panel. This will allow you to click on the target
segment easily.

5-31 5 Chart Editing


Inserting the segment [Insert/Move Vertex]:
1) Left-click the [Insert/Move Vertex] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Insert/Move VTX.
2) Left-click the segment you want to insert an additional segment.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to add the segment.
4) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

Edit

(When you left-click the cursor.) (When you left-click the cursor.)

Moving the Vertex [Insert/Move Vertex]:


1) Left-click the [Insert/Move Vertex] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Insert/Move VTX.
2) Left-click the segment you want to move the vertex.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to move the vertex.
4) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

Adding the segment (to the end of the line) [Add]:


1) Left-click the [Add] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Add VTX.
2) Left-click the last segment of the line.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to add the segment.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the new segment is added.
4) Left-click twice quickly to stop to add the new segment.
5) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

5 Chart Editing 5-32


Moving the line [Move]:
1) Left-click the [Move] button,
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Move Map.
2) Left-click the line you want to move.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the line is moved to the new position.
4) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

Edit

ECDIS
Getting information and editing information (Line)
1) Left-click the line you want to get information.
2) Left-click the [Property] button.
The Location/Attributes panel opens.
- You can edit the latitude and longitude of each segment by entering position latitude and
longitude.
- You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
- You can change the lines attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
- You can enter a comment.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

5-33 5 Chart Editing


(3) How to draw areas -- Area (Polygon) / (Warning Area)
How to draw the Polygon and Warning Area is the same and the drawing method is similar to that
for line. So, for detailed operation, refer to (2) How to draw lines mentioned earlier.

Drawing area (Polygon) / (Warning Area):


1) Select Polygon or Warning Area on the area selection panel.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Make Map.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want to draw the area.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the line (side) is extended on the chart.
3) Left-click twice quickly to stop to extend the line and area is created.
4) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.
(Draw sides) (Left-click twice quickly)

Getting information and edit area (line):


1) Left-click the [Property] button.
2) Left-click the inside of the area to select it.
Then, the Location/Attributes panel opens.
- You can edit the latitude and longitude of each side of the area by entering position latitude and
longitude.
- You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
- You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
- You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color
(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%).
- You can enter a comment.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Then, the location/attributes set with the panel apply to the selected area.

(Same color but transparency differs.)

5 Chart Editing 5-34


Moving the area [Move]:
1) Left-click the [Move] button.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Move Map.
2) Left-click the area you want to move.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the area is moved to the new position.
4) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

Edit

ECDIS

Deleting the area [Delete]:


1) Left-click the [Delete] button.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Delete Map.
2) Left-click the area you want to delete.
3) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

Adding a side to the area [Insert/Move Vertex]:


1) Left-click the [Insert/Move Vertex] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Insert/Move VTX.
2) Left-click the segment you want to insert an additional side.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to add the side. Then, area is created.
4) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.

Edit

5-35 5 Chart Editing


(4) How to draw areas -- Circle and Ellipse
1) Select Circle or Ellipse on the area selection panel.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Make Map.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the center position of the circle/ellipse.
3) To draw a circle, move the cursor to determine the radius of the circle and left-click the cursor.
To draw an ellipse, move the cursor and left-click the cursor.
4) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.
5) To change the location/attributes of the circle or ellipse, Left-click the [Property] button, and
Left-click the inside of the area to select it.
Then, the Location/Attributes panel opens.

(Left-click the cursor.) (Ellipse)

(Draw Circle)

(Same color but Transparency differs)

0% 50%

[Location/Attributes panel for Circle/Ellipse]


You can edit the latitude and longitude of each object by entering position latitude and
longitude.
You can edit the Horizontal/Vertical of the ellipse. (Not for the circle but for the ellipse only)
You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color
(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%).
You can enter a comment.
6) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Then, the object changes according to the location/attribute settings.

5 Chart Editing 5-36


(5) How to draw areas -- Fan
1) Select Fan on the area selection panel.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Make Map.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the center position of the fan.
3) Move the cursor to determine the radius and beginning angle of the fan and left-click the cursor.
4) Move the cursor to determine the ending angle and left-click the cursor. Then, area is created.
5) To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu. Then, the cursor
column is displayed nothing.
6) To change the location/attributes of the fan, Left-click the [Property] button, and Left-click the
inside of the area to select it.
Then, the Location/Attributes panel opens.

Case 1

ECDIS

Case 2

[Location/Attributes panel for Fan]


You can edit the latitude and longitude of each object by entering position latitude and
longitude.
You can edit the Horizontal/Vertical and angle of the fan.
You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color
(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%).
You can enter a comment.
7) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Then, the object changes according to the location/attribute settings.

5-37 5 Chart Editing


(6) How to enter text (small/large font)
1) Select Small font or Large font on the text selection panel.
Be sure that the cursor column is displayed Make Map.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want to enter the text.
Then, the Location/Attributes panel opens. You can specify the location and select attributes
by using this panel.

(When you select Small Font) (When you select Large Font)

[Location/Attributes panel for text]


You can edit the latitude and longitude of each object by entering position latitude and
longitude.
You can edit the rotational angle of the text.
You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
You can change the color (8 colors) and font size (6 to 72 points).
You can enter the text that will be displayed on the chart and comment.

3) Left-click on the [OK] button to close the panel.


The settings made in the Location/Attributes panel will be applied.
Repeat above steps to enter text at desired locations.

5 Chart Editing 5-38


4) Editing entered text
Left-click the [Property] button, and Left-click on the lower left part of the text you wish to edit
(Text, for example).

Then, the Location/Attributes panel opens. By referring to step 2) above, edit the position
and attributes of the selected text.
Left-click on the [OK] button when you finish editing. The panel closes.
The new settings will be applied to the selected text.

ECDIS

5-39 5 Chart Editing


5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual
Update Operation)
Objects that have been saved in Manual Update mode cannot be edited, but it is possible to hide them
from the chart. This function is available only in Manual Update mode.

(1) Hiding objects


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(8) Manual Update] in that order.
And start Manual Update mode (if you are editing objects in Manual Update mode, first exit the
mode and then restart it).
2) In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Hide Object] in that order..
3) Select an object you wish to hide by left-clicking on it.In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Hide Object] in that order.
The selected object disappears from the chart.
4) Repeat the same procedure to hide objects one by one.

(2) Restoring hidden objects


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(8) Manual Update] in that order.
And start Manual Update mode (if you are editing objects in Manual Update mode, first exit the
mode and then restart it).
2) In the User Chart Editing Menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Hide All] in that order.
Manually updated objects are all hidden for five seconds, and then they will be displayed again.
The objects that were hidden by the method in 5.5.3-(1) are not displayed.

(3) Re-hide Restored hidden objects


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Chart] - [(8) Manual Update] in that order.
And start Manual Update mode (if you are editing objects in Manual Update mode, first exit the
mode and then restart it).
2) In the User Chart Editing Menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(3) Reset Hide] in that order.
Hidden objects are all displayed collectively for five seconds, and then they will be hidden again.

Note:
The object which operated "Hiding Object" maintains a hiding condition to 90 days.
When passing more than 91 days, an object is deleted.

5 Chart Editing 5-40


6
Automatic
Sailing

6-1
Before starting automatic sailing, be sure to check the safety of the route
and crossing safety contour.
Otherwise, accidents may result.

When this system is connected to an autopilot, a set course is calculated from the scheduled route and
ships position. By outputting the set course to the autopilot, automatic sailing along the scheduled route
is possible.

Note:
Automatic sailing is not permitted while charts are displayed in multi view mode.
And exiting Navigation & Planning is not permitted during automatic sailing.

6.1 Automatic Sailing System


6.1.1 Change of Course (Turning) of Normal Route
When the ship arrived at the boundary of the WPT, you need to perform the following operation for turning
the ship.
On the operation panel, press the [TURN] key.

[Turing Operation]

Next Leg

Arrival alarm Boundary of WPT

Cross track distance (XTD)

6 Automatic Sailing 6-2


6.1.2 Change of Course (Turning) of TCS Route
When the ship arrived at the WOL, you need to perform the following operation for turning the ship.

Category B
Actual Course Change alarm is occurred 30 seconds before arrived at WOL, and press the [TURN]
key on the operation panel.

Category C
Turns automatically when arriving at WOL.

[Turing Operation]

ECDIS

Next Leg
Actual Course Change alarm
is occurred 30 seconds before
arrived at WOL.

WOL

6-3 6 Automatic Sailing


6.1.3 Route Monitoring and System Alarm
Warning and Alarm
Condition of warning/ Operating status of
Warning/alarm Remarks
alarm occurrence automatic sailing
Arrived at WPT The ship has arrived at the Can be continued.
boundary of the set WPT.
Actual Course 30 seconds before arrived Turn becomes possible. Only TCS
Change at WOL
Off Course The difference between Can be continued.
heading and leg bearing
has exceeded the limit.
XTD The ship has gone be- Can be continued.
yond the set route width.
Arrived at LAST On the sailing final leg, the Stop automatic sailing after
Change the steering mode of the autopilot to
WPT time has reached 1-5 passing through the final
Auto or Hand. Otherwise, the autopilot
minute(s) before the destination.
retains the rudder angle set last. (For details,
estimated arrival time at
see the instruction manual for autopilot.)
the destination.
Automatic sailing Automatic sailing cant be Should be stopped. Stop automatic sailing. Change the steering
failed continued by one of the mode of the autopilot to Auto or Hand.
following cause: Otherwise, the autopilot retains the rudder
POSN1 error angle set last. (For details, see the instruction
GYRO error manual for autopilot.)
Route error
Calling back Arrived at WPT alarm or Should be stopped. Stop automatic sailing. Change the steering
navigator Route alarm does not mode of the autopilot to Auto or Hand.
acknowledge for 30 Otherwise, the autopilot retains the rudder
seconds or more. angle set last. (For details, see the instruction
manual for autopilot.)
Low Speed Ship speed through water Can be continued.
has lowered to less than
the set value.
POSN1(Data) The system position 1 has In case of DNV-classed
some errors. vessels holding NAUT- OC Change the steering mode of the autopilot to
notation, use dead- Auto or Hand. Otherwise, the autopilot
reckoning for 10 minutes, retains the rudder angle set last. (For details,
and then, stop automatic see the instruction manual for autopilot.)
sailing.
POSN1 shifted The system position shifts Can be continued.
beyond the limit.
Heading(Data) Gyrocompass has got out Should be stopped. Change the steering mode of the autopilot to
of order. Auto or Hand. Otherwise, the autopilot
retains the rudder angle set last. (For details,
see the instruction manual for autopilot.)
Log(Data) Sensor for speed through Should be stopped. Stop automatic sailing. Change the steering
water has got out of order. mode of the autopilot to Auto or Hand.
Otherwise, the autopilot retains the rudder
angle set last. (For details, see the instruction
manual for autopilot.)
Autopilot(Data) The autopilot has got out of Should be stopped. Stop automatic sailing. Change the steering
order. mode of the autopilot to Auto or Hand.
Otherwise, the autopilot retains the rudder
angle set last. (For details, see the instruction
manual for autopilot.)

6 Automatic Sailing 6-4


6.2 Setting the Automatic Sailing
Automatic sailing can be set.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(0) Setting] in that order.
Then, the AUTO Sail Setting panel opens.
2) Select items and enter values as required.
Then, left-click the [OK] to close the panel.

ECDIS
a) Tracking Gain
When the ship leaves the route, this setting determines how tightly the course is maintained.
There are three settings: [Low] [Mid] [High]. An example of the difference between the own
ship cross track distance (XTD) and strength with which the ship returns to the route
depending on the tracking gain setting is shown below. The set heading when deviating to
the port side when the ships heading is 0 degrees and the route heading is also 0 degrees is
shown.

High

Mid

Low

Note:
The graph above is only one example. The actual values will differ from those in the graph
depending on the constant of the ship and its equipment.

6-5 6 Automatic Sailing


b) Drift Correction
When the ships speed is more than 5 knots, then control according to [None], [High], [Mid]
and [Low] setting will take drift into consideration.

Set heading Drift

Actual route that is expected

c) Dead Band
When dead band is set, a stable course is maintained. Therefore, within the specified
range centered on the route, the set heading is the same as the route heading.
Dead band can be set within the range from 0.001 NM to 0.999 NM.

Next waypoint

Dead band

Previous waypoint Set heading


(parallel to the route)

d) AUTO Stop (Only TCS category B)


Time until automatic sailing stop automatically when turning operation is not done even if
WOL is passed is set.
AUTO Stop can be set within the range from 0 min to 4 min.
This item is not displayed when using Normal type or TCS category C of A/P type.

6 Automatic Sailing 6-6


6.3 Automatic Sailing Operation
The following shows the outline of the operation of ECDIS and autopilot during automatic sailing.

ECDIS Autopilot

1) Select the [Route], and [Start] automatic


sailing. 2) Set the mode of the autopilot to NAVI for
(See the descriptions below for the the autopilot made by YOKOGAWA.
details of this procedure.) (Set it to RC for the autopilot made by
TOKIMEC.)
3) Monitor the route.
4) After ending voyage, change the mode of
the autopilot from the NAVI to HAND.
5) Select [UNLOAD] for [Route] to clear the
route from the screen.

ECDIS

If the own ship has arrived at the boundary of a WPT during automatic
sailing, be sure to check the safety and perform turning manually (press the
[TURN] key.).
Otherwise, the ship keeps the course with the leg bearing, and accidents
may result.

During sailing, be sure to check own ships position and bearing as often as
necessary, regardless of whether the automatic sailing is in operation or
not.
Otherwise, accidents may result.

Note:
For operation of the autopilot, see its instruction manual.

6-7 6 Automatic Sailing


6.3.1 Selecting the Route and the WPT
To select the route, use the [Route] on the display panel.

When using A/P that is not TCS type


Selecting Normal route (extension .rtn).

When using A/P that is TCS type


Selecting TCS route (extension .rta).
The route where the Limit Check and Safety Check by Route Planning was done is displayed in the
left of route name, "OK>".

Normal Route

TCS route that doesn't Limit check and Safety


check by Route Planning

TCS route that does Limit check and Safety


check by Route Planning

To select the WPT, use the [To WPT] on the display panel.

6 Automatic Sailing 6-8


6.3.2 Start Automatic Sailing of Normal Route
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(1) Start] in that order.
Then, the Select WPT panel opens.

Displays the [Route] file selecting on the display


panel.

Choose "To Waypoint" number displaying


alternative which was set in the [Route] file.

If you want to cancel the operation and close


the panel, click [Cancel].

To fix setting, click [OK].

If the following warning is displayed, confirm whether to have selected Normal Route.

ECDIS

2) Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.


Then, the "Confirmation" panel will appear.

Click the [OK] if confirming that there is not a problem in the setting.
When there is a problem in the setting and close the "Confirmation" panel, click the [Cancel].

3) Left-click the [OK] to continue automatic sailing procedure.


Then, the automatic sailing starts and route monitoring is carried out by the system.

During automatic sailing, you should turn the ship with the [TURN] key as follows:

When the ship arrived at the boundary of the WPT, Arrived at WPT alarm is issued.
Press the [TURN] key on the operation panel.
Then, the ship will start to turn.

Note:
During automatic sailing, the following menu changes invalidly.
[Menu] - [(9)Exit]
[Menu] - [(3)AUTO Sail] [(1)Start]
By terminating automatic sailing, it returns in the validity.

6-9 6 Automatic Sailing


6.3.3 Start Automatic Sailing of TCS Route
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(1) Start] in that order.
Then, the Select WPT panel opens.

Displays the [Route] file


selecting on the display panel.

Choose "To Waypoint" number


displaying alternative which
was set in the [Route] file.

Please do not change the


setting as follows:
Pre Run Speed
Pre Run Time
Enter Angle
Turn Radius
Pre Run Distance
XTD MAX
To fix setting, click [OK].
If you want to cancel the operation and close the dialog,
click [Cancel].

If the following warning is displayed, confirm whether to have selected TCS route.

If the following warning is displayed, check the Limit and Safety check by Route Planning.

2) Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.


Then, the "Confirmation" panel will appear.

Click the [OK] if confirming that there is not a problem in the setting.
When there is a problem in the setting and close the "Confirmation" panel, click the [Cancel].

6 Automatic Sailing 6-10


3) Left-click the [OK] to close the panel.
If there is no problem in the setting, the "Confirmation" panel will appear.

Click the [OK] if confirming that there is not a problem in the setting.
When there is a problem in the setting and close the "Confirmation" panel, click the [Cancel].

4) Left-click the [OK] to continue automatic sailing procedure.


Then, the automatic sailing starts and route monitoring is carried out by the system.

During automatic sailing, you should turn the ship with the [TURN] key as follows:

When Actual Course Change alarm is occurred 30 seconds before arrived at WOL.
Press the [TURN] key on the operation panel.
Then, the ship will start to turn. ECDIS

Note:
During automatic sailing, the following menu changes invalidly.
[Menu] - [(9)Exit]
[Menu] - [(3)AUTO Sail] [(1)Start]
By terminating automatic sailing, it returns in the validity.

6.3.4 Terminating the Automatic Sailing


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(2) Stop] in that order.
Then, the "Confirmation" panel will appear.

2) Left-click the [OK] to stop the automatic sailing.


When [Cancel] is clicked, Auto Sail is continued.

6-11 6 Automatic Sailing


6.3.5 Disconnect Automatic Sailing
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(3) Disconnect] in that order.
Then, the "Confirmation" panel will appear.

2) Left-click the [OK] to disconnect AUTO Sail.


[Cancel] is left-click when canceling Disconnect AUTO Sail.

Note:
When execute disconnect, the following menu changes invalidly.
[Menu] - [(3) AUTO Sail] - [(1)Start]
[Menu] - [(3)AUTO Sail] - [(3)Disconnect]
By exit to Navigation & Planning and start again, it returns in the validity.

6 Automatic Sailing 6-12


7
Tools and Setting/
Serviceman Menu

7-1
7.1 File Manager

Before reading and writing of the file by using the USB storage, confirm that
there is not a computer virus in the USB storage.
Otherwise they may affect other equipments and may cause a malfunction.

Do not leave the USB Storage in the USB port after use.
Malfunctions may result.

Do not leave the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive after use.
Also, do not leave the CDDVD in the DVD drive.
Malfunctions of the drives may result.

Route files and user chart files can be copied from the hard disk to floppy disks and vice versa. Route
files and user chart files can also be deleted.
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(2) File Manager] in that order.

Example of Copying: Copying a route file from the hard disk to a floppy disk.
1) Left-click the drop-down button a, then select Route File from the box. When route files are
selected, all files with the extensions .rtn and .rta are displayed.
2) Select Local Disk from box b. The route files saved on the hard disk will be displayed in box
c.
3) Left-click the drop-down button d, then select Floppy Disk from the box.
4) Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, left-click the file to be copied from box c, then
left-click the [Copy] button (f) to start copying. The selected file will be copied to the floppy
disk. When a file is selected from the box e, and the button g is clicked, then a file on the
floppy disk can be copied to the hard disk.
In order to copy a user chart, User Map should be selected from the box a. (Files with the
extension .uch are displayed.)

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu 7-2


a)

b) d)

e)

c)

f)

g) ECDIS

* [COPY>>] and [<<COPY] can not be selected when setting the same drive to both of box
b and box d.
* [Device is not ready.] message is displayed when selecting a [DVD Drive] or [Floppy
Disk] in box b or box d without inserting it.
* [During file operating Data Backup/Restore is not opened] message is displayed when
the following operation is done and it cannot continue while copying Voyage Log.
Select [Serviceman]-[Data Backup/Restore]-[Backup]
Select [Serviceman]-[Data Backup/Restore]-[Restore]

Deleting Files:
1) With files displayed in box c, select a file or left-click the [Select All] button to select all files.
2) Left-click the [Delete] button under box c. The delete confirmation panel will be displayed, so
press the [OK] button to delete the file(s). The same process can be used for box e to delete
files in box e with the [Delete] button under it.
* Following file can not be deleted.
Loaded Route file ([This file is using. Cannot copy.] message is displayed.)
Current date Own ship Track or Voyage Log file
([The process cannot access the file because it is being used by another process.]
message is displayed.)

7-3 7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu


Files that can be handled with File Manager:
Type Local DVD Floppy USB Ship
Disk Drive Disk Device LAN
Route File Normal route files (extension .rtn)
TCS route files (extension .rta)
(Created with chapter 4 Route Planning)
User Map User chart files (extension .uch)

(Created with chapter 5 Chart Editing)
Own Track Own ship track files (extension .own)

(Refer to chapter 3 Own ships setting)
Target Track Target track files (extension .atr)
Screen Saved screen (by manual) files (extension .bmp)

Shot(MANU) (Refer to chapter 3 Saving the Screen) (1)

Screen Saved screen (by auto) files(extension .bmp)



Shot(AUTO)
Voyage Log Voyage log files
: available, : not available
1 Cannot copy from [USB device] to [Local].

Copying and Deleting Files on Backup Devices:


When a backup device is connected to the ECDIS through a network, Backup will be added to
boxes c and d. By selecting Backup, files can be copied and moved to the backup device, or
they can be copied from the backup device.

Overwriting Files:
When overwrite copying more than one file, "Over Write?" confirmation is displayed every file.
It is overwritten when clicking [OK] by the Over Write? screen.
It is not overwritten when clicking [Cancel] by the Over Write? screen.
* Following file can not be overwritten.
Loaded Route file ([This file is using. Cannot copy.] message is displayed.)

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu 7-4


7.2 System Information
The system information can be confirmed.

1) In the normal menu:


Select [Menu] - [(7)Main] - [(3)Test] - [(2)System Information] in that order.
[System Information] panel is displayed.

[Type]: Type of system is displayed.

It displays each version


[Process Manager]
[ECDIS App]
[Chartportfolio]

[TCS]: TCS is displayed.

[Maintenance No.]:
Maintenance number of 8 digits is displayed.

ECDIS
2) How to close the [System Information] panel:
The panel closes when clicking [Close] button.

7-5 7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu


7.3 Operating Time
Operating time of Display, HDD1 and HDD2 can be confirmed.

1) In the normal menu:


Select [Menu] - [(7)Main] - [(3)Test] - [(3)Operating Time] in that order.
[Operating Time] panel is displayed.

[Display]: Operating time of display

[HDD1]: Operating time of HDD1

[HDD2]: Operating time of HDD2

2) [Operating Time] panel closes when clicking [Close] button.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu 7-6


7.4 Color Test (ARCS Only)
The color test pattern for the ARCS charts will be displayed.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(3) Test] - [(4) ARCS Color Test] in that order.
The color pattern for the ARCS color test will be displayed.
You can check a display state of the display unit from the color pattern.

ECDIS

2) Left-click on the [Close] button to close the color pattern.

7-7 7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu


7.5 Sensor
The external input sensor such as GPS, etc. in which the own ships position is entered is set up.
The external sensor options are as follows:
Primary position and secondary position of own ship
Bearing and speed
Date data source
Time zone data source

Note:
The options available for each sensor differ depending on the system configuration used.

7.5.1 Primary Position and Secondary Position


On this equipment, you can select one of the navigation methods (e.g., GPS navigation, LORAN or
dead-reckoning). This is called the primary position (POSN1) or system position. A secondary position
(POSN2) can also be selected independent of the primary position. This system constantly checks how
far the primary and secondary positions are apart to monitor their mutual positions.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(4) Sensor] in that order.
The Sensor Connection panel opens.
2) Set each item and left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

Position fixing system for the primary position


POSN1 (Select from (D)GPS1, (D)GPS2and DR.)

Position fixing system for the secondary position


POSN2 (Select from (none), (D)GPS1,
(D)GPS2, DR and DR-Reset.)

Turning ON/OFF of the secondary position display

Use LAN: This item selects when input a data from LAN Board.
Use Local Port: This item selects when input a data from Local Port.

(D)GPS1: No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the sensor to enter the own ships position.
(D)GPS2: No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the sensor to enter the own ships position.
LORAN-C: LORAN-C is used as the sensor to enter the own ships position
GPS-Compass: GPS-Compass is used as the sensor to enter the own ships position
DR (normally, not used): The own ships position is estimated on the basis of heading, ship
speed, SDME, etc.
none: The secondary position is not used.
DR-Reset: To correct the errors that occur while DR is used, GPS data of POSN1 is used as
the reference position of DR. The GPS data obtained when OK in Sensor
Connection panel is left-clicked after DR-Reset is selected will be used as the
reference position.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu 7-8


The secondary position symbol is displayed as regardless of the scale. The track information for
the past six minutes is displayed in green. Other information cannot be displayed. The symbol and
track can also be turned ON and OFF.

7.5.2 Bearing Setting


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(4) Sensor] in that order.
The Sensor Connection panel opens.
2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter value to the value entry box.
a) Use LAN / Use Local Port
Select this item if the gyro sensor is used for the heading sensor. Gyro sensors information
is used to determine the heading of the ship. If the sensor being used detects the synchro/
step gyro, the initial value must be entered. After entering the value, left-click the [Set]
button to fix it.
Use LAN: This item selects when input a data from LAN Board.
Use Local Port: This item selects when input a data from Local Port.

GYRO I/F: GYRO i/F out put type gyro is used for the heading sensor.
GYRO(NMEA): GYRO(NMEA) out put type gyro is used for the heading sensor.
GYRO-Compass: Synchro/step gyro is used for the heading sensor.
ECDIS
GYRO Setting: This item uses when setting to GYRO I/F or GYRO-Compass.
In the following case, GYRO Setting becomes invalid
When selecting GYRO(NMEA) in [Source].
It sets [GYRO I/F] and [GYRO(NMEA)] to [Not Use] by the device setting.
When setting to [Use LAN] or [Use Local Port], it is displayed with "HDG(GYRO)" in the
display panel.
b) Manual (not used usually)
Enter the value when you apply any value as the bearing of the ship.
When setting to [Manual], it is displayed with "HDG(GYRO)" in the display panel.

Selects a heading sensor


GYRO I/F
GYRO(NMEA)
GPS-Compass

7-9 7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu


7.5.3 Speed Setting
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(4) Sensor] in that order.
The Sensor Connection panel opens.
a) Use LAN / Use Local Port
Select the log sensor. Log sensors information is used to determine the speed of the ship.
Use LAN: This item selects when input a data from LAN Board.
Use Local Port: This item selects when input a data from Local Port.

GYRO I/F: GYRO I/F out put type log is used for the ship speed sensor.
NMEA LOG: NMEA LOG out put type log is used for the ship sensor.
GYRO(NMEA): GYRO(NMEA) out put type log is used for the ship sensor.
When setting to [Use LAN] or [Use Local Port], it is displayed with "STW(LOG)" in the display
panel.
b) Manual (not used usually)
Enter the value when you apply any value as the speed of the ship.
The maximum speed that can be set is 99.9 kn.
When setting to [Manual], it is displayed with "STW(MAN)" in the display panel.

Selects a ship speed sensor


LAN : GYRO I/F, NMEA LOG,
Local Port : GYRO I/F, GYRO(NMEA)

7.5.4 Date Data Source Setting


1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(4) Sensor] in that order.
The Sensor Connection panel opens.
2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter the value to the value entry box.

Date/time setting data (GPS1, GPS2, MANUAL)

GPS1: No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the data source of date/time setting.


GPS2: No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the data source of date/time setting.
MANUAL: Date/time setting is made manually.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu 7-10


7.5.5 Time Zone Data Source Setting
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(4) Sensor] in that order.
The Sensor Connection panel opens.
2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter the value to the value entry box.

Time zone setting data (GPS1, GPS2, MANUAL)

GPS1: No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the data source of time zone setting.
GPS2: No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the data source of time zone setting.
MANUAL: Time zone setting is made manually.

ECDIS

7-11 7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu


7.6 Color and Brilliance Setting
Color and brilliance of Screen, Dialog, Character, and Keyboard can be changed.

1) In the normal menu


Select [Menu] - [(7)Main] - [(0)Setting] - [(1)Color and Brilliance Setting] in that order.
[Color and Brilliance Setting] panel will be displayed.
2) Selects each items and it clicks [OK] button.
Setting reflects and color and brilliance are changed.

[Apply] button: Setting can be reflected without closing [Color and Brilliance Setting Panel].
[Cancel] button: Closes [Color and Brilliance Setting] panel without reflecting setting.
[Day/Night]
Each color and brilliance can be changed collectively
by selecting the following column.
[Day Bright] (DAY1)
[Day Whiteback] (DAY2)
[Day Blackback] (DAY3)
[Dusk]
[Night]

[Color]
User Dialog: Color of dialog can be changed by selecting
from 4 colors.
Character: Color of character can be changed by selecting
from 4 colors.
Target Symbol: Color of Target Symbol can be changed by
selecting from 6 colors.
Radar Video: Color of Radar Video can be changed by
selecting from 5 colors.

[Brilliance]
Character: Brilliance of character can be changed among
Level4 from Level1.
Keyboard: Brilliance of key of operation panel can be
changed among Level4 from Level0.
Target Symbol: Brilliance of Target Symbol can be
changed among Level4 from Level0.
Radar Video: Brilliance of Radar Video panel can be
changed among Level4 from Level1.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu 7-12


7.7 Setting the User Key
Register [Option1], [Option2] and [USER] key functions.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(2) Option Key Setting] in that order.
The [Option Key] dialog box will be displayed.
2) Left-click in the function display box. The selectable functions will be listed.
Left-click the function that is to be assigned to the user key.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.

ECDIS

Selectable functions list:


Function name Function
Graphic Editor Starts up Graphic Editor of Route Planning.
Exit from Graphic Editor when pushing allocated user key
again.
Chart Editor Starts up User Map Editor.
Exit User Map Editor when pushing allocated user key
again.
Chart Setting [Chart Setting] panel opens.
Ownship/Track Setting [Own Ship Setting] panel opens.
Save My Port List [Save my Port List] panel opens.
My Port List [My Port List] panel opens.
Change Active Panel (ARCS only) Boundary of the chart is displayed.
Load Low Resolution(ARCS only) Changes to low resolution.
Logbook [Logbook] panel opens.
Print Display [Print] panel opens.
Save Screen Saves a screen.
Save Chart Setting [Save Chart Setting] panel opens.
Chart Setting List [Chart Setting List] panel opens.
Display Base Temporarily Changes SENC information level to Base temporarily.
(S-57/C-MAP only) Returns to previous level when pushing allocated user
key again.
Also, returns to previous level when moving a cursor to
menu bar or display panel and so on, too.

7-13 7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu


7.8 Setting Date/Time
When your ship is in the same time zone as the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), Time Zone is 0:00,
and UTC and ships local mean time (LMT) are the same.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(3) Date/Time Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(3) Date/Time Setting] in that order.
The Date/Time panel opens.
2) It chooses each clause eyes and it inputs value to the value entrybox..
Left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
It closes a panel without changing contents when clicking the [Cancel] button.
It saves contents without closing a panel when clicking [Apply] button.

The following items can be set:

a) LMT Date/LMT Time


Set the date/time when MANUAL has been selected in the date/time data source setting.
For details, see 7.5.4 Date Data Source Setting.
Enter date/month/year/ hour:minite:second numerals in the numeric input box.
b) Time Zone
Set the time difference when MANUAL has been selected in the time zone data source
setting. For details, see 7.5.5 Time Zone Data Source Setting.
You can also use [+30min] and [-30min] button to set time.
(E=+, W=-)
The LMT and the time zone are displayed at the top of the display panel as follows:
LMT Time zone

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu 7-14


3) [UTC/LMT] and [Display style] can be selected from the following item.

c) UTC/LMT
It does UTC/LMT change in the display time of the display panel.
It synchronizes with the time difference button display on the display panel.
d) Display Style
Date and time display on the display panel changes to the set format.
Y = Year, M = Month, D = Day

Note:
When an item other than MANUAL has been set in the date/time data source setting,
date/time setting procedure is not necessary.

ECDIS

7.9 Clear Voyage Distance


Voyage Distance can be cleared by this function.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(6) Voyage Distance Clear] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(6)Voyage Distance Clear] in that order.
The Question panel opens.
2) Left-click the [OK] button, voyage distance of logbook is cleared.

Voyage Distance isn't cleared when clicking the [Cancel] button.

7-15 7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu


7.10 Setting the Alarm Options
You can set the various alarm options.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(8) Alarm Setting] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(6) Main] - [(0) Setting] - [(8) Alarm Setting] in that order.
The Alarm List Setting panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF, and, for the items that require value entry,
enter the value.
Then, left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.

a) Limit
Difference between POSN1 and POSN2:
Displays an alarm on the screen when the POSN1 and POSN2 have deviated by more than
the distance preset here.
Shift of POSN1
Displays an alarm on the screen when the movement distance per unit hour (1 second) of
the ship is larger than the distance preset here. This is useful for detecting when something
influences your ships position in such a way that it is displayed at a wrong position on the
chart. (This does not apply when Dead-Reckoning (DR) is used.)
Off Course
Displays an alarm on the screen when your ship has veered off the current course more
than the preset angle.
Early Course Change Indication
It is displayed only when setting TCS type in Auto Pilot.
ECC indication popup occurs when the time to the WOL arrival reaches a set value when
making setting valid.
Arrival Last WPT
Displays an alarm on the screen when the time required to arrive at the final destination is
reduced to the amount you have set.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu 7-16


Timer:
An alarm sounds at the time preset here.
Vector:
Danger detection vector in minute
The min and NM can be changed when clicking a Vector Length unit button.
Last input value for the unit is displayed when changing a unit.
Sector:
Sector radius in nm and the angle width in degree (up to 359.9 degrees)
*: For vector and angle width, see 3.27.3 Danger Detection Vector and Sector.
The min and NM can be changed when clicking a Sector Radius unit button.
Last input value for the unit is displayed when changing a unit.
Low Speed Alarm
It is displayed only when setting TCS TOKIMEC category B in Auto Pilot.
When making valid, the alarm occurs when through-the-water speed declines from the set
value.
b) Area (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can set whether or not to display an alarm on the screen when a symbol on the chart
contacts a danger detection vector by setting each of the items ON and OFF.
Subjects of the items are as follows:
Traffic separation zone
Traffic crossing ECDIS

Traffic roundabout
Traffic precautionary
Two Way traffic
Deeper water route
Recommended traffic lane
Inshore traffic zone
Fairway
Restricted area
Caution area
Offshore production area
Military practice area
Seaplane landing area
Submarine transit area
Ice area
Channel
Fishing ground
Fishing prohibited
Pipeline area
Cable area
Anchorage area
Anchorage prohibited
Spoil ground
Dumping ground
Dredge area
Cargo transshipment area
Incineration area
Specially protected area

7-17 7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu


7.11 Radar Process Setting
It sets [Video Latitude], [Video Noise Rejection], [Auto DR Control], [Process Switch], [2cd Process Mode],
[Process Switch Range], [First Target Detection] about the radar.

1) In the normal menu


Select [MENU] - [Main] - [Setting] - [Radar Process Setting] in the order.
Radar Process Setting screen is displayed.

Video Latitude:
Video Latitude can be set by selecting it from [Normal], [Wide], [Narrow], [Super Wide].
Video Noise Rejection:
The level of Video Noise Rejection can be set by choosing it from [Off], [Level 1], [Level 2].
Auto DR Control:
ON/OFF of Auto DR Control can be changed.
Process Switch:
Process Switch can be set to [Distance Fix] or [Auto].
2nd Process Mode:
2nd Process Mode can be set by selecting it from [Off], [PROC1], [PROC2], [PROC3],
[PROC4], [PROC5].
Process Switch Range:
Process Range can be changed every 0.1 at up or down of the spin button.
First Target Detection:
ON/OFF of First Target Detection can be changed.
This setting becomes invalid when setting 2nd Process Mode to [PROC1] or [PROC2].
This setting becomes valid when setting 2nd Process Mode to [PROC3], [PROC4], [PROC5].

7.12 Language
The language to display can be selected from Japanese or English.

1) In case of making Japanese display in the normal menu.


Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [Setting] [Language] [Japanese] in that order.
The display language becomes Japanese.
2) In case of making English display in the normal menu.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Main] - [Setting] [Language] [English] in that order.
The display language becomes English
* In English OS, [Language] in [MENU] - [Main] isn't displayed..

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu 7-18


7.13 Code Input
By inputting a regulated code on Code Input panel, the enhanced menu is displayed. As other functions,
"Navigation and Planning" can be ended.

1) In the normal menu


Select [(7) Main] - [(5) Code Input] in that order.
The [Code Input] dialog box will be displayed.

2) Input the regulated code to the input column, and push [OK] button. Then, Code Input panel is
ECDIS
closed, and operation corresponding to a regulated code is done. When inputting the
deregulated code, Code Input panel is closed with nothing done.
* A typing in character is displayed with "*"

Regulated code and the operation


Input Code Function
0 Serviceman menu (for engineer) is displayed on Menu Title Bar.
(Original menu is disappeared on this operation. To display original menu, select
[Serviceman]-[Exit Serviceman Menu].)
* Please do not operate the serviceman menu excluding JRC serviceman.
The device might not work correctly when the setting is changed.

3) To close Code Input panel, select Cancel button.

7-19 7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu


7.14 Analog Correct Value
This function revises the Analog Correct Value, for example Engine RPM.
1) Select [MENU] - [(1) Serviceman] - [(3) Installation] - [(3) Analog Correct Value] in that order.
The [Correct Value] dialog box will be displayed.

2) Select the sensor, input a correct value to each parameter column.


M/E RPM STBDRevolution per minute of Main EngineStarboard
M/E RPM PORTRevolution per minute of Main EnginePort
Propeller RPM STBDRevolution per minute of PropellerStarboard
Propeller Pitch PORTPropeller PitchPort
After inputting all the parameter, push the Set button to determine that, push the OK button.
Then, [Correct Value] dialog box will be closed.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu 7-20


7.15 Own ships Parameter Setting

Input the parameter accurately according to the specification of the ship.


Otherwise, accidents may result.

After changing the setting, execute to exit Navigation & Planning.

Otherwise, accidents may result because ECDIS is not affected by the set
parameter.

7.15.1 Ships Parameter


This function sets the parameter of a ship necessary for operating ECDIS.

ECDIS
1) In the normal menu
After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel,
Select [(1) Serviceman]-[(4) Ships Parameter] in that order.
The [Ships Parameter] dialog box will be displayed.

2) Input an accurate value to each parameter column.

3) After inputting all the parameter, push the OK button. Then, Information message is displayed.

4) Exit to Navigation & Planning and start again.

7-21 7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu


7.15.2 CCRP Setting
This function sets the parameter of the position of CCRP (Consistent Common Reference Point) and the
position of each sensor.

1) In the normal menu


After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel,
Select [(1) Serviceman]-[(3) Installation]-[(2) CCRP Setting] in that order.
The [CCRP Setting] dialog box will be displayed.

2) Input an accurate value to each parameter column.

GPS / Radar Antenna:


Input the position according
to the installed environment,
and change to ON the check
box in using the sensor.

CCRP:
Set the position of CCRP.
Set the radio button of the
item used effectively though
four places can be set.

3) After inputting all the parameter, push the OK button. Then,


Information message is displayed.

4) Exit to Navigation & Planning and start again.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu 7-22


7.16 Line Monitor
Communications between the ECDIS and external devices connected to the ECDIS can be checked.

1) After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel,


Select [(1) Serviceman] - [(1) Line Monitor] in that order.
The Line Monitor panel will be displayed.
2) From the Device Selection field, select a device connected to the ECDIS.
3) Left-click on the [Start] button. Information entered from the selected external device will be
displayed in the entry data display box in real time. Also, information outputted to the selected
external device will be displayed in the output data display box in real time. Left-click on the
[Stop] button to stop information from being updated. Left-click on the [Clear] button to clear
the currently displayed information. If there is no inputting/outputting of data between the
ECDIS and the selected external device, then nothing will be displayed in the data display box.

ECDIS

7-23 7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu


7.17 Adjust Radar Bearing, Range
and Antenna Height
This function adjusts [Bearing], [Range] and [Antenna height].

1) After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel,


Select [(1)Serviceman menu]-[(2)Adjust].The Adjust panel opens.

2) Input or select a value to each item, or adjust that with .

Bearing Adjustment:
The value is input and bearing is
adjusted.

Range Adjustment:
The value is input and range is
adjusted.

Antenna Height:
Selects from the drop-down list
and antenna height is adjusted.

3) After setting all items, push the [Close] button.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu 7-24


Tip of RADAR Range and Bearing

Adjusting Bearing
Expand the screen display. Then, adjust Heading echo to Bearing.

Heading echo

ECDIS

Adjusting Range
Expand the screen display. If there is the hole of own ships echo,
adjust Range smaller until the hole disappears.

Hole of own
ships echo

7-25 7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu


7.18 Installation Information
This function sets the installation information.

1) After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel,


Select [(1) Serviceman] - [(3) Installation] - [(1) Installation Information] in that order.
The Installation Information panel will be displayed.
2) Input a value to each column.

Date: Input an installed date.

Name:
Input an administrator name.

Company:
Input the company name.

3) After setting all columns, push the [OK] button.


It closes a panel without changing contents when clicking the [Cancel] button.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu 7-26


7.19 TCS Maintenance
This function sets [Reach Offset], [Safety / Limit Check] setting and [Time / Distance to WPT] setting
about the TCS.

1) After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel,


Select [(1) Serviceman] - [(5) TCS Maintenance] in that order.
The TCS Maintenance panel will be displayed.
2) Input or select setting to each item.
Reach Offset:
Input a reach offset of TCS.

Safety / Limit Check:


On: Whether [Safety / Limit Check] of the route
is completed when starting to auto sail is
checked.
Off: Whether [Safety / Limit Check] of the route
is completed when starting to auto sail is
not checked.

ECDIS

Time / Distance to WPT


From center point of WOL:
The distance / time from own ship to WPT is calculated between own ship and center
point of WOL.
From cross point of WOL and heading:
The distance / time from own ship to WPT is calculated between center point of heading
of own ship and WOL.

3) After setting all columns, push the [OK] button.


It closes a panel without changing contents when clicking the [Cancel] button.

7-27 7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu


7.20 Radar Initial Setup
This function sets [Echo Noise Level] of [Signal Processing], [MBS Level] and [MBS Area] about the
radar.

1) Select [Menu] - [(7)Main] - [(5)Code Input] in that order.

2) The Code Input panel opens. After inputting [0], left-click [OK] button.

3) Select [Menu] - [(1)Serviceman menu]-[(6)Radar Initial Setup]

4) The Radar Initial Setup panel opens.

5) Input a value to each item or adjust that with .


Signal Processing: Setting the echo noise level of Signal Processing.
MBS: Setting the level and area of Main Bang Suppression.

Echo Noise Level:


Echo Noise Level can be set between
from 0 to 255.

Setting Mode:
On/Off of Setting Mode can be changed.

MBS Level:
MBS Level can be set between from 0 to
255.

MBS Area:
MBS area can be set between from 0 to
255.
6) Left-click the [OK] on the panel to close the panel.
It closes a panel without changing contents when clicking the [Cancel] button.
It saves contents without closing a panel when clicking [Apply] button.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu 7-28


7.21 Data Backup/Restore

Before reading and writing of the file by using the USB storage, confirm that
there is not a computer virus in the USB storage.
Otherwise they may affect other equipments and may cause a malfunction.

Do not leave the USB Storage in the USB port after use.
Malfunctions may result.
ECDIS

Do not leave the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive after use.
Also, do not leave the CDDVD in the DVD drive.
Malfunctions of the drives may result.

This function is backup and restore of setting data.

Data can be backed up to the following devices.


Backup Drive(DVD Drive)
Floppy Disk
USB Device

7-29 7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu


7.21.1 How to backup the data
It explains the data backup procedure as follows.

1) After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel, Select [(1) Serviceman] - [(7) Data
Backup/Restore] - [(1) Backup] in that order.
The Data Backup/Restore panel will be displayed.
2) Select destination device from drop-down button a.
3) Select file that wants to be copied from box b, and left-click the [COPY>>] button (c) to
start backup.
Left-click [Select All] button (d) when you select all files.
4) Copied file is displayed that copy is completed in the box e.
a)
f)

g)

b)

c)

e)
d)

* [Type (f)] and [Source drive (g)] cant be changed.

7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu 7-30


7.21.2 How to restore the data
It explains the data restore procedure as follows.

1) After Serviceman menu is displayed by Code Input panel, Select [(1) Serviceman] - [(7) Data
Backup/Restore] - [(2) Restore] in that order.
The Data Backup/Restore panel will be displayed.
2) Select source device from drop-down button a.
3) Select file that wants to be copied from box b, and left-click the [<<COPY] button (c) to
start restore.
Left-click [Select All] button (d) when you select all files.
4) Copied file is displayed that copy is completed in the box e.

e)
a)
f)

b)

e) c) ECDIS

d)

* [Type (f)] and [Destination drive (g)] cant be changed.

7-31 7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu


7 Tools and Setting/Serviceman Menu 7-32
8
Playback

8-1
In the Playback, you can play back the logging data. The Playback screen is almost the same as for
Navigation & Planning. Also, the menu bar on the screen is the same as for the Navigation & Planning
screen except for the [(9) Playback] menu. Though the other menus are the same, there are some
submenus you cannot use in the Playback.

8.1 Entering/Exiting the Playback


(1) Entering the Playback
1) Turn ON the power by pressing the [POWER] key on the operation panel.
The startup menu appear on the display.

[Startup Menu]

2) Move the cursor with the trackball and left-click the in the startup menu.
Almost the same screen as for Navigation & Planning will open and the Staring Date/Time
panel is displayed.

Note:
The mode selected last ([Navigation & Planning] in case of ECDIS, [Conning Display] in case
of Conning Display) will be automatically displayed if no operation is conducted for 10
seconds.

8 Playback 8-2
Display panels for playback operation

[For S-57/C-MAP] [For ARCS]

ECDIS

8-3 8 Playback
Special menu for playback:
In the Navigation & Planning screen, [(9) Maintenance] is used. However, in the Playback, [(8)
Playback] is used, instead.

Displays the Starting Date/Time panel.

Starts/Restarts the playback.

Pauses the playback.

Stops the playback.


Turns ON/OFF the Playback panel.

Table 9 Playback Menu Tree


Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Reference
(1) AIS/TT (1) TT1 3.3.9.1
(2) TT2 3.3.9.1
(3) AIS 3.3.9.1
(4) All 3.3.9.1
(6) All List 3.3.9.2
(7) Select List 3.3.9.8
(2) Route (0) Setting 4.1.1
(4) Ownship/Track (0) Setting 3.28
(5) User Map (1) Select User Map 3.13
(2) Unselect User Map 3.13
(6) Chart (2) Off Center (1) Enter Position 3.4.5
(2) Home 3.4.1
(3) User Setting (1) Save My Port List 3.8.1
(2) My Port List 3.8.2
(3) Save Chart Setting 3.29.3
(4) Chart Setting List 3.29.4
(4) Select S-57 Chart 3.9
(5) Fix View 3.7.3
(6) Accept S-57 Updates 3.31
(3) Chart Abbreviation 3.30
(4) ARCS (1) Temporary and Preliminary 3.10.9
(2) Adjust Datum Offset 3.10.10
(3) Datum Transformation 3.10.10
(0) Setting (1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS 3.29.1
(2) Other Chart 3.29.2
(7) Main (1) EBL Maneuver/
3.20
Remove EBL Maneuver
(2) Cross Bearing 3.21
(5) Print 3.37
(6) Save Screen 3.38
(2) File Manager 7.1

8 Playback 8-4
Table 9 Playback Menu Tree -- Continued
Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Reference
(7) Main (3) Test (1) Alarm Log 3.3.7
(2) System Information 7.2
(3) Operating Time 7.3
(0) Setting (1) Color and Brilliance Setting 7.6
(2) Option Key Setting 7.7
(4) Marker Setting 3.16.2.1
(7) Display Panel Setting 3.25
(0) Buzzer Volume 3.3.5
(8) Playback (1) Starting Date/Time 8.2
(2) Start 8.2
(3) Pause 8.2
(4) Stop 8.2
(5) Playback Panel 8.2
(0) Exit 8.1

(2) Exiting the Playback


1) Left-click the [(0) Exit] menu and terminate the system in the same way as for Navigation &
Planning screen.

ECDIS

8-5 8 Playback
8.2 Playing Back the Logging Data
(1) Setting the starting date/time to be played back
1) Select [MENU] - [(8) Playback] - [(1) Starting Date/Time] in that order.
Then, the Starting Date/Time panel opens. (Initially, this screen is displayed.)

Logging data drop-down list*1

Date and time of recording end


Date and time of recording start

Selection of date and time to be played


2
back*
(You can select date and time by sliding
the scroll bar or entering the values.)

*1 (Logging data): A series of logging files in which the logging date is continuing.
*2: Used to designate playback start time. During playback, the date and time that were
recorded are displayed.

2) Specify the above items to select the logging data to be played back, and then left-click the [OK]
button.

(2) Displaying the Playback Panel


1) Select [MENU] - [(8) Playback] - [(5) Playback Panel] in that order.
Each time you select this menu, the Playback panel panel is turned ON and OFF. When it is
ON, the panel appears in the display panel.
Note that, depending on the playback status, some buttons are inactive.
[Pause] Button

[Start] Button
[Stop] Button

[Date/Time] Button
Left-clicking this button will open the
Start Date/Time panel as shown above.

[Playback Speed Select] Button


Left-click this drop-down list button and then
select the playback speed you want by left-clicking it.

Even if the Playback Panel panel is closed, you can start, pause, or stop the playback from
the menu.

8 Playback 8-6
(3) Start and stop of playback
1) Left-click the [Start] button.
Then, playback starts at the speed you have selected in the Playback Panel.

Notes on Playback:
The time, date, and other information are not the current ones but the recorded ones as the logging
data.

Playback Statues:

Stop:

During playback:

When paused:

2) To terminate the playback operation, left-click the [Stop] button.


To pause the playback, left-click the [Pause] button.
To cancel the pause, left-click the [Start] button again.

ECDIS

8-7 8 Playback
8 Playback 8-8
9
Reference

9-1
9.1 Alarm Function
(1) No Alarm
Alarm
Category*1 Message*2 Alarm Type*3 Buzzer Type*4 Meaning*5 Condition*6
Colour*3

No Alarm No Alarm Normal State Green Silent No Alarm

(2) System Alarm


Alarm
Category*1 Message*2 Alarm Type*3 Buzzer Type*4 Meaning*5 Condition*6
Colour*3

No.1 POSN 1(Data) Alarm Red System Alarm POSN1 (primary) is defective or Position measuring
Position communication line is cut. instrument is
Data Alarm connected
POSN1 not fix Alarm Red System Alarm POSN1 is not fixed.
(including DR).
POSN1(NON-WGS84) Alarm Red System Alarm Geodetic system between chart and
measured position information being
received differs.
No.2 POSN 2(Data) Alarm Red System Alarm POSN2 (secondary) is defective or Position measuring
Position communication line is cut. instrument is
Data Alarm connected
POSN2 not fix Alarm Red System Alarm POSN2 is not fixed.
(including DR).
POSN2(NON-WGS84) Alarm Red System Alarm Geodetic system between chart and
measured position information being
received differs.
No.1 POSN1 shifted Alarm Red System Alarm The shift amount of the primary User setting
Position Shift position exceeds the limit being set.
Alarm
Position Position difference Alarm Red System Alarm The difference between the primary User setting.
Difference exceed and second positions exceeds the Position measuring
Alarm limit being set. instrument is
connected to
POSN2
(including DR).

Radar Data PROC(AZI) Alarm Red System Alarm Rotation signal (BP) is out of During radar
Alarm specifications. display
PROC(HL) Alarm Red System Alarm Rotation signal (BZ) is out of
specifications.
PROC(Trigger) Alarm Red System Alarm Trigger signal is out of specifications
or signal line is cut.
PROC(Video) Alarm Red System Alarm Video signal is out of specifications.
RIB(Data) Alarm Red System Alarm Error occurred in the radar interface
board.
PROC(Reverse) Alarm Red System Alarm Error by reverse-rotation in the signal
processing part.
PROC(INT) Alarm Red System Alarm Error in interrupting of stun in the
signal processing part.
ASIC1 to Radar Alarm Red System Alarm Error in interrupting from ASIC1 to
radar DSP
Target Track TT(Data) Alarm Red System Alarm Target Track is defective or signal During TT
Data Alarm line is cut. display
SRB Data SRB(Data) Alarm Red System Alarm Error occurred in the serial relay Always
Alarm board
GYRO Data Gyro I/F(Gyro) Alarm Red System Alarm Gyro is defective. Gyro is
Alarm connected.
Heading(Data) Alarm Red System Alarm Error occurred in the heading data of
gyro interface or its line is cut.
LOG Data Gyro I/F(Log) Alarm Red System Alarm Log is defective. Log is
Alarm Log(Data) Alarm Red System Alarm Error occurred in the log data of log connected.
interface or its line is cut.
Autopilot Autopilot(DATA) Alarm Red System Alarm Autopilot is defective or Autopilot is
Data Alarm communication line is cut. connected.

Hardware Fan(CPU) Alarm Red System Alarm CPU fan is defective. Always
Alarm CPU High Temperature Alarm Red System Alarm CPU temperature is rising.
Fan(Main PWR) Alarm Red System Alarm Main power supply fan is defective.
Fan(ATX PWR) Alarm Red System Alarm ATX power supply fan is defective.
Fan(LCD) Alarm Red System Alarm LCD fan is defective.
Disk1 Error Alarm Red System Alarm Disk1 is defective.
Disk2 Error Alarm Red System Alarm Disk2 is defective.
AC offline Alarm Red System Alarm AC power is offline.

9 Reference 9-2
(3) Nav. Alarm

Alarm
Category*1 Message*2 Alarm Type*3 Buzzer Type*4 Meaning*5 Condition*6
Colour*3

Safety Crossing Safety Contour Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Safety Contour within Vector = ON
contour Alarm - Mid set time. (User setting)
Alarm
Dangerous Approaching Obstruction Alarm Red Navigation [S] Approaching obstruction Sector=ON
Alarm Alarm - Mid (User setting)
Approaching Under Alarm Red Navigation [S] Approaching under-water rock
water rock Alarm - Mid
Approaching Wreck Alarm Red Navigation [S] Approaching wreck
Alarm - Mid
Dangerous Symbol Alarm Red Navigation [S] Approaching wreck
Alarm - Mid
Approaching Buoy/Light Alarm Red Navigation Approaching Buoy/Light
Alarm - Mid
Route Arrived at WPT Alarm Red Navigation Arrived at the WPT. During Normal
Monitoring Alarm - Mid route navigation
Alarm Actual course change Alarm Red Navigation [A] Necessary to change in the During TCS route
Alarm - Mid course. (It occurs before by 30 navigation
seconds which arrive at WOL.)
Off Course Alarm Red Navigation The difference between the course During route
Alarm - Mid and bearing exceeds the limit. navigation and
XTD Alarm Red Navigation The amount of the cross track error Alarm Setting =
Alarm - Mid exceeds the limit. ON
(User setting)
Arrived at LAST WPT Alarm Red Navigation Arrived at the last WPT on the sailing
Alarm - Mid final leg.
Automatic sailing failed Alarm Red Navigation Automatic sailing cannot be During automatic
Alarm - Mid continued. sailing
By one of the following causes:
POSN1 error
GYRO error
Route error
Call-back navigator Alarm Red Navigation [A] Outputs a callback navigator
Alarm - High alarm.
By one of the following causes:
ARR alarm does not occur even
after 30 seconds.
Route alarm does not occur even
after 30 seconds.
Target Alarm CPA/TCPA Alarm Red Navigation [AIS/TT] CPA(Closet Point of AIS/TT display =
Alarm - Low Approach) or TCPA(Time to CPA) ON
Lost Alarm Red Navigation [AIS/TT] Target is lost.
Alarm - Low
LAT. Limit LAT. Limit Over Alarm Red Navigation Limit Over Latitude on own ship. Always ECDIS
Over Alarm Alarm - Mid 83 00.000'N
83 00.000S
Anchor Dragging anchor Alarm Red Navigation Crossing anchor circle Anchor
Alarm Alarm - Mid circle=ON

Timer Alarm Timer Alarm Red Navigation Time out Timer=ON


Alarm - Low (User setting)
Chart Alarm Loaded different datum Alarm Red Navigation Different datum chart is loaded. Always
chart Alarm - Low
Loaded unknown datum Alarm Red Navigation [ARCS] Unknown datum chart is Chat type =
chart Alarm - Low loaded. ARCS
Chart image is Zoom out Alarm Red Navigation [ARCS] Low-resolution chart is
Alarm - Low displayed.
ARCS Alarm Security failed Alarm Red Navigation [ARCS] An alarm related to ARCS See 10.2.1
Alarm - Low security occurred. Alarm Informa-
tion of ARCS
Not up to date Alarm Red Navigation [ARCS] An alarm related to ARCS Chart.
Alarm - Low updated.
Area Alarm Traffic separation zone Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Traffic Separation Zone Vector=ON
Alarm - Mid within set time. (User setting)
Traffic Crossing Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Traffic Crossing within Alarm item=ON
Alarm - Mid set time. (User setting)
Traffic roundabout Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Traffic Roundabout
Alarm - Mid within set time.
Traffic precautionary Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Traffic Precautionary
Alarm - Mid within set time.
Two way traffic Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Two Way Traffic within
Alarm - Mid set time.

9-3 9 Reference
(3) Nav. Alarm - Continued

Alarm
Category*1 Message*2 Alarm Type*3 Buzzer Type*4 Meaning*5 Condition*6
Colour*3

Area Alarm Deeper water route Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Deeper Water Route Vector=ON
Alarm - Mid within set time. (User setting)
Recommended traffic Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Recommended Traffic Alarm item=ON
lane Alarm - Mid Lane within set time. (User setting)
Inshore traffic zone Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Inshore Traffic Zone
Alarm - Mid within set time.
Fairway Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Fairway within set time.
Alarm - Mid
Restricted area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Restricted Area within
Alarm - Mid set time.
Caution area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Caution Area within set
Alarm - Mid time.
Offshore production Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Shore Production Area
area Alarm - Mid within set time.
Military practice area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Military Practice Area
Alarm - Mid within set time.
Seaplane landing area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Seaplane Landing Area
Alarm - Mid within set time.
Submarine transit area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Submarine transit Area
Alarm - Mid within set time.
Ice area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Ice Area within set time.
Alarm - Mid
Channel Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Channel within set time.
Alarm - Mid
Fishing ground Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Fishing Ground within
Alarm - Mid set time.
Fishing prohibited Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Fishing Prohibited
Alarm - Mid within set time.
Pipeline area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Pipeline Area within set
Alarm - Mid time.
Cable area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Cable Area within set
Alarm - Mid time.
Anchorage area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Anchorage Area within
Alarm - Mid set time.
Anchorage prohibited Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Anchorage Prohibited
Alarm - Mid within set time.
Spoil ground Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Spoil Ground within set
Alarm - Mid time.
Dumping ground Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Dumping Ground within
Alarm - Mid set time.
Dredge area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Dredge Area within set
Alarm - Mid time.
Cargo transshipment Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Cargo Transshipment
area Alarm - Mid Area within set
Incineration area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Incineration Area within
Alarm - Mid set time.
Specially protected area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Specially Protected
Alarm - Mid Areas within set time.
Dangerous line Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Dangerous Line within
Alarm - Mid set time.
Dangerous Area Alarm Red Navigation [V] Crossing Dangerous Area within
Alarm - Mid set time.

(4) INFO/Warning

Alarm
Category*1 Message*2 Alarm Type*3 Buzzer Type*4 Meaning*5 Condition*6
Colour*3

Information Set Gyro Invalid Blue Operation Miss Setting up is not completed. Always
Information By one of the following causes:
POSN1 not select Invalid Blue Setting Alarm Initial course for step/synchronize
Information gyro is not set.
Safety contour not set Invalid Blue Setting Alarm POSN1 is unsetting.
Information Safety contour value is not set
(default value unchanged).
Shallow contour not set Invalid Blue Setting Alarm
Shallow contour value is not set
Information
(default value unchanged).
Deep contour not set Invalid Blue Setting Alarm Deep contour value is not set
Information (default value unchanged).
Safety depth not set Invalid Blue Setting Alarm Safety depth value is not set
Information (default value unchanged).

9 Reference 9-4
(5) INFO/Warning - continued
Alarm
Category*1 Message*2 Alarm Type*3 Buzzer Type*4 Meaning*5 Condition*6
Colour*3

Information AIS Max Target Information Blue Operation Miss [AIS] All AIS target is displayed AIS/TT display =
maximum number. ON
AIS 95% Capacity Information Blue Operation Miss [AIS] All AIS target is displayed to
95% or more of maximum number.
AIS ACT Max Information Blue Operation Miss [AIS] Activated AIS target is
displayed maximum number.
AIS ACT 95% Capacity Information Blue Operation Miss [AIS] Activated AIS target is
displayed to 95% or more of
maximum number.
Warning POSN1(HDOP) Warning Yellow Silent HDOP increase in primary GPS
(GPS accuracy decrease)
POSN2(HDOP) Warning Yellow Silent HDOP increase in secondary GPS
(GPS accuracy decrease)
Loading Non-HO chart. Warning Yellow Silent [ENC]Selecting Chart that is not
Official. (ex. C-MAP)
Over scale. Warning Yellow Silent [ENC]Two expansion displays were
multiplied from the reduced scale of
the chart when the ship moves to
another chart.
Larger scale available. Warning Yellow Silent Larger scale available.
ENC data are available. Warning Yellow Silent ENC data are available.
Position shift. Warning Yellow Silent Ships position is shifted by Offset
function.
Chart shift. Warning Yellow Silent [ARCS]Chart shift.
Chart shift to WGS84. Warning Yellow Silent [ARCS] Selecting Chart that is not
datum on WGS84.
POSN1 not differential. Warning Yellow Silent The quality indicator of POSN1 is
things except 1".
POSN2 not differential. Warning Yellow Silent The quality indicator of POSN2 is
things except 1".
Fix View. Warning Yellow Silent [ENC]Selecting Fix View
No ENC available Warning Yellow Silent [ENC] The chart at the ship position
is No ENC
Customized display Warning Yellow Silent At lease I Standard Category
checkbox in S57/C-MAP
Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3 is not checked

(6) Operation Miss

Alarm
Category*1 Message*2 Alarm Type*3 Buzzer Type*4 Meaning*5 Condition*6
Colour*3

ECDIS
Operation Invalid Data Operation Miss Blue Operation Miss The operation for which data was
Miss necessary was done with there no
position data.
No Object Operation Miss None Operation Miss The spot without the object was
selected.
Echo OFF Operation Miss None Operation Miss Echo is off because offset limit of
Radar echo was over.
Not Allowed Operation Miss None Operation Miss Invalid operation
Max Point Operation Miss None Operation Miss Entered information beyond the
specification

Note:
Some of the alarms may not be available depending on the system configuration used.

9-5 9 Reference
Remarks:
*1: Category

*2: Message (detailed description of alarm)


When an alarm occurs, the alarm button blinks in red. At the same time, the detailed description
of the alarm is displayed in the message box at the bottom of the chart display area. When the
Alarm button on the operation panel is pressed to acknowledge the alarm, the blinking alarm
stops and stays lit.
The following table shows the alarm display on the button, in the message box and the Alarm
List panel. The Alarm List panel opens when the [Alarm List] button is left-clicked.

Alarm button [Alarm List] button

Alarm display
[Alarm buttons on the display panel]

Button/Panel
Alarm Icon on Status Icon on Log
/Buzzer Alarm button Buzzer
display of Alarm List panel of Alarm List Panel
Attribution

Not acknowledged Red blinking Stay red Red blinking Red blinking Generated
Alarm
Acknowledged Not indicate Stay red Stay red Stay red Silent

Invalid Information Blue blinking Stay blue Stay blue Stay blue Generated

Information with low integrity/ Warning Not indicate Stay yellow Stay yellow Stay yellow Silent

Normal State Stay green Stay green - - Silent

*3: An alarm shown in the Alarm List panel.


*4: Audible sound from the dedicated keyboard. The sounding pattern varies with the type of alarm.
Volume of the alarm is changeable every type. ([(7)Main] [(0)Setting] [(0) Buzzer Setting])
*5: [A]: Alarm used for TCS only, [V]: Alarm detected by the danger detection vector (vector area),
[S]: Alarm detected by the guard ring (sector area)
*6: Condition to detect an alarm may depend on the hardware to be used.

9 Reference 9-6
9.2 Chart-Related Alarm Information
9.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart
When ARCS chart is displayed on ECDIS, chart-related alarms may occur frequently. It is obligated to
display these alarms on ECDIS, and such frequent occurrence of the alarms is not the result of a
malfunction of ECDIS. JRCs ECDIS is designed to read the chart and permit information of ARCS and
display such alarm information.

Alarm Information of ARCS chart


Timing and place of
No. Error message Measures to take
displaying error message
1 ARCS01 The contents of the GB.LCN file Ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the Displayed in Chart Portfolio
have been altered. You may be in breach authorized license (Chart Permit). Your when Navigation & Planning is
of the licensing arrangements that relate license has been falsified, so it is invalid. started, when ARCS Informa-
to the use of the chart. tion of User Maintenance
License is invalid. Please contact your Menu is checked, and when
ARCS agent/ distributor to correct this the chart is imported.
error.
2 ARCS02 Chart Chart#. Chart Permit Register Chart Permit again. Chart Displayed in Chart Portfolio
corrupted. Please reload original media. Permit is in abnormal state. If the when the chart is imported
re-registration of Chart Permit does not
restore the system to normal operation,
ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the
authorized license (Chart Permit).
3 ARCS03 Chart Chart#. Update Import data from the latest chart CD and Displayed in Chart Portfolio
information relates to a newer version of update CD. The chart version of the when the chart is imported
the chart. Please load the chart CD that update CD does not match the imported
contain Chart# with an issue date of chart version.
RCID.
4 ARCS04 Chart Chart#. The chart data Import data from the latest chart CD and Displayed in Chart Portfolio
already incorporates this update informa- update CD. The data on the current when the chart is imported
tion. Please load the latest update CD. update CD is already imported.
5 ARCS05 Chart Chart#. License expired - Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. Displayed in Chart Portfolio
updating is not permitted. Please contact Your license has already expired, so when the chart is imported
your agent to re-new license. updating is not permitted. (only for Navigator Service
Edition)
6 ARCS08 Warning - License expired in Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. Displayed in the panel when
less than one month. Please contact your Your license (Chart Permit) will expire in the chart is displayed (only for ECDIS
ARCS agent for a license renewal. less than a month. Navigator Service Edition)
7 ARCS09 Chart Chart#. Warning - License Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. Displayed in the panel when
expired. The displayed chart may not be One month has not passed yet since the the chart is displayed (only for
up to date. Contact your Agent to arrange expiry date of your license (Chart Permit). Navigator Service Edition)
for a license renewal.
8 ARCS10 Chart Chart#. License expired. Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. Displayed in the panel when
ARCS charts can not be displayed. One month or more has passed since the the chart is displayed (only for
Contact your ARCS agent for a license expiry date of your license (Chart Permit). Navigator Service Edition)
renewal. The chart is not displayed.
9 ARCS11 Chart Chart#. The loaded Import the latest license and chart CD. Displayed in the panel when
version of this chart is too old to be used The chart encryption version number does the chart is displayed (only for
with the license. Please load a more not match the encryption version number Navigator Service Edition)
recent version of the chart. Chart version of your license (Chart Permit). The chart
is Enc#, Permit version is Penc#. is not displayed.

9-7 9 Reference
Alarm Information of ARCS chart (continued)
Timing and place of
No. Error message Measures to take
displaying error message
10 ARCS12 Chart Chart#. The license is too Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. Displayed in the panel when
old to be used with this version of the The chart encryption version number does the chart is displayed (only for
chart. Please contact your agent to obtain not match the encryption version number Navigator Service Edition)
a new license. of your license (Chart Permit). The chart
is not displayed.
11 Larger Scale available More detailed charts than the currently Displayed in the message area
displayed chart can be displayed. when the chart is displayed
Larger-scale charts than the currently
displayed chart exist.
12 Chart Shift Note that the currently displayed chart Displayed in the message area
position is shifted. The display position when the chart is displayed
of the current chart is shifted in
accordance with user-defined setting.
13 Chart Shift To WGS84 Note that the currently displayed chart Displayed in the message area
position is shifted. The displayed chart is when the chart is displayed
not of the WGS-84 geodetic system, but it
is displayed in accordance with WGS-84
while the offset value of chart data is used
as reference.
14 WGS84 position cannot be related Note that the geodetic system of the Displayed in the message area
accurately to chart Chart#. currently displayed chart does not when the chart is displayed
conform to WGS-84. An offset value is
not set to WGS-84, so the chart cannot be
shifted to WGS-84.
15 Loading different datum chart Note that the geodetic system of the Displayed in the message area
currently displayed chart is not WGS-84. when the chart is displayed
A chart of a non-WGS-84 geodetic system
is displayed.
16 Loaded unknown datum chart Note that the currently displayed chart is Displayed in the message area
of an unknown geodetic system. A chart when the chart is displayed
whose geodetic system is not set in chart
data is displayed.
17 PIN Error Check for the Personal Identification Displayed in the panel when a
Number (PIN). The entered PIN is not PIN is entered at start of
correct. Navigation & Planning
18 Data error(0xFFFFFF79):Chart Permit Register Chart Permit again. Chart Displayed in Chart Portfolio
corrupted. Please reload original media. Permit is in abnormal state. If the when the chart is imported
re-registration of Chart Permit does not
restore the system to normal operation,
ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the
authorized license (Chart Permit).

Note 1 : # in the error message column denotes a name, ID or number.


Note 2 : Two types of ARCS are available, Skipper Service and Navigator Service. Update support is
provided for the latter but not for the former. ARCS06, 07, and 13-18 pertain to Skipper Service
only.

9 Reference 9-8
9.2.2 Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart
This section explains the details of the alarm information that may appear while C-MAP Ed.3 chart is
displayed on ECDIS.

No. Error message Measures to take


1 C-MAP Ed.3 : No license installed. License has not yet been installed. Register the license in Chart
Portfolio.
2 C-MAP Ed.3 : One or more licenses expired. Please The license is invalid. The chart is displayed only for 15 minute
contact your C-MAP agent for a license renewal. after it is started. Contact your C-MAP agent to request license
renewal.
3 C-MAP Ed.3 : One or more licenses will expire at The license will expire on DD/MM/YYYY. It will expire in less than
DD/MM/YYYY. Please contact your C-MAP agent 2 months. Contact your C-MAP agent to request license renewal.
for a license renewal.
4 C-MAP Ed.3 : Key device (e-Token) not found. C-MAP security device (eToken) cannot be recognized. Press
[POWER] to exit the software and OS, and then, press [POWER]
again to start the equipment.
5 C-MAP Ed.3 : COM error Com port error was detected. Press [POWER] to exit the
software and OS, and then, press [POWER] again to start the
equipment.
6 C-MAP Ed.3 : Unknown error An unknown error was detected. Press [POWER] to exit the
software and OS, and then, press [POWER] again to start the
equipment.

ECDIS

9-9 9 Reference
9.2.3 Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart
This section explains the details of the alarm information that may appear inside the log window of Chart
Portfolio while S-57/S-63 chart is imported/updated on ECDIS.

When Base CD is used


No. Error message Cause Procedure
1 error(0x00000001) A chart defined in the catalog This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: File not found file on the chart CD is not chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
found. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

2 error(0x00000002) A catalog file on the chart CD This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: File Length contains a data length error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

3 error(0x00000003) The chart CD contains a file This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: File extention extension error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

4 error(0x00000004) A chart file is found on the This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: File count chart CD. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

5 error(0x00000005) Specified data is not found on This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Data not found the chart CD. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

6 error(0x00000006) The chart CD contains a file This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Data error data error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

7 error(0x00000007) A chart file on the chart CD This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: CRC contains a CRC value error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

8 error(0x00000008) The chart CD contains an This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Exchange exchange target data error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

9 error(0x00000009) The chart CD contains a file This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Data structure structure error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

9 Reference 9-10
When Base CD is used (continued)
No. Error message Cause Procedure
10 error(0x0000000A) The attribute value of an This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Attribute object defined in a chart file chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
on the chart CD is incorrect. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

11 error(0x0000000B) Internal memory address Contact selling agency of chart.


error: Instruction error (instruction section)
Address

12 error(0x0000000C) Internal memory offset error Contact selling agency of chart.


error: Instruction offset (instruction section)

13 error(0x0000000D) Memory allocation error (PL Contact selling agency of chart.


error: PL Rule Memory rule section)

14 error(0x0000000E) Data acquisition error (PL Contact selling agency of chart.


error: PL Rule rule section)
Information

15 error(0x0000000F) Chart-object attribute Contact selling agency of chart.


error: Attribute acquisition error
Information

16 error(0x00000010) SENC file write error Contact selling agency of chart.


error: Enc File write

17 error(0x00000011) Chart-object information Contact selling agency of chart.


error: Object Class get acquisition error

18 error(0x00000012) File path error Contact selling agency of chart.


error: Directory create

19 error(0x00000013) A chart object on the chart This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Topology CD contains a topology error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

20 error(0x00000014) A chart area object on the This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Area Object Link chart CD contains a link error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

21 error(0x00000015) A line object on the chart CD This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Line Object Link contains a link error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
ECDIS
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

22 error(0x00000016) A chart object on the chart This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Object outside CD is beyond the boundary. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
range Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

9-11 9 Reference
When Update CD is used
No. Error message Cause Procedure
1 error(0x00000001) Memory allocation error Contact selling agency of chart.
error: Memory get

2 error(0x00000002) Chart index acquisition error An index needs to be created again. Index creation may
error: Index get take several hours.
Contact your JRC sales representative.

3 error(0x00000003) SENC file is not found. An index needs to be created again. Index creation may
error: File not found take several hours.
Contact your JRC sales representative.

4 error(0x00000004) A chart file on the chart CD This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: CRC contains a CRC value error. chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

5 error(0x00000005) The update CD contains an This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Exchange exchange target data error. chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

6 error(0x00000006) The update CD contains a file This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Data structure structure error. chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

7 error(0x00000007) A chart defined in a catalog This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Data not found file on the update CD is not chart cannot be updated.
found. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

8 error(0x00000008) A SENC chart object name is This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Object not found not found. chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

9 error(0x00000009) SENC chart-file size Contact selling agency of chart.


error: Chart Cell size acquisition error

10 error(0x0000000A) SENC chart file acquisition Contact selling agency of chart.


error: Chart Cell data error

11 error(0x0000000B) SENC warning-file size Contact selling agency of chart.


error: Warning Cell size acquisition error

12 error(0x0000000C) SENC warning file Contact selling agency of chart.


error: Warning Cell data acquisition error

13 error(0x0000000D) The update CD contains an This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Sequential update number sequence chart cannot be updated.
number error error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

9 Reference 9-12
When Update CD is used (continued)
No. Error message Cause Procedure
14 error(0x0000000E) An update chart on the This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Object index update CD contains an object chart cannot be updated.
index error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

15 error(0x0000000F) An update chart on the This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Attribute update CD contains an chart cannot be updated.
information attribute information error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

16 error(0x00000010) An update chart on the This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Attribute update CD contains an chart cannot be updated.
attribute value error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

17 error(0x00000011) Internal memory address Contact selling agency of chart.


error: Instruction error (instruction section)
Address

18 error(0x00000012) Internal memory offset error Contact selling agency of chart.


error: Instruction Offset (instruction section)

19 error(0x00000013) Memory allocation error (PL Contact selling agency of chart.


error: PL Rule Memory rule section)

20 error(0x00000014) Data acquisition error (PL Contact selling agency of chart.


error: PL Rule rule section)
Information

21 error(0x00000015) SENC file write error Contact selling agency of chart.


error: Enc File write

22 error(0x00000016) Chart-object information Contact selling agency of chart.


error: Object Class get acquisition error

23 error(0x00000017) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Data structure data structure error. chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

24 error(0x00000018) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: FFPC delete data structure error (FFPC chart cannot be updated.
field deletion). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.
ECDIS
25 error(0x00000019) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: FFPC edit data structure error (FFPC chart cannot be updated.
field change). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

26 error(0x0000001A) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: FSPC delete data structure error (FSPC chart cannot be updated.
field deletion). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

9-13 9 Reference
When Update CD is used (continued)
No. Error message Cause Procedure
27 error(0x0000001B) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: FSPC edit data structure error (FSPC chart cannot be updated.
field change). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

28 error(0x0000001C) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: VRPC delete data structure error (VRPC chart cannot be updated.
field deletion). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

29 error(0x0000001D) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: VRPC edit data structure error (VRPC chart cannot be updated.
field change). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

30 error(0x0000001E) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: SGCC delete data structure error (SGCC chart cannot be updated.
field deletion). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

31 error(0x0000001F) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: SGCC edit data structure error (SGCC chart cannot be updated.
field change). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

32 error(0x00000020) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Coordinate Type data structure error chart cannot be updated.
(coordinate type). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

33 error(0x00000021) File path error Contact selling agency of chart.


error: Directory create

34 error(0x00000022) A chart object on the update This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Topology CD contains a topology error. chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

35 error(0x00000023) A chart area object on the This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
Area Object Link update CD contains a link chart cannot be updated.
error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

36 error(0x00000024) A chart line object on the This error is not fatal.


error: Line Object Link update CD contains a link Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
error. again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

9 Reference 9-14
When Update CD is used (continued)
No. Error message Cause Procedure
37 error(0x00000025) A chart object on the update This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Object outside CD is beyond the boundary. chart cannot be updated.
range Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

38 error(0x00000026) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: point chart point object error. chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

39 error(0x00000027) Chart CD Edition number This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Edition number error chart cannot be updated.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.

ECDIS

9-15 9 Reference
9.3 Abbreviation for Geodetic System
No. Abbreviation Des cription No. Abbreviation Des cription
1 WGS-72 World Geodetic Sys tem 1972 57 KAN Kandawala
2 WGS-84 World Geodetic Sys tem 1984 58 KEG Kerguelen Is land 1949
3 EUR European 1950 59 KEA Kertau 1948
5 ADI Adindan 60 KUS Kus aie As tro 1951
6 AFG Afgooye 61 LCF L. C. 5 As tro 1961
7 AIN Ain el Abd 1970 62 LEH Leigon
8 ANO Anna 1 As tro 1965 63 LIB Liberia 1964
9 AIA Antigua Is land As tro 1943 64 LUZ Luzon
10 ARF Arc 1950 65 MIK Mahe 1971
11 ARS Arc 1960 66 MAS Mas s awa
12 ASC As cens ion Is land 1958 67 MER Merchich
13 ATF As tro beacon "E" 1945 68 MID Midway As tro 1961
14 SHB As tro DOS 71/4 69 MIN Minna
15 TRN As tro Tern Is land (FRIG) 1961 70 ASM Monts errat Is land As tro 1958
16 ASQ As tronom ical Station 1952 71 MPO M'Poraloko
17 AUA Aus tralian Geodetic 1966 72 NAH Nahrwan
18 AUG Aus tralian Geodetic 1984 73 NAP Naparim a, BWI
19 PHA Ayabelle Lighthous e 74 NAS North Am erican 1927
20 IBE Bellevue (IGN) 75 NAR North Am erican 1983
21 BER Berm uda 1957 76 FLO Obs ervatorio Meteorologico 1939
22 BID Bis s au 77 OEG Old Egyptian 1907
23 BOO Bogota Obs ervatory 78 OHA Old Hawaiian
24 BUR Bukit Rim pah 79 FAH Om an
25 CAZ Cam p Area As tro 80 OGB Ordnance Survey of Great Britain
26 CAI Cam po Inchaus pe 1969 1936
27 CAO Canton As tro 1966 81 PLN Pico de las Nieves
28 CAP Cape 82 PIT Pitcairn As tro 1967
29 CAC Cape Canaveral 83 PTB Point 58
30 CGE Carthage 84 PTN Pointe Noire 1948
31 CHI Chatam Is land As tro 1971 85 POS Porto Santo 1936
32 CHU Chua As tro 86 PRP Provis ional South Am erican 1956
33 COA Corrego Alegre 87 HIT Provis ional South Chilean 1963
34 DAL Dabola (als o known as Hito XVIII 1963)
35 BAT Djakarta (Batavia) 88 PUR Puerto Rico
36 GIZ DOS 1968 89 QAT Qatar national
37 EAS Eas ter Is land 1967 90 QUO Qornoq
37 EUS European 1979 91 REU Reunion
39 FOT Fort Thom as 1955 92 MOD Rom e 1940
40 GAA Gan 1970 93 SAE Santo (DOS) 1965
41 GEO Geodetic Datum 1949 94 SAO Sao Braz
42 GRA Gracios a Bas e SW 1948 95 SAP Sapper Hill 1943
43 GUA Guam 1963 96 SCK Schwarzeck
44 GSE Gunung Segara 97 SGM Selvagem Grande 1938
45 DOB GUX 1 As tro 98 SAN South Am erican 1969
46 HEN Herat North 99 SOA South As ia
47 HJO Hjors ey 1955 100 TAN Tananarive Obs ervatory 1925
48 HKD Hong Kong 1963 101 TIL Tim balai 1948
49 HTN Hu-Tzu-Shan 102 TOY Tokyo
50 IND Indian Indian 1954 103 TDC Tris tan As tro 1968
51 INF Indian 1975 104 MVS Viti Levu 1916
52 INH Ireland 1965 105 ENW Wake-Eniwetok 1960
53 TRL ISTS 061 106 WAK Wake Is land As tro 1952
54 ISG As tro 1968 107 YAC Yacare
55 IST ISTS 073 As tro 1969 108 ZAN Zanderij
56 JOH Johns ton Is land 1961 114 PUK Pulkovo 1942
115 SPK S-42 (Pulkovo 1942)

9 Reference 9-16
9.4 List of standard terms, units and abbreviations
Term Abbreviation Term Abbreviation
Acknowledge ACK Change CHG
Acquire, Acquisition ACQ Circularly Polarised CP
Acquisition Zone AZ Clear CLR
Adjust, Adjustment ADJ Closest Point of Approach CPA
Compact Disk Read Only
Aft AFT CDROM
Memory
Consistent Common Reference
Alarm ALARM CCRP
Point
Consistent Common Reference
Altitude ALT CCRS
System
Amplitude Modulation AM Contrast CONT
Anchor Watch ANCH Coordinated Universal Time UTC
Antenna ANT Correction CORR
Anti Clutter Rain RAIN Course CRS
Anti Clutter Sea SEA Course Over the Ground COG
April APR Course Through the Water CTW
Audible AUD Course To Steer CTS
August AUG Course Up C UP
Automatic AUTO Cross Track Distance XTD
Automatic Frequency Control AFC Cursor CURS
Automatic Gain Control AGC Dangerous Goods DG
Automatic Identification
AIS Date DATE
System
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid ARPA Day DAY
Dead Reckoning, Dead Reckoned
Autopilot AP DR
Position ECDIS

Auxiliary System/Function AUX December DEC


Available AVAIL Decrease DECR
Azimuth Indicator AZI Delay DELAY
Background BKGND Delete DEL
Bearing BRG Departure DEP
Bearing Waypoint To Waypoint BWW Depth DPTH
Bow Crossing Range BCR Destination DEST
Bow Crossing Time BCT Deviation DEV
Brilliance BRILL Differential GLONASS DGLONASS
Built in Test Equipment BITE Differential GNSS DGNSS
Calibrate CAL Differential GPS DGPS
Cancel CNCL Digital Selective Calling DSC
Carried (for example, carried
C Display DISP
EBL origin)
Central Processing Unit CPU Distance DIST
Centre CENT Distance Root Mean Square DRMS

9-17 9 Reference
List of standard terms, units and abbreviations (continued)
Term Abbreviation Term Abbreviation
Global Maritime Distress and
Distance To Go DTG GMDSS
Safety System
Global Navigation Satellite
Drift DRIFT GNSS
System
Dropped(for example, dropped EBL Global Orbiting Navigation
D GLONASS
origin) Satellite System
East E Global Positioning System GPS
Echo Reference REF Great Circle GC
Electronic Bearing Line EBL Grid GRID
Electronic Chart Display and
ECDIS Ground GND
Information System
Electronic Chart System ECS Grounding Avoidance System GAS
Electronic Navigational Chart ENC Group Repetition Interval GRI
Electronic Position Fixing System EPFS Guard Zone GZ
Electronic Range and Bearing Line ERBL Gyro GYRO
Emergency Position Indicating Radio Harmful Substances(applies
EPIRB HS
Beacon to AIS)
Enhance ENH Head Up H UP
Enter ENT Heading HDG
Equipment EQUIP Heading Control System HCS
Error ERR Heading Line HL
Estimated Position EP High Frequency HF
Estimated Time of Arrival ETA High Speed Craft HSC
Horizontal Dilution Of
Estimated Time of Departure ETD HDOP
Precision
European Geo-Stationary
EGNOS I - Band I-Band
Navigational Overlay System
Event EVENT Identification ID
Exclusion Zone EZ In IN
External EXT Increase INCR
F - Band (applies to Radar) F-Band Indication IND
February FEB Information INFO
Foreword FWD Infrared INF RED
Fishing Vessel FISH Initialization INIT
Fix FIX Input INP
Forward FWD Input/Output I/O
Frequency FREQ Integrated Bridge System IBS
Frequency Modulation FM Integrated Navigation System INS
Integrated Radio
Full FULL IRCS
Communication System
Gain GAIN Interference Rejection IR
Geographics GEOG Interswitch ISW
Geometric Dilution Of Precision GDOP Interval INT

9 Reference 9-18
List of standard terms, units and abbreviations (continued)
Term Abbreviation Term Abbreviation
January JAN North N
July JUL North Up N UP
June JUN Not Less Than NLT
Label LBL Not More Than NMT
Latitude LAT Not Under Command NUC
Latitude/Longitude L/L November NOV
Leeway LWY October OCT
Limit LIM Off OFF
Line Of Position LOP Officer On Watch OOW
Log LOG Offset OFFSET
Long Pulse LP On ON
Long Range LR Out/Output OUT
Longitude LON Own Ship OS
Loran LORAN Panel Illumination PANEL
Lost Target LOST LOST TGT Parallel Index Line PI
PAST
Low Frequency LF Past Positions
POSN
Magnetic MAG Passenger Vessel PASSV
Man Overboard MOB Performance Monitor MON
Manoeuvre MVR Permanent PERM
Manual MAN Person Overboard POB
Personal Identification
Map(s) MAP PIN
Number
March MAR Pilot Vessel PILOT
Maritime Mobile Services Identity
MMSI Port/Portside PORT
number
Maritime Pollutant (applies to AIS) MP Position POSN
ECDIS
Positional Dilution Of
Maritime Safety Information MSI PDOP
Precision
Marker MKR Power PWR
Master MSTR Predicted PRED
Maximum MAX Predicted Area of Danger PAD
Predicted Point of
May MAY PPC
Collision
Medium Frequency MF Pulse Length PL
Medium Pulse MP Pulse Modulation PM
Pulse Repetition
Menu MENU PRF
Frequency
Minimum MIN Pulse Repetition Rate PRR
Missing MISSING Pulses Per Revolution PPR
Mute MUTE Racon RACON
Navigation NAV Radar RADAR
Night NT Radar Plotting RP
Normal NORM Radius RAD

9-19 9 Reference
List of standard terms, units and abbreviations (continued)
Term Abbreviation Term Abbreviation
Rain RAIN Speed Over the Ground SOG
Range RNG Speed Through the Water STW
Range Rings RR Stabilized STAB
Raster Chart Display System RCDS Standby STBY
Raster Navigational Chart RNC Starboard/Starboard Side STBD
Rate Of Turn ROT Station STN
Real-time Kinemetic RTK Symbol(s) SYM
Receive Rx RX Synchronized/Synchronous SYNC
Receiver RCDR Target TGT
Receiver Autonomous Integrity
RAIM Target Tracking TT
Monitoring
Reference REF Test TEST
Relative REL Time TIME
Relative Motion RM Time Difference TD
Revolutions per Minute RPM Time Dilution Of Precision TDOP
Rhumb Line RL Time Of Arrival TOA
Roll On/Roll Off Vessel RoRo Time Of Departure TOD
Root Mean Square RMS Time to CPA TCPA
Route ROUTE Time To Go TTG
Safety Contour SF CNT Time to Wheel Over Line TWOL
Sailing Vessel SAIL Track TRK
Satellite SAT Track Control System TCS
S-Band S-BAND Tracking TRKG
Scan to Scan SC/SC Trail(s) TRAIL
Search And Rescue SAR Transmit and Receive TXRX
Search And Rescue Transponder SART Transceiver TCVR
Transferred Line Of
Search And Rescue Vessel SARV TPL
Position
Select SEL Transmit TX
September SEP Transmitter TMTR
Transmitting Heading
Sequence SEQ THD
Device
Set (i.e., set and drift, or setting a
SET Transponder TPR
value)
Ships Time TIME Trial TRAIL
Short Pulse SP Trigger Pulse TRIG
Signal to Noise Ratio SNR True T
Simulation SIM True Motion TM
Slave SLAVE Tune TUNE
South S Ultrahigh Frequency UHF
Uninterruptible Power
Speed SPD UPS
Supply
Speed and Distance Measuring Universal Time,
SDME UTC
Equipment Coordinated

9 Reference 9-20
List of standard terms, units and abbreviations (continued)
Term Abbreviation Unit Abbreviation
Universal Transverse Mercator UTM Cable Length cbl
Cycles Per
Unstabilised UNSTAB cps
Second
Variable Range Marker VRM Degree(s) deg
Variation VAR Fathom(s) fm
Vector VECT Feet/Foot ft
Very High Frequency VHF Gigahertz GHz
Very Low Frequency VLF Hectopascal hPa
Vessel Aground GRND Hertz Hz
Vessel at Anchor ANCH Hour(s) hr(s)
Vessel Constrained by Draught VCD Kilohertz kHz
Vessel Engaged in Diving Operations DIVE Kilometre km
Vessel Engaged in Dredging or Underwater
DRG Kilopascal kPa
Operations
Vessel Engaged in Towing Operations TOW Knot(s) kn
Vessel Not Under Command NUC Megahertz MHz
Vessel Restricted in Manoeuvrability RIM Minute(s) min
Vessel Traffic Service VTS Nautical Mile(s) NM
Vessel Underway Using Engine UWE Second(s) sec
Video VID
Visual Display Unit VDU
Voyage VOY
Voyage Data Recorder VDR
Warning WARNING
Water WAT
Waypoint WPT
Waypoint Closure Velocity WCV ECDIS
West W
Wheel Over Line WOL
Wheel Over Point WOP
Wheel Over Time WOT
World Geodetic System WGS
X-Band X-BAND

9-21 9 Reference
9.5 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS
can Import/Export
9.5.1 File Types
Route files
User chart files
Logbook files

9.5.2 File Names


File type Import source file name Default export target file name
Route files .csv, . rtn_ (binary file name) .csv
Normal
TCS .csv, . rta_ (binary file name) .csv
2G TCS .csv, .
User chart files .csv, .
Logbooks lgb_ (specified starting date_ending date) .csv
Specified period Example: lgb_020312_020313.csv
Selected log lgb_ (selected log date_UTC time) .csv
Example: lgb_020312_132445.csv

9.5.3 CSV File Data Structure


When importing files, character strings that come after // and until the end of the line are
handled as comments.
Commas (,) are used as delimiters.

Example:
// SYMBOL,InstName,,,,,,
// Comment,,,,,,,
// Lat,,,Lon,,
SYMBOL,BOYSHP01,,,,
User comment,,,,,
30,6.433,N,129,35.583,E

9 Reference 9-22
9.5.3.1 Route Files
(1) Normal Routes

Line Contents Examples, etc. Import*1 Export*2

1*3 // (Space) Fixed character string


ROUTE SHEET exported by JRC Fixed character string
ECDIS.
2 // (Space) Fixed character string
<<NOTE>>This strings // indicate Variable length character
comment column/cells. You can string
edit freely.
3 // (Space) Fixed character string
Route name Route name of source file
, Fixed character
<Normal> Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Route comments Comments from the
source file
4 // (Space) Fixed character string
WP No. Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Lon Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
ECDIS
, Fixed character
Prt [nm] Fixed character
, Fixed character
Stb [nm] Fixed character
, Fixed character
Arr Rad [nm] Fixed character
, Fixed character
Speed [nm] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Sail (RL/GC) Fixed character string
, Fixed character

*1 Information acquired when importing. (Same for all below)


*2 Information to be exported. (Same for all below)
*3 Lines with gray backgrounds indicate that those lines are comment lines. (Same for all below)

9-23 9 Reference
(1) Normal Routes - continued

Line Contents Examples, etc. Import Export

Time Zone Fixed character string


, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Name Fixed character string
5 WP number 000
, Fixed character
Latitude degree value 35
, Fixed character
Latitude minute value 35.123
, Fixed character
Latitude code (N/S) N
, Fixed character
Longitude degree value 139
, Fixed character
Longitude minute value 48.234
, Fixed character
Longitude code (E/W) E
, Fixed character
Port side route width 0.50
, Fixed character
Starboard side route width 0.50
, Fixed character
Arrival circle radius 0.50
, Fixed character
Planned speed 12.30
, Fixed character
Navigation method (RL/GC) RL
, Fixed character
Time zone 09:00
, Fixed character
Time zone code (E/W) E
, Fixed character
Name Yokohama
6 Repeat from line five for each
waypoint.

In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (degree value, minute value and code)
are filled with .

9 Reference 9-24
(2) TCS Routes

Line Contents Examples, etc. Import Export

1 // (Space) Fixed character string


ROUTE SHEET exported by JRC Fixed character string
ECDIS.
2 // (Space) Fixed character string
<<NOTE>>This strings // indicate Variable length character
comment column/cells. You can string
edit freely.
3 // (Space) Fixed character string
Route name Route name of source file
, Fixed character
<ANTS> Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Route comments Comments from the
source file
4 // (Space) Fixed character string
WP No. Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Lon Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Prt [nm] Fixed character ECDIS

, Fixed character
Stb [nm] Fixed character
, Fixed character
Speed [nm] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Sail (RL/GC) Fixed character string
, Fixed character
ROT [deg/min] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Turn Rad [nm] Fixed character string
, Fixed character

9-25 9 Reference
(2) TCS Routes - continued

Line Contents Examples, etc. Import Export

Time Zone Fixed character string


, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Name Fixed character string
5 WP number 000
, Fixed character
Latitude degree value 35
, Fixed character
Latitude minute value 35.123
, Fixed character
Latitude code (N/S) N
, Fixed character
Longitude degree value 139
, Fixed character
Longitude minute value 48.234
, Fixed character
Longitude code (E/W) E
, Fixed character
Port side route width 0.50
, Fixed character
Starboard side route width 0.50
, Fixed character
Planned speed 12.30
, Fixed character
Navigation method (RL/GC) RL
, Fixed character
Turning rate 10.00
, Fixed character
Turn circle radius 0.50
, Fixed character
Time zone 09:00
, Fixed character
Time zone code (E/W) E
, Fixed character
Name Yokohama
6 Repeat from line five for each
waypoint.

In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (degree value, minute value and code)
are filled with .

9 Reference 9-26
(3) 2G TCS Routes

Line Contents Examples, etc. Import

1 ; Fixed character
(Space) x 63 characters Fixed character string
2 WP number 000
, Fixed character
Latitude degree value 3535.123
, Fixed character
Latitude code (N/S) N
, Fixed character
Longitude degree value 13948.234
, Fixed character
Longitude code (E/W) E
, Fixed character
Port side route width 0.50
, Fixed character
Starboard side route width 0.50
, Fixed character
Arrival circle radius 0.50
, Fixed character
Planned speed 12.30
, Fixed character
Navigation method (RL/GC) RL
, Fixed character
Turning rate 010.0
, Fixed character
Turning circle radius 0.50
ECDIS
, Fixed character
Time zone 09:00
, Fixed character
Time zone code (E/W) E
, Fixed character
Name Yokohama
3 Repeat from line second for each
waypoint.

In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (numeric values and codes) are ignored.

9-27 9 Reference
9.5.3.2 User Chart Files
(1) Header Records

Line Contents Examples, etc. Import

1 // (Space) Fixed character string


USER CHART SHEET exported Fixed character string
by JRC ECDIS.
2 // (Space) Fixed character string
<<NOTE>>This strings // indicate Variable length character
comment column/cells. You can string
edit freely.
3 // (Space) Fixed character string
User chart name File name of the source file
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
User chart comments Comments from the
source file

9 Reference 9-28
(2) Object Records
a) Symbols

Line Contents Examples, etc. Import

m // (Space) Fixed character string


SYMBOL Fixed character string
, Fixed character
InstName Fixed character string
+1 // (Space) Fixed character string
Comment Fixed character string
+2 // (Space) Fixed character string
Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Lon Fixed character string
+3 SYMBOL Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Instruction name - 1 Instruction name
, Fixed character
Instruction name - 2 Instruction name
, Fixed character
Instruction name - 3 Instruction name
+4 Comments Comments
+5 Latitude degree value 35
, Fixed character
Latitude minute value 35.123
, Fixed character
ECDIS
Latitude code (N/S) N
, Fixed character
Longitude degree value 139
, Fixed character
Longitude minute value 48.234
, Fixed character
Longitude code (E/W) E

Unused instruction name fields are filled with .

9-29 9 Reference
b) (Poly) Lines

Line Contents Examples, etc. Import

m // (Space) Fixed character string


LINE Fixed character string
, Fixed character
InstName Fixed character string
+1 // (Space) Fixed character string
Comment Fixed character string
+2 // (Space) Fixed character string
Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Lon Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Add END to the end of vertex. Fixed character string
+3 LINE Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Instruction name Instruction name
+4 Comments Comments
+5 Latitude degree value of the apex 35
, Fixed character
Latitude minute value of the apex 35.123
, Fixed character
Latitude code of the apex (N/S) N
, Fixed character
Longitude degree value of the 139
apex
, Fixed character
Longitude minute value of the 48.234
apex
, Fixed character
Longitude code of the apex (E/W) E
+n Repeat for the number of apexes
plus five lines
END Fixed character string
(position end)

For lines without instructions, fill in the instruction name field with .
When importing, attributes that are not specified here are imported with specific attributes.

9 Reference 9-30
c) Arc

Line Contents Examples, etc. Import

m // (Space) Fixed character string


ARC Fixed character string
+1 // (Space) Fixed character string
Comment Fixed character string
+2 // (Space) Fixed character string
Base Point-Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Base Point-Lon Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Radius [nm] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Start Angle [deg] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
End Angle [deg] Fixed character string
+3 ARC Fixed character string
+4 Comments Comments
+5 Latitude degree value of the 35
reference position
, Fixed character
Latitude minute value of the 35.123
reference position
ECDIS
, Fixed character
Latitude code of the reference N
position (N/S)
, Fixed character
Longitude degree value of the 139
reference position
, Fixed character
Longitude minute value of the 48.234
reference position
, Fixed character
Longitude code of the reference E
position (E/W)
, Fixed character
Radius 2.0
, Fixed character

9-31 9 Reference
c) Arc -continued

Line Contents Examples, etc. Import

Starting angle 120.0


, Fixed character
Ending angle 180.0

When importing, attributes that are not specified here are imported with specific attributes.

d) User Danger Lines

Line Contents Examples, etc. Import

m // (Space) Fixed character string


DANGER_LINE Fixed character string
+1 // (Space) Fixed character string
Comment Fixed character string
+2 Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Lon Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Add END to the end of vertex. Fixed character string
+3 DANGER_LINE Fixed character string
+4 Comments Comments
+5 Latitude degree value of the apex 35
, Fixed character
Latitude minute value of the apex 35.123
, Fixed character
Latitude code of the apex (N/S) N
, Fixed character
Longitude degree value of the 139
apex
, Fixed character
Longitude minute value of the 48.234
apex
, Fixed character
Longitude code of the apex (E/W) E
+n Repeat for the number of apexes
plus two lines
END Fixed character string
(position end)

When importing, attributes that are not specified here are imported with specific attributes.

9 Reference 9-32
e) Polygons

Line Contents Examples, etc. Import

m // (Space) Fixed character string


POLYGON Fixed character string
+1 // (Space) Fixed character string
Comment Fixed character string
+2 Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Lon Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Add END to the end of vertex. Fixed character string
+3 POLYGON Fixed character string
+4 Comments Comments
+5 Latitude degree value of the 35
apex
, Fixed character
Latitude minute value of the 35.123
apex
, Fixed character
Latitude code of the apex (N/S) N
, Fixed character
Longitude degree value of the 139
apex
, Fixed character
Longitude minute value of the 48.234
apex ECDIS

, Fixed character
Longitude code of the apex E
(E/W)
+n Repeat for the number of
apexes plus two lines
END Fixed character string
(position end)

When importing, attributes that are not specified here are imported with specific attributes.

9-33 9 Reference
f) Circles

Line Contents Examples, etc. Import

m // (Space) Fixed character string


CIRCLE Fixed character string
+1 // (Space) Fixed character string
Comment Fixed character string
+2 // (Space) Fixed character string
Base Point-Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Base Point-Lon Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Radius [nm] Fixed character string
+3 CIRCLE Fixed character string
+4 Comments Comments
+5 Latitude degree value of the 35
reference position
, Fixed character
Latitude minute value of the 35.123
reference position
, Fixed character
Latitude code of the reference N
position (N/S)
, Fixed character
Longitude degree value of the 139
reference position
, Fixed character
Longitude minute value of the 48.234
reference position
, Fixed character
Longitude code of the reference E
position (E/W)
, Fixed character
Radius 2.0

9 Reference 9-34
g) Ellipses

Line Contents Examples, etc. Import

m // (Space) Fixed character string


ELLIPSE Fixed character string
+1 // (Space) Fixed character string
Comment Fixed character string
+2 // (Space) Fixed character string
Base Point-Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Base Point-Lon Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Horizontal Radius [nm] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Vertical Radius [nm] Fixed character string
+3 ELLIPSE Fixed character string
+4 Comments Comments
+5 Latitude degree value of the 35
reference position
, Fixed character
Latitude minute value of the 35.123
reference position
, Fixed character
Latitude code of the reference N
ECDIS
position (N/S)
, Fixed character
Longitude degree value of the 139
reference position
, Fixed character
Longitude minute value of the 48.234
reference position
, Fixed character
Longitude code of the reference E
position (E/W)
, Fixed character
Horizontal radius 2.00
, Fixed character
Vertical radius 1.50

9-35 9 Reference
h) Fans

Line Contents Examples, etc. Import

m // (Space) Fixed character string


FAN Fixed character string
+1 // (Space) Fixed character string
Comment Fixed character string
+2 // (Space) Fixed character string
Base Point-Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Base Point-Lon Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Radius [nm] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Start Angle [deg] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
End Angle [deg] Fixed character string
+3 FAN Fixed character string
+4 Comments Comments
+5 Latitude degree value of the 35
reference position
, Fixed character
Latitude minute value of the 35.123
reference position
, Fixed character
Latitude code of the reference N
position (N/S)
, Fixed character
Longitude degree value of the 139
reference position
, Fixed character
Longitude minute value of the 48.234
reference position
, Fixed character
Longitude code of the reference E
position (E/W)
, Fixed character
Radius 2.0
, Fixed character
Starting angle 120.0
, Fixed character
Ending angle 180.0

9 Reference 9-36
i) User Danger Areas

Line Contents Examples, etc. Import

m // (Space) Fixed character string


DANGER_AREA Fixed character string
+1 // (Space) Fixed character string
Comment Fixed character string
+2 Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Lon Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Add END to the end of vertex. Fixed character string
+3 DANGER_AREA Fixed character string
+4 Comments Comments
+5 Latitude degree value of the 35
apex
, Fixed character
Latitude minute value of the 35.123
apex
, Fixed character
Latitude code of the apex (N/S) N
, Fixed character
Longitude degree value of the 139
apex
, Fixed character
Longitude minute value of the 48.234
apex ECDIS

, Fixed character
Longitude code of the apex E
(E/W)
+n Repeat for the number of
apexes plus two lines
END Fixed character string
(position end)

When importing, attributes that are not specified here are imported with specific attributes.

9-37 9 Reference
j) Text

Line Contents Examples, etc. Import

m // (Space) Fixed character string


TEXT Fixed character string
+1 // (Space) Fixed character string
Comment Fixed character string
+2 Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Lon Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Rotation Fixed character string
+3 TEXT Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Text Fast current. Caution.
+4 Comments Comments
+5 Latitude degree value of the 35
apex
, Fixed character
Latitude minute value of the 35.123
apex
, Fixed character
Latitude code of the apex (N/S) N
, Fixed character
Longitude degree value of the 139
apex
, Fixed character
Longitude minute value of the 48.234
apex
, Fixed character
Longitude code of the apex E
(E/W)
, Fixed character
Rotation angle 123
, Fixed character
Font size 14

When importing, attributes that are not specified here are imported with specific attributes.

9 Reference 9-38
9.5.3.3 Logbook File
Line Contents Examples, etc. Import

1 // (Space) Fixed character string


LOGBOOK SHEET exported by Fixed character string
JRC ECDIS.
2 // (Space) Fixed character string
<<NOTE>>This strings // Variable length character
indicate comment column/cells. string
You can edit freely.
3 No Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Date Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Time Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Event Fixed character string
, Fixed character
POS1 Fixed character string
, Fixed character
POS2 Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Lat Fixed character string
,